800 4929 10_Desk Set_Environment_Reference_Guide_199006 10 Desk Set Environment Reference Guide 199006

800-4929-10_DeskSet_Environment_Reference_Guide_199006 800-4929-10_DeskSet_Environment_Reference_Guide_199006

User Manual: 800-4929-10_DeskSet_Environment_Reference_Guide_199006

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 302

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

DeskSet™ Environment Reference
Guide

Pan No: 800-4929-10
Revision At of 11 June 1990

The Sun logo, Sun Microsystems, Sun Workstation, and TOPS are registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Sun, Sun-2, Sun-3, Sun-4, Sun386i, SPARCstation, SPARCserver, NeWS, NFS, NSE, SPARC,
SunInstall, SunLink, SunNet, SunOS, SunPro, DeskSet, OpenWincc}ws, and SunView are trademarks of
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T. OPEN LOOK is a trademark of AT&T.
PoSTSCRIPT is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc. Adobe also owns copyrights related to the
PoSTSCRIPT language and the PoSTSCRIPT interpreter. The trademark PoSTSCRIPT is only used herein to
refer to material supplied by Adobe or to programs written in the POSTSCRIPT language as defined by
Adobe.
All other products or services mentioned in this document are identified by the trademarks or service
marks of their respective companies or organizations, and Sun Microsystems, Inc. disclaims any
responsibility for specifying which marks are owned by which companies or organizations.

Copyright © 1990 Sun Microsystems, Inc.-Printed in the U.S.A.
All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by copyright hereon may be reproduced in any form or
by any means-graphic, electronic, or mechanical-including photocopying, recording, taping, or storage
in an information retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner.
Restricted rights legend: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. government is subject to restrictions
set forth in subparagraph c.l.n of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS
52.227-7013 and in similar clauses in the FAR and NASA FAR Supplement.
Sun's Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems for its users and licensees. Sun
acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox Corporation in researching and developing the concept of
visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer industry. Sun holds a nonexclusive license from Xerox
to the Xerox Graphical User Interface, which license also covers Sun's licensees.
This product is protected by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 4,777,485; 4,688,190; 4,527,232;
4,745,407; 4,679,014; 4,435,792; 4,719,569; and 4,550,368, in addition to foreign patents and applications
pending.

Contents
Preface

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Xll.l

Chapter 1 Getting Started .................................................................. 1
1.1 Starting DeskSet Applications ................................................ 2
1.2 Drag and Drop ......................................................................... 3
Chapter 2 File Manager .................................................................... 5
2.1 The File Manager Icons .......................................................... 5

2.2 The File Manager Base Windows ........................................... 6

File Manager Icons ................................................................. 6
Selecting and Operating on File Manager Icons •................•... 7
The Control Area .........:............................................................ 8
The Path Pane ...................•...................................................... 11
The Folder Pane ...................................................................... 13
Changing Folders ...............................•.........•.......................... 15
Opening Files ...........................•....•.....•.....••

............... 15

Creating New Flies and Folders •..•.•......•
2.3 CopYing and Moving Files .•..•..........
Drag and Drop ......................••..
The Clipboard. .•........•.•........•....•......

Moving Files and Folders Using Drag
Moving Files and Folders Using Cut and

...........• 23

Moving and Copying Multiple Files ........................................ 24
iii

Copying or Moving Encoded Mail Messages .......................... 25
2.4 Printing Flies .....••..............•....•..•............................................. 27
2.5 Finding Files and Folders ........................................................ 28
Using the Goto Text Field and Button •................................... 28
Using the Find Pop-up Window ............ ~ ................................. 29
Finding Files ...................•.....•.•...••...•..•..••............................... 30
2.6 Using the Wastebasket ................•....•.. •............... .............. ...... 32
Creating a New Wastebasket .................................................. 33
Undeleting Flles and Folders •.••.............................................. 34
Emptying the Wastebasket ...................................................... 34
2.7 Linking Files ........................................................................... 36
Creating a Link ........................................................................ 36
Removing a Link ..................................................................... 38
2.8 Copying Files to Other Systems .............................................. 38
2.9 File and Folder Properties ................•...................................... 40
Changing Properties ................................................................ 42
2.10 Customizing Your File Manager ............. ~ ............................... 43
Path Pane Display Options ..................•................................... 43
File Manager Tool Properties ..•......................................... ~ .... 46
The Your Commands Menu .....•...........•....................•............. 49
2.11 Shortcuts .................................................................................. 51
Pop-up Menus •...........................................•....•.........•............. 51
Using the Home Menu ..................................

...•....•....... 52

2.12 Troubleshooting •..•••..........•..•.....•••...•....

Chapter 3 Mail Tool ..........................
3.1 How Mail Tool Is Organized ••
3.2 TheMail Tool Icons ..........................
3.3 The Primary Mail Tool Base Window ...•.

.......... 56

Controls ...............................................•.•................................. 56

Mail Message Headers .................•.......................................... 59
Status Messages •...................................... :.............................. 59
Selecting Message Headers ...•................................................. 59
Finding Messages .............•...•.................................................. 60
3.4 Viewing Messages ............................................;..................... 61
Using the Pushpin in the View Message Window .................. 62
Viewing the Next or Previous Message .................................. 62
Viewing Messages With a Full Header ................................... 63
Viewing Multiple Mail Messages ........................................... 64
3.5 Pri.nting Messages ................................................................... 65
3.6 Deleting Messages .................................................................. 66
3.7 Undeleting Messages ..................................................•........... 67
3.8 The Compose Base Window .............................................•..•.. 68
Composing Messages ............................................................... 70
Replying to Messages ............................................................. 73
Using the Vacation Notifier .................................................... 74
3.9 Saving Changes for Mail Tool ......... ~ ...................................... 76
3.10 Customizing Your Mail Tool .................................................. 77
Mail Arrival Properties ........................................................... 78
Composition Header Properties .............................................. 78
Template Properties ................................................................ 80
General Properties ........•...•.......................•.......•...................... 82
3.11 Organizing Your Mail Messages ..............•..

•.....•••.. 83

Creating a New Mail File •............•...•...•..
Adding Messages to an Existing
Viewing a Mail File ...................
Sorting the Contents of a Mail File

3.12 Shortcuts ............................................... .
Pop-up Menus ............................................. .

v

........•.... 86

Creating and Using Templates ................................................ 87
Creating and Using Mail Tool Distribution Lists ................... 88

3.13 Using Drag and Drop with Mail Tool ..................................... 89
3.14 Troubleshooting •..................................................................... 90

Chapter 4 Calendar Manager .................................... ~ ....................... 93
4.1 Calendar Manager Views ....•................................................... 93
Icon ...•.•....•.•.....•...............•......................•................................ 93
Window .•......•...................•..•....••............................................. 94
4.2 Scheduling and Editing Appointments ................................... 98
Entering a New Appointment ............................................ ;.... 1()()
Deleting an Existing Appointment ........................................... 103
Editing an Existing Appointment ...................................•........ 104

4.3 Customizing Your Calendar Manager .................................... 105
Editor Defaults Properties ....................................................... 106
Day Boundaries and View Properties ........... .............. ............ 107
Browser Calendars Properties ........................................... ~ ..... 108
Access List and Pennissions Properties ............................ ~ ..... 111
4.4 Browsing Remote Calendars ................................................... 114
Adding Another User's Appointments to the Browser ........... 114
Browsing a Remote Calendar ................................................. 115
Deleting A User from the Browse Menu •............................... 116

4.5 Printing Calendar Views ......................................................... 117
The Printer Options Pop-up Window ...•..
Day View ........................................ .
Week View ............................•..•
Month View ..............................
Year View .•.•.......•.......................•...

4.6 Drag and Drop from Mail Tool to the
Creating an Appointment Message from Mail

...... 122
•.............. 122

Dragging an Appointment Message from Mail Tool .............. 123
4.7 Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 125

Chapter 5 Text Editor .............................................................•.......... 127
5.1 The Text Editor Icon ............................................................... 127
5.2 The Text Editor Base Window ................................................ 121
The Control Area ..................................................................... 12&

5.3 Selecting Text ...................•.......•.............................................. 136
5.4 Operating on Text ................•..•............................................... 136

5.5 Splitting Panes ......................................................................... 137"
5.6 Drag and Drop ......................................................................... 137
5.7 Customizing Your Text Editor ................................................ 138
The .text_extras_menu File ..................................................... 138
The .textswrc File .................................................................... 139
Fonnat of the .textswrc File .................................................... 140

Chapter 6 Print Tool and Tape Tool ................................................. 141
6.1 Print Tool ................................................................................ 141
The Print Tool Icon ................................................................. 141
The Print Tool Base Window .................................................. 142
Printing a File ............................................................................ 142
Choosing Another Printer ......................................................... 144Using the Print Tool Filters ..•..........~ ...........•................•.......... 144
Checking the Print Queue Status •................•

......... 145

Stopping Printing ....•..........................
Troubleshooting ......•.....•..•...........
6.2 Tape Tool ••......••......•......•.•.•.......

1-

The Tape Tool Icon ........•...•.•..••...••..
The Tape Tool Base Window .....•..........
The Tape Tool Properties Window ................

vii

..... 141
............... 148.

Listing Files from a Tape ........................................................ 150
Editing the List of Files in the Tape Contents Window .......... 151
Reading Files from a Tape ...................................................... 152
Writing Files to a Tape ............................................................ 153
Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 155

Chapter 7 Snapshot ........................................................................... 157
7.1 The Snapshot Icon and Base Window .................................... 157

7.2 Locating and Naming Snapshot Files ..................................... 158
7.3 Setting the Timer ..................................................................... 158
7.4 Hiding Snapshot During Capture ............................................ 158

7.5 Snapshot B uttons ..................................................................... 159
Snapping a Window ................................................................ 159
Snapping a Region ................................................................... 160
Snapping the Screen ................................................................ 161
7.6 Viewing a Snapshot ................................................................. 161

7.7 Printing a Snapshot ................................................................. 162
7.8 Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 163
Chapter 8 Shell Tool, Command Tool, and Console ........................ 165
8.1 Shell Tool ................................................................................ 165
The Shell Tool Pop-up Menu .................................................. 166
8.2 Command Tool •...................•.......•................................•......... 167
The Command Tool Pop-up Menu ...............

8.3 Console ........................................... .

...... 169

8.4 Troubleshooting ............................

Chapter 9 Clock and Performance
9.1 Clock ........•..................•.............•.........
Customizing the Clock ...•............•...............
9.2 Performance Meter .................................................................. 173

The Perfonnance Meter Pop-up Menu .................................... 173
Customizing Perfonnance Meters ........................................... 174
9.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 175

Chapter 10 Calculator ......................................................................... 177
10.1 The Calculator Icon and Base Window ..........•....................... 177
10.2 Performing Simple Calculations ............................................. 178
10.3 Mooes of Operation ................................................................ 178
Numeric Bases •.............................................•......................... 178
Display Notation ..................................................................... 179
Major Calculator Mooes .......................................................... 180
Number Manipulation Functions ............................................ 181
10.4 Miscellaneous Functions ......................................................... 182
10.5 Memory Registers ................................................................... 183
10.6 User Defined Functions ................................................ ...... ..... 184
10.7 Financial Functions ................................................................. 185
10.8 I...ogical Functions .................................................................... 187
10.9 Scientific Functions .................................................. .-.............. 187
10.10 Troubleshooting ....... ~ ........................................................... 188

Chapter 11 Icon Editor ........................................................................ 189
11.1 The Icon Editor Icon and Base Window ................................. 189

11.2 Filing Options ...•..... ...... ...... ...... .......... .... .......... .......... .... .... ..... 190
wading a File ................................................

..••••....... 190

Saving a File......................................... .
Browsing for Icon Files •.................

11.3 The View Menu ....•...•.•.•.............
Grid Display ...................................
Icon Size .......................•...........••.••..•....•..
Preview Window ............................•.........•.....

ix

... 193
.....•••........ 194

11.4 The Edit Menu ........................................................................ 195
Undo •....................................................................................... 196
Draw Pop-up Window ............................................................ 196
Invert .........•............................•................................................ 201
Clear ........................................................................................ 202
11.5 Customizing Your Icon Editor ................................................ 202
Chapter 12 Binder ............................................................................... 203
12.1 The Binder Icon and Window ................................................. 203
Types of Bindings .................................................................... 204
Binder Options ........................................................................ 205
12.2 Creating a New Binding .......................................................... 205
12.3 Specifying Color ..................................................................... 207
12.4 Binding an Application to Data Files ...................................... 207
12.5 Binding a Print Script............................................................... 208
12.6 Document ID and Filter(s) ....................................................... 209
12.7 Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 209
Appendix A Differences Between SunView and the OpenWindows
DeskSet Environment ........................................... ~ .....•...... 213
A.l Select then Operate .................................................................. 213
A.2 Drag and Drop .......................................................................... 213
A.3 Mouse Buttons ....•.................................................................... 213
A.4 Pushpin ...........................•.........•.....................
A.5 Double-Click to Open Icons .......•.......•....

•................. 214
.......... 214

A.6 Mail Tool Changes ...........................
Appendix B Keyboard Accelerators ••....

5

B.l Erase Functions ............................. ..
B.2 Move Caret Functions .............•................
B.3 Function Keys .................................................................•....... 215

B.4 Calculator Function Keys ........................................................ 216
Appendix C DeskSet Environment Application Man Pages ............... 217
binder man page ............................................................................... 219
calctool man page.............................................................~ ............... 220
clock man page................................................................................. 226
cm man page .................................................................................... 227
cmdtool man page ........................................................................... 230
fllemgr man page ............................................................................. 233
iconedit man page ............................................................................ 236
mail tool man page ............................................................................ 240
perfmeter man page .......................................................................... 247
printtool man page ........................................................................... 249
rpc.cmsd man page ........................................................................... 251
shelltool man page ........................................................................... 252
tapetool man page ............................................................................ 255
textedit man page ...................................... ~ ...................................... 258
xview man page .......................................................................

u

••••••

263

.Xdefaults file .......................................................................... 269

xi

Preface
This book describes the DeskSet™ Environment for OpenWindowsTM. The
DeskSet Environment is a group of productivity applications.

Audience

This book is written for users who are familiar with Sun windowing environments
and mouse and menu-driven applications. Refer to the OpenWindows User's
Guide for infonnation on how to use the mouse, icons, windows, menus, and the
on-line Help facility. If you have used SunView™ applications, see Appendix A
for a list of differences between the SunView and the OpenWindows DeskSet
Environments.

How This Book Is
Organized

Chapter 1, Getting Started, contains a brief sunUnary of the DeskSet
applications.
Chapter 2, File Manager, describes the DeskSet application that provides a

graphical display of the UNIX~ file system.

Chapter 3, Mail Tool, describes the Desk.Set application that provides a
convenient and intuitive way to use UNIX mail handling facilities.
Chapter 4, Calendar Manager, describes the DeskSet resource and schedule
management tool.
Chapter S, Text Editor,describes the DeskSet ASCII text editing application.
Chapter 6, Print Tool and Tape Tool, describes the DeskSet tools that provide
an easy-to-use interface to the UNIX printing and tape archiving commands.
Chapter 7, Snapshot, describes the DeskSet application that you can use to take
black and white or color snapshots of regions, windows, or the entire screen.
Chapter 8, Shell Tool, Command Tool, and Console, describes the three
standard shell applications.
Chapter 9, Clock and Performance Meter, describes the clock and perfonnance
meter applications.
Chapter 10, Calculator, describes the DeskSet calculator.
Chapter 11, Icon Editor, describes the DeskSet application that you can use to
edit and create your own icon images.

xiii

Revision A of 11 June 1990

xiv

DeskSet Environment Refel'ence Guide

Chapter 12, Binder, describes the DeskSet application that you can use to connect
or bind different types of files with printing methods, application opening and
viewing methods, and File Manager icons and colors.
Appendix A, Differences between Sun View and the OpenWindows DeskSet
Environment, provides a list of functional differences between the two
environments.
Appendix B, Keyboard Accelerators, provides a list of keyboard accelerators
that are common to the DeskSet applications.

Appendix C, DeskSet Environment Application Man Pages, provides the
system man page summaries for the DeskSet applications.

Conventions

Other Books

The following conventions are used in this book:
o

Terms introduced for the first time, variables, and book titles are in italic type.

o

Names of buttons, menu items, and settings have Initial Capitals.

o

Text that you type and system listing information is in Typewriter font.

o

Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals (for example, "Press the
Return key").

o

Names of mouse buttons are referred to by function, not by location, and are
capitalized. For example "Press SELECf" is used, not '~Press left." The default mouse button function assignments are: "SELEIT' = left mouse button,
"ADJUST" =middle mouse button, and "MENU" =right mouse button.

For additional information, refer to the following books that are available with the
SunOS and OpenWindows documentation packages:

o Getting Started
o

SunOS User's Guide: Doing More with SunOS

o OpenWindows User's Guide

Support

o

OpenWindows Release Notes

o

OpenWindows Installation and Start-up Guide

o

On-Line Help: Press Fl or the Help key

For additional help, refer to the following resources:
CJ

The Read This First information provided with this product contains a list of
known problems and suggests solutions or workarounds. It also contains a

support telephone number that you can use while your software is under warranty or under a service contract.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter - Preface xv

CJ

The Software Technical Bulletin maintains an ongoing reference service.
Check the cumulative index for relevant articles. If you have a Sun support
contract, see the technical contact person named in that contract for a master
copy of the Software Technical Bulletin.

You can order a support contract through your local Sun sales office.

Revision A of l11une 1990

xvi

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

1
Getting Started
'This chapter introduces the DeskSet Environment for OpenWindows.
TIle DeskSet Environment contains the following applications:

(] The File Manager application is a graphical file management program. A file
is a collection of infonnation - a document, an application, or a directory.
With File Manager you can find, copy, move, open, close, create, delete, and
print files.
(] The Mail Tool application is a powerful tool for composing, sending, sorting,
and storing electronic mail.
(] The Calendar Manager application is an appointment and resource scheduling
tool.

(] The Text Editor application is a convenient, easy-to-use interactive text editor.
(] The Print Tool application provides a convenient and intuitive way for you to
print files.
(] The Tape Tool application provides a convenient and intuitive way for you to
archive and retrieve files using a streaming tape cartridge.
(] The Snapshot appUcation provides a convenient and intuitive way for you to
take snapshots of regions, windows, or the entire workspace.
(] The Shell Tool provides a tty command-Une interpreter. When you type a
command at the command line, the shell accepts and interprets the command
and runs it as a separate process.
(] The Command Tool and Console provide a text-editorbased tty command-line
intetpreter.
o The Performance Meter provides a graphic display of system and ne~ork
perfolDlance.
o

The Clock provides an on-line time and date display.

o

The Calculator application is a scientific calculator designed to perform a
variety of mathematical functions in much the same way as many hand-held

calculators.

a

The Icon Editor provides a way to create and store your own icon images.

1

Revision A of 11 JlDle 1990

2

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

o

The Binder provides a way to check the default system bindings, to customize
the visual display of icons in the Ftle Manager, and to specify default print
scripts for use with the Print Tool.

One of the features of the DeskSet Environment is the way the applications are
integrated with one another. TIle integration configuration enables you to "drag"
files from one application and "drop" them on another application in order to
perform functions such as copying, moving, printing, and backing up fues. This
drag-and-drop method of direct and intuitive maniJX1lation is introduced in this
chapter and explained in more detail in the chapter for each application.

1.1 Starting DeskSet
Applications

Figure 1-1

You typically access DeskSet applications from the Programs Submenu of the
Workspace menu, described in the OpenWindows User's Guide. When the
DeskSet applications are installed on your system, they are automatically provided
as items in the Programs submenu, as shown in Figure 1-1.

The Programs Submenu with DeskSet appUcations
.-G:Q Programs

~ommand Toot.
Utilities
Properties ...
Exit..

)

text Editor...
File Manager...
Mall Tool...
Calendar Manager...
Clock...
Calculator...
Print Tool. ..
Tape Tool...
Binder...
Snapshot ..
Icon Editor...
Performance Meter...
Shell Tool...
Dbx Tool ...
Demos...

You can also start any of the DeskSet applications from a system prompt in a
Command Tool or Shell Tool window by typing filename & and pressing the
Return key. Table 1-1 shows what you type to start each DeskSet application.

Revision A of ll1une 1990

Chapter 1 - Getting Started

Table 1-1

What you type from a prompt to start up DeskSet applications
Application Name
What You Type
Binder

binder &

Calculator

calctool &

Calendar Manager

cm &

Cock

clock &

Command Tool

cmdtool &

Console

cmdtool

File Manager

filemqr &

Icon Editor

iconedit &

Mail Tool

mail tool &

Petfonnance Meters

perfmeter &

Print Tool

printtool &

Shell Tool

shelltool &

Snapshot

snapshot &

Tape Tool

tapetool

&

. textedit

&

Text Editor

1.2 Drag and Drop

3

-c

&

Many DeskSet applications allow you to drag icons or glyphs representing files and
drop them onto other windows, icons, or glyphs. For example. you can print files
by selecting one or several data file icons, dragging them onto the Print Tool icon,
and dropping them. The term "drop" is a shortcut for the completion of a move or
duplicate operation. Follow the steps below for any drag-and-drop operations:
1. Select an object by pointing at it and clicking SELECf. Select group of objects
by pointing to an additional object and clicking ADJUST to add the object to
the group or remove it from the group if it is already selected.
2. Initiate a move by pointing to one of the selected objects, pressing SELECf,
and dragging the pointer. You initiate a duplicate, where an object is copied
instead of moved, by pressing the Control key on the keyboard and then
pressing SELECf.
3. When the hot spot of the pointer (the tip of the pointer arrow) is at an
appropriate place, drop the selection by releasing SELECT. The selection is
"dropped" to the new location.
When you drop the selection, the location of the hot spot of the pointer detennines
how the dropped selection is treated by the receiving application. The DeskSet
applications follow these rules:
Revision A of 11 June 1990

4

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

(]

When the selection is dropped on an icon or on the window, the object is
loaded into the application, replacing any information that already exists. If
the data being dropped will overwrite existing data, a Notice is displayed
allowing you to choose whether to continue or cancel the operation.

(]

When the selection is dropped onto the pane of the Mail Tool Compose
window, a Notice is displayed asldng if you want the file encoded. When you
choose Text, the data is inserted at the caret location. When you encode the
message, the encoded file is appended to the text in the Compose window. See
Chapters 2 and 3 for more information about encoding files with Mail Tool.

The following paragraphs list which of the DeskSet applications support drag-anddrop operations. This book describes drag-and-drop operations by discussing
source applications (from which you can drag data) and destination applications
(on which you can drop data). See Chapter 2 for information about the Flle
Manager as a source application. See the appropriate chapter for each applications
for information about how they support drag-and-drop operations.
Flle Manager glyphs can be dropped onto the following DeskSet applications:
(j

Text Editor

CJ

Print Tool

(j

Tape Tool

CJ

Mail Tool

(j

Wastebasket

CJ

Icon Editor

Headers for mail messages from the Mail Tool application can be dropped onto the
following DeskSet applications:
Cl

Text Editor

Cl

Print Tool

Cl

Flle Manager

Cl

Wastebasket

Cl

Calendar (with specific fonnat restrictions)

Text selections from Text Editor files can be dropped onto these applications:
Cl

Mail Tool

Cl

Text Editor

The following DeskSet applications cannot be dragged and do not accept dropped
data because they do not provide and cannot accept editable text:
Cl

Calculator Tool

Cl

Command Tool

Cl

Shell Tool

Revision A of 11 June 1990

2
File Manager
The File Manager provides a graphical display of the UNIX file system. You can
use it to find, copy, move, open, close, delete, undelete, and print files. A file can
be a directory, a collection of data, or an executable program.
The File Manager displays folder icons that represent directories, and data file and
application icons. You can select and operate on these icons within the FJ.le
Manager either directly by dragging and dropping, or indirectly by using
cut/copy/paste functionality. You can start applications from the File Manager,
reorganize your file system by moving or copying files between folders, create new
files, and print existing files. You can use the File Manager to link. files (an
alternative to the In command) and to transfer files to other machines (an
alternative to the rep command).
In addition, the icons representing individual parts of the file system can be

dragged out of the File Manager window onto the worlcspace or onto other DeskSet
application icons or windows.

2.1 The File "Manager
Icons

Figure 2-1

The icons for the File Manager and the Wastebasket base windows show you useful
infonnation about the File Manager. application. The primary icon for the File
Manager looks like a file folder. The name of the current directory is displayed
inside the rtIe folder, as shown in the example in Figure 2-1.
The File Manager icon

G;J
The Wastebasket icon looks like a wastebasket When the Wastebasket contains
files that you have not yet deleted, the icon shows papers sticking up out of the
wastebasket Figure 2-2 shows both views of the Wastebasket icon.

Figure 2-2

The Wastebasket icon, empty andfull

s

Revision A of 11 JlDle 1990

6

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

2.2 The File Manager
Base Windows

The Flle Manager is organized in a slightly different way from most of the other
DeskSet applications: It has two base windows instead of one. The primary base
window displays your file system and allows you to manipulate it The secondary
base window is a Wastebasket that you can use to remove files from your file
system. When you Stan the File Manager, the Wastebasket window is
automatically started and displayed as an icon.
The FJ.le Manager base window, shown in Figure 2-3, provides a set of controls that
you can use to manipulate your file system. TIle window has a path pane that you
use to display the operating system hierarchy and a scrollable folder pane that
always displays the contents of the open folder in the path.

Figure 2-3

The File Manager base window
Ii)

,

File .......er./... Me/It•• It••


C>

a Use TreelPath to choose the way your file system is displayed in the Path pane.
a When you view your file system as a tree; you use Hide Subfolders, Show All
Subfolders, Begin Tree Here, and Add Tree's Parent to customize the way the
file system tree is displayed in the path pane. See "Customizing Your Flle
Manager" later in this chapter for more infonnation about these choices.

a Use Folder Display to choose how the contents of the folder pane are
displayed:
•

As icons, to help you identify each file by type.

•

As a listing, to display more files in the pane and to show you more
infonnation about each individual file when you choose listing options
from the File Manager Tool Properties window. See "Flle Manager Tool
Properties" later in this chapter for more infonnation.

a Use Sort By to choose how the contents of the folder pane are sorted:
•

Alphabetically by name.

•

In reverse chronological order by date.

•

In order of file size, largest to smallest.

•

In alphabetical groups by file type, with folders first, followed by data

files, then by applications.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

10

Revision A of 11 J1,1Ile 1990

The Edit Menu

Edit has a menu, shown in Figure 2-8, with options that you use to perfonn editing
functions.

Figure 2-8

The Props Menu

The Edit menu

[]

Use Select All to select all the files in the folder pane.

[]

Use Link to create links between files. Link is inactive unless you have made
a selection in the Folder pane. See "Linking Files" later in this chapter for
more information.

[]

Use Copy to put a copy of selected file names on the clipboard. Copy is
inactive unless you have made a selection in the Folder pane.

[]

Use Paste to paste the contents of the clipboard at the pointer location in the
FJle Manager.

D

Use Cut to remove selected file names from a folder and place them on the
clipboard, in the Wastebasket, or really delete them, depending on which
option you choose from the Cut submenu. Cut is inactive unless you have
made a selection in the Folder pane.

D

Use Show Oipboard to display the current contents of the clipboard used by
the Cut/Copy/Paste commands.

Props has a menu, shown in Figure 2-9, with a File Properties item that you can use
to change file properties and a Tool Properties item that you can use to customize
the File Manager. See "File and Folder Properties" and "Customizing Your File
Manager" later in this chapter for more infonnation.

Figure 2-9

The Props menu

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager

The Home Menu

11

Home has a menu, shown in Figure 2-10, with choices that you can use to quickly
go back to your home directory or to other directories that you have accessed
recent! y. See "Shortcuts" later in this chapter for more infonnation.
Figure 2-10 The Home menu

The Goto Menu and Text Field

Ooto has a menu and a text field shown in Figure 2-11. Oloosing Fmd from the
Ooto menu displays a pop-up window that you can use to find files. See "Finding
Files and Folders" later in this chapter for more infonnation.

Figure 2-11 The Goto menu and textfield

The Path Pane

The path pane shows your file system. You can display it either as a path of
connected folders or as a hierarchical tree that shows all or part of your file system
structure.
The first time you start the File Manager, the file system will be displayed as a path.
When you start the Flle Manager any time after that, the fue system will be
displayed in the same way it was displayed when you last quit the File Manager.

Parts of the Path and Tree

The path shows only the folders for the directory and subdirectories that lead to the
current folder, which is the folder that is open. Any folders below it in the tree are
sub/olders. An example of a path is Figure 2-12, which shows the path for
thome/winsor.
TIle hierarchical "family tree" structure is another way of showing the UNIX file
system, using an analogy between the parts of a tree and the parts of the file system.
The tree can show all parts of the file system. Alternatively, it can start at any
directory or folder in the file system.

Root is the top directory in the file system. Under the root are various branches.-For example, Figure 2-13 shows root and the branches that start with the directories
bin, home, lib, and usrl.

Along with the tree analogy, there is a parent/child analogy. The root directoIy is
the parent directory. A subdirectory is also a parent directory when there are one
or more subdirectories below it Each subdirectory is a child of the parent directory
that is above it

Revision A of IlluDe 1990

12

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Which Path is Displayed

When you start the FIle Manager, it displays the path from which you started it If
you choose File Manager from the Programs submenu, it displays the path for your
home directory. The last folder in the chain is open, and its contents are displayed
in the folder pane, as shown in Figure 2-12.

Figure 2-12 An example of a home directory path in the path pane/or a user named "winsor"

12l
(File

v) (View v) (Edit v)

D
Use the items on the View menu to change the display of your file system in the

path pane. Choosing Tree from the View menu changes the display to show the
file system hierarchy, as shown in the example in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 An example of a tree structure in the path pane
File Manager: /home/wlnsor
(File

V) (View V) (Edit V)

When you display a tree, the contents of the open folder are displayed in the folder
pane (the contents of folder "winsor" in the example shown in Figure 2-13). As
you move around from folder to folder by double-clicking SELEer to open each
one, the tree display expands to show subfolders and rearranges the other branches
of the tree.
You can expand or reduce the number of folders in the tree display using the Hide
Subfolders, Show All Subfolders, Begin Tree Here, and Add Tree's Parent items
from the View menu. Once you have chosen one of these items from the menu, the
FIle Manager remembers it When you change the display back to a path and then

Revision A of 11 J\Dle 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 13

choose Tree again, the tree is displayed using the last fonnat that you chose for the
tree display. See "Customizing Your File Manager" for examples of these other
kinds of path displays.
Path Commands Pop-up Menu

The path pane has a Path Commands pop-up menu that contains some of the
commands from the control area. Choosing a command from the pop-up menu
perfonns the same operation as choosing a command from the control area. See
"Shortcuts" for more infonnation about the Path Commands pop-up menu.

The Folder Pane

The folder pane displays the contents ofthe open folder in the path pane, regardless
of how you choose to display the path. When you first start the File Manager, the
folder pane displays icons with names beneath them, as shown in Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Icons in the/older pane
rml
(File V )(Vlew V )(Edit V)

fie M.....r: lar/fIIe""r

(PrOPS V)(Homt v)(eoto: v).

~

D

0

Example,

D
D

D

fllemgr.text.mlf

. frnfolderpane1.rs.lo<:k

fhmgr.do<:

~

~

chp2fhm,r.kk

fhrngr .Image,

~

~

~

flIemtr.text.beckUCI

fdl

filem9r .c:opyfhresult.rs

fllmlF' .c:op)'I'nS9.rs

~

[dl

f.emgr.cr.atefoldermenu.n flemtr .cr.etefolderr.sult.rs

"--

-

"""i

.;1

TOe

fUemgr .doc.kk

f.emgr.tll
Show Clipboard I>

Cut

File Properties...

Up

The items on the Folder Commands menu are a subset of the commands you can
access from the File Manager control area, and worle in the same way as those
commands.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 23

Moving Files and Folders
Using Cut and Paste

To move folders and data files using the clipboard, follow the steps below:
1. Click SELECT on the file or folder to be moved to select it.
2. Move the pointer to the Edit button and press MENU.

3. Highlight Cut and drag the pointer to the right to display the Cut
submenu.
4. Highlight Move to Clipboard, as shown in Figure 2-27.

NOTE

Ifyou choose Cut to Wastebasket thefiles are moved to the Wastebasket window.
Ifyou choose Really Delete thefiles arepernuuaently removedfromyour system.

Figure 2-27 Starting a Move with Cutfrom the File Menu

,,""na'.·.'·

' - - -. . . . .-111( Really Delete

o
D

sayhey

tIHCtsw.info

D
•

blnderlcon.rs.lock

5. Release MENU.
An instruction message is displayed in the footer, as shown in Figure 2-28.

Figure 2-28 Information message when/iles are on the clipboard
Moye these file(s) by opening the target folder and selecting 'Paste'

6. Open the folder you want to receive the files.
7. Choose Paste from the Edit menu, the Folder Commands pop-up menu,
or press the Paste key on the keyboard.

While the operation is in progress, an infonnation message is displayed in thefooter. Figure 2-29 shows an example of this message.

Figure 2-29 In/ormation message while paste is in progress

Revision A of 11 June 1990

24

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Moving and Copying
Multiple Files

You can move or copy more than one file at a time to a common location using
either drag and drop or the clipboant. To move or copy files using drag and drop,
follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT to highlight the first file and then click ADJUST on each
additional file that you want to include in the group. (Click ADJUST on
a highlighted (de to deselect it, removing it from the group).

Figure 2-30 shows an example of a group of selected files.

Figure 2-30 Files highlighted/or moving

ld

ArtlsL Mode Is

~
FlveHeadFourth

il
II

BlgRlpper

Manusalpt

II

Classk

[d
MerryX mas

• •

ClownAlley

[d

PrlntFlre

[dJ

Deslgnllvlng

~

Easter_2

[d

ThanksClvlng

Valentine

2. To move, press SELECT on one of the highlighted files. To copy, press the
Control key and then press SELECT on a highlighted file. Drag the (de
on top of the receiving folder, as shown in the example in Fi.gure 2-31.

Figure 2-31 Move o/multiple/iles in progress

[d

•
•
•
•
[d)

ArtisLModels

BIgRlpper

Classk

CIOWnAII.y

D.s Ignllv 1rig

il

Ma.nusalpt

M.rryXmas

il

PrlntFlrt

il

ThanksClvlng

il

The hot spot of the pointer specifies the destination folder for moving all of the
selected files. All of the highlighted files move together.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter! - File Manager 25

3. Release SELECT and aU the files will be placed in the folder.

You can also move or copy multiple rues by using cut/copy/paste commands in the
same way you use them to move or copy one file. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Select the files to move or copy by clicking SELECT to highlight the first
file and then clicking ADJUST on each additional rde you want to include.
2. Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu as described in "Moving Files
and Folders Using Cut and Paste", or use the Cut or Copy keys on the
keyboard.
3. Open the folder where you want to put the files.
4. Choose Paste from the Edit menu, or move the pointer into the folder pane
and press the Paste key on the keyboard.

The selected files are copied or moved into the new folder.
Copying or Moving Encoded
Mail Messages onto File
Manager

As mentioned previously, you can encode ftIes by dragging and dropping them
onto the Mail Tool Compose window. When you receive a mail message that
contains encoded files, as shown by the "(By' at the begirming of the subject line,
you can decode them by dragging and dropping them onto the File Manager, as
described in the following steps:

1. Open both the File Manager and Mail Tool windows.
2. Open the folder in the File Manager where you want to put the encoded
mail message(s).
3. In the Mail Tool application, click SELECT on the header" of the mail
message that contains the encoded files.
4. Press SELECT to move or press the Control key and SELECT to copy,
and drag the pointer.

A small envelope is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-32. You can release the
Control key any time after the envelope is displayed.

RevisiGrtAof 11 JlD'le 1990

,.

26

~

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-32 Dragging a mail message with encodedfiles
rim

fie .......r: ' ......'wills.r/Ex..."es

(Fit V )(Ylew V)(Ecit V)

(Props V)(Homt V)(COto: V

1.

~

-

s.

.r-<:::=

Drag the pointer onto the folder pane of the File Manager and release
SELECT.

The mail message is decoded, and icons representing the encoded files are
displayed and selected in the folder pane of the File Manager. In the example
shown in Figure 2-33, two encoded files were included in the mail message,
artresume. doc and birdsofafeather. rs.
Figure 2-33 Decodedfiles dropped onto the File Manager
File Mana.er: thome/winsor/Examples
rID
@ill (View V) (Edit V) (props V)(Home v)(coto: V).

I~

II

II

artresume.doc

blrdsofafea ther.rs

D

company_announ

'--

-

colorpalnt

D

~

-.

-

D
D
bugs

D
D

bugtraq

:-

D
D

I

..

dlsses

company_email company _fi1anclal company_fiscal

"-

H you drop another message containing the same files, the files are oot decoded
because this would overwrite the existing files. Instead, the files are displayed with
a compress icon and a • Z suffix is added to the file name. 1be compress icon
shows two anows compressing the data in a file.
In the example shown in Figure 2-34, three encoded files were iDcluded in a
dropped mail message. The file bird. r s is decoded, displayed as an icon, and
selected. TIle other two files artresume. doc and birdsofafeather . rs
were already present in the Examples folder and did not overwrite the existing
files. They therefore appear in the Flie Manager as encoded files.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 27

Figure 2-34 Encodedfiles in the File Manager
(File V)(Vlew V)~

(props V) (Home V) (COto: V).

~

~

•

I:}

=
-

artr.sume.doc

.rtresume.doc.2

D
bugs

blr dso fa fea ther.rs.2

Opening Encoded Files

,

Fie Ma"••er: IhelM/wlnse,/E•• Mples

12)

--"

""'"

blrd.rs

..

~

[d]

f0-

r-

•

blrdsofaf.atherzs

D

bugtraq

D

same prefix as an existing file, you must first

- .,,--..- -

classes

--..

To use an encoded • Z file that has the
rename one of the files. If you rename the encoded file, make sure to keep the • Z
suffix. The first time you open the • Z file, File Manager uncompresses it Then
when you open the uncompressed file, File Manager starts up the appropriate
application to display and edit the file.

If you try to open a • Z file that still has the same prefix as another file (for example,
artresume. doc. Z in Figure 2-34), you get the following error message in the

Console window:
 already exists; not overwritten.

2.4 Printing Files

You can print flIes from the Ftle Manager in two ways:
(')

Select files in the folder pane and drag and drop them onto the Print Tool
application. Ftles are printed using the default print instructions bound to the
icon. See Chapter 6 for more information about using the Print Tool and
Chapter 12 for infonnation about print bindings.

(')

Select files in the folder pane and choose Print File from the File menu, as
shown in Figure 2-35. The Print item is inactive unless files are selected. Files
are printed using the default print script that you specify from the File Manager
Tool Properties window. See "Customizing Your File Manager" later in this
chapter for infonnation about tool properties.

Figure 2-35 Highlighting Print File in the File menu
(Open

~)

Pnnt file

Create Folder
Create Document
R.mote Transfer...
Your Commands

Do

When you print files from the File Manager, an information message is displayed
in the footer. as shown in the example in Figure 2-36.

Figure 2-36 Example of message after file sent to Printer

Revision A of 11 June 1990

28

Revision A of 11 June 1990

2.5 Finding Files and
Folders

The File Manager provides two ways to locate folders and files in your file system:
[]

TIle Goto text field and button

[]

The Fmd pop-up window

This section describes how to use these methods to find folders and files.
Using the Goto Text Field
and Button

When you know the path of the folder you want to open or the path and file name
of a specific data file that you want to select, you can type the path or the path and
filename in the Ooto text field, and either press Return or click SELECf on the
Ooto button.
When you type a path, the folder you specify is opened and its contents are
displayed in the folder pane. When you type a path and file name, the folder you
specify is opened, its contents are displayed in the folder pane, and the file name is
located, scrolled into view, and selected, as shown in the example in Figure 2-37.

Figure 2-37 Using the Goto teX/field to/ind afile
(2J

fUe Mana.er: lusr Ifile",sr

~(View V)(Edit v)

(Props V)(Home v)(coto: v)/usr/FHemgr/fm.tmp.

I~

•

filemgr .yrcmdmenuadd.rs

filemgr .yrcmdm.nunadd.rs

filemgr .yrcmds.lrs

~

~.
fmcod.drag.rs:.--_ _- . . J

When you use the Goto text field to locate a file or directory, the infonnation in the
text field is displayed on the Ooto menu. If you change your location in the file
system, you can quicldy return to that folder or file by clicking SELECfon the
Ooto button. When the text field is empty, clicking on the 0010 button does not
change your location in the file system. Figure 2-38 shows an example of an item
on the Ooto menu.

Figure 2-38 Goto menu with the most recently used destination

f'!emgr .yrcmclmenuadd.rs

[liB)
fm.tmp

fmcod.dragrs

You can use wildcard characters to select groups of related files in the currentlydisplayed folder pane by typing a pattern-matching sequence. For example, the
symbol • can be used to match any string, so typing *. r s in the Oototext field
and either pressing Return or clicking SELECf on the 0010 button will select all
files ending in .rs. Figure 2-39 shows an example of a folder pane with all *. r s
files selected.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 29

Figure 2-39 Using pattern matching with Goto to select related files
(i)
(File V) (View V) [Edit V)

(PrOPS V) (HOlM v)(coto: V) ·.rs.

~

--D

~

Examples

••
•
••..

........

•
•
•

TOC

chp2fll.mgr.backup

chp2fllemgr Jck

fll.mgr.eopyflle.rs

fM.mgr.copyflieresult.rs

fllemgr.eopymsg.rs

fl''"9r'.copypastemsg.rs

flI.mgt'.crea tefoldermenu.rs

filemgr .crea tefolderresult.rs

fUemgr.dIspia yvllw.rs

fI!emgr .dfsp/ayvlewnsultrs

••
••
i)

i)

D

fllemgr .doc.b. ckup

fDemgr.doc.lek

fl!emgr .docum.nt.rs

fllerngr ..dltrnenucutmenu.rs

flllmgr..ntercmdmenu.rs

fl!emgr .fHeopenfHers

fllemgr. fllepropmenu.rs

-

~

I}

fH.mgr.doc

fllemgr .ex.cuta ble.rs

Using the Find Pop-up
Window

-..,

File Man.ler: /usr/Fllernlr

Il

-

.J

When you do not know or C;::.'/;\ot remember the specific location of a folder or file,
or when you want to locate a group of files according to specific criteria, use the
Find pop-up window. To display the Find window, follow these steps:
1. Move the pointer to the Goto button and press MENU.
2. Highlight Find, as shown in Figure 2-40.

Figure 2-40 Goto menu with Find highlighted

3. Release MENU. The Find pop-up window is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-41.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

30

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-41 Find window
.~

,

File Mau..r: Fintl

FIM flies 1ft a ........ w toWer: /home/winsor.

Ilnduded I Excluded I
IIncluded I Excluded I

Flle.a...:
OwMr:
M••fled After:

CMM/••lvv)

M..lflH 'ef.r.:

CMM/tltl/vv)

FHe TV,.:
hare' Flies CHtalnlnl Strl..,:

ELLIc::lI[)IEJI

(Find ) (5t(·~. )

I Ignore Case I

(·)"ltl' )

'::
~

~

The Find window contains controls that allow you to perfonn the following kinds
of searches:

~inding

Files

o

Search by specific fue name.

o

Search for file names by pattern matching, using wildcard characters.

o

Include or exclude. a specific file name or pattern from the search.

o

Include or exclude a specific owner from the search.

o

Fmd files that were modified either before or after a date that you specify.

o

Search by specific fue type.

o

Search for files containing a specific text string (a word or phrase) that is either
case sensitive or case insensitive. TIlis feature uses the UNIX grep command.

To find a specific file or group of fues, you can fill in some or all of the text fields,
according to the type of search you want to perform.
o

Use the Fmd files in and below folder text field to specify where in your file
system you want to start the search. The search begins in the folder you specify
in this text field, and includes all subfoldeD in that path.

o

Use the Filename text field to specify the file name or pattern you want to
match. Use Included or Excluded to either include or exclude the pattern from
the search.

o

Use the Owner text field when you want to search for files by owner, or
exclude a particular owner from the search.

o

Use the Modified After and/or Modified Before text fields to specify a time
frame for the search. You must specify, as a minimum, the month and day for
each of these text fields.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

ChapteJ: 2 -

File Manager 31

o

Use the File Type settings to specify whether you want to search all file types,
only folders, only data files, or only executable files.

o

Use the Search Flies Containing String field when you want to find files with
specific contents. For example, to find all files in which the DeskSet product
is specifically named, you would type DeskSet in the text field. If you click
SELEer to tum on the Ignore Case setting, all files with the word "DeskSet"'
will be listed in the scrolling list, regardless of how the word is capitalized.

When you have filled in the text fields, click SELEer on the Find button to start
the search. Once you start a search, the Stop button is activated. You can stop the
search at any time by clicking SELEcr on the Stop button.
When the search is completed, all files that match the pattern are displayed in the
scrolling list at the bottom of the Fmd window. Figure 2-42 shows' an example of
a file content pattern matching search. File Manager found 10 flIes containing the
specified string.

Figure 2-42 An example of a find

.-c:o

,

file Maaa,er: find

find flies In and below folder: /home/winsor /Deskset

I Included I Excluded I
I Included I Excluded I

fUename:
Owner:
Modified After:

(nun/dd/VV)

Modified lefore:

(Mm/dd/vv)

File Tvpe:

ELL]t:llD IEIl

Search files Contain In, Str....: DeskSe\,

Il9nore Case.

I

@) (St<·fl ) (')Il':-" )

D /home/winsor /Oeskset/ch8.doc.backup
D thome/winsor /Oeskset/ch9.doc
D Ihome/wlnsor IDesksetldesksetdocplan.doc
D lhome/wlnsor IDeskset/desksetdocplan.docbackup

10 fll.(s) found

~
.J

You can select and open one file at a time from the Fmd window scrolling list. To
select a file, move the pointer onto the line and click SELEer. The line is
highlighted, and the Open button is activated, as shown in the example in
Figure 2-43. To open the highlighted file, click SELECf on the Open button.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

32

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-43 Opening afile/rom the Find window
rQ

FII. Ma_.-: F.d

F..... ,lies , .. a.ul belew fel4er: !home/winsor
File ...",.: -.rs.

Ow ...r:

I Included I EKcluded I
I Included I EKcluded I

Mdtfle" After:

(Mln/.wlvv)

Modified lef.r.:

(illmbld/vv)

File Tvpe:
Search Flies C...talAln. StrIA,:

ELLICJI DIEII

I Ignore Case I

(Find )(St<.r- HOpen )

..
:Cl/home/wlnsorIDeskset/blnderwindow.rs
/home/wlnsor /Oeskset/cakalphakeypad.rs
Ihome/wlnsor /Deskset/cakanglesettlng.rs
/home/wlnsor 100skset/cakblnaryfuns.rs
/home/wlnsor /Oeskset/calckon.rs

D
D
D
D

"r'I .L

".

~

I"

..,

163 flle(s) found

2.6 Using the
Wastebasket

The Wastebasket is a temporary storage area for files that you want to discard and
that you probably will delete from your file system. When you start the File
Manger, the Wastebasket is automatically opened and displayed as an icon, as
shown in Figure 2-44. The default position for the Wastebasket icon is the lower
right comer of the worlcspace. You can move this icon anywhere you want on the
worlcspace, or quit it if you do not intend to use it

Figure 2-44 The empty Wastebasket icon

You can move folders and files to the Wastebasket by selecting them and dragging
and dropping them onto the Wastebasket icon or window, or by cutting them to the
Wastebasket from the Edit menu.
Files that you put in the Wastebasket are stored in a • wastebasket folder in
your home directory. After you have put a file in the Wastebasket, the Wastebasket
icon's appearance is changed to remind you that at least one file is there.
Figure 245 shows the Wastebasket icon when there are files in ~e Wastebasket.

Revision Aof 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File· Manager 33

Figure 2-45 The Wastebasket icon when it contains files

The Wastebasket can hold up to 100 files before you must empty it If the
Wastebasket becomes full, a message warns you that you must empty it before you
can add any more files.
You can view the contents of the Wastebasket by opening the Wastebasket icon.
A base window is displayed with a scrolling pane that shows you the files you have
moved to the Wastebasket Figure 2-46 shows an example of some files in a
Wastebasket window.

Figure 2-46 The Wastebasket window
~

File M....'e' W.stebasket: lhome/be.bee/.w.stebasket

~

II

convert

frame_convert

~

~

Junk2

Junk3

~

hlrlng_elephants.1

D

-

mlf.flle.memo

I~

~
Junk

I"

0

wrlte.prep

-

The Wastebasket window has the standard Folder Commands pop-up menu, shown
in Figure 2-47, that you can use to operate on the flIes in the Wastebasket

Figure 2-47 The Wastebasket pop-up menu
(2)

File Manager Wastebasket: /home/winsor/.wastebasket

Beta

snaDshot.rs
Falder Commands
~~

(Open

E»

Print File
Stlect All
link
Copy

Paste
Cut
E>
Show Clipboard £>
File Properties...
Up

Creating a New Wastebasket

If you quit the Wastebasket window, you can create a new one by following these

steps:
1. In the File Manager, select a folder or file that you want to put into the
Wastebasket.

Revision A of 11 J\Dle 1990

34

Revision A of 11 June 1990

2. From the Edit menu, highlight Cut.
3. Drag the pointer to the right to display the Cut submenu, highlight Cut to
Wastebasket, as shown in Figure 2-48, and release MENU.

A new Wastebasket is created to contain the files you selected.
Figure 2-48 Highlighting Cut to Wastebasket
Copy

Paste
Show Clipb
File Proper
U~

, .. . . .~~. . . . .

Undeleting Files and Folders

You can move or copy files from the Wastebasket window in the same way that
you move or copy files in the File Manager. As long as you have not chosen Really
Delete from the Folder Commands Cut submenu, your files are accessible to you.
You can move or copy them back into the Ftle Manager using drag and drop or the
clipboard.

Emptying the Wastebasket

To empty the Wastebasket, follow these steps:
1. Open the Wastebasket window.
2. Move the pointer into the pane and press MENU to display the Folder
Commands menu.
3. Highlight Select All, as shown in Figure 2-49, and release MENU.

All of the folders and files in the Wastebasket are selected.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chap~

2 - File Manager 35

Figure 2-49 Folder Commands in the Wastebasket Window

121

o la
Beta

snapshot.rs
Folder Commands

(open
Print FDe

••u,
link

1»

~

Copy
Paste
Cut

t>
Show Clipboard t>
File Properties,"
Up

4. Press MENU again to display the Folder Commands menu.

5. Highlight Cut and drag the pointer to the right to display the Cut
submenu.
6. Highlight Really Delete, as shown in Figure 2-50.
Figure 2-50 Wastebasket menu with Really Delete highlighted
Falder Commands
(Open

t»

Print File
Select All
link

Copy
Paste
Show Clipbo

(Cut to Wastebasket)
Move to Clipboard

file Propertl
Up

7. Release MENU.

As a safeguard to be sure you intended to delete these files, the Flie Manager
displays a confinnation Notice, as shown in Figure 2-51.

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

36

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-51 Wastebasket confirmation Notice/or deleting files
121
File Manager Wastebasket: /home/wlnsor/.wastebasket

II
Beta

II

snapshot.rs

Are you sure you want to remove these file(s)?

If you click SELECf on Yes, all the selected items in the window are deleted,
and the Wastebasket is emptied.

Caution:
2.7

Linking Files

You cannot recover any files that you delete with Really Delete.
A link is a symbolic connection or pointer to a single file that allows you to access
it from more than one directory. You can set up a link to a file in a restricted
directory, allowing access to the file without providing access to the directory.
The Link command on the Edit menu executes the standard In operating system
command. A symbolic link is created when you link files between directories.
When you link files in the same directory, a hard link is created. Refer to the man
page for In for a complete description.
For example, if you have a file named Thin_man in a folder called Hammet t,
you can link it to another folder called Myrna_loy. Once the link is established,
you can access Thin_man from either folder. Thin_man has not been copied
into Myrna_loy; it is linked with a pointer from one folder to another.
Any editing changes you make to a file with links arc reflected in all of the folders,
since there is really only one file, not multiple copies of it.
To use a linked file, you can drag and drop its icon from any folder it is linked to.

Creating a Link

To link files to folders, follow these steps:
1. Select the tile (or tiles) you want to link.

2. Choose the Link command from the Edit menu, as shown in Figure 2-52.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager

37

Figure 2-52 Folder Commands menu with Link highlighted

•

archive

D D D

.rchiYing benefits

books

An instructional message is displayed in the footer, as shown in Figure 2-53,
telling you how to proceed.

Figure 2-53 Instruction message after a link is initiated
Link these flle(s) by opening the target folder and selecting 'paste'

3. Open the folder you want to link the file to.
4. Choose Paste from the Edit menu or the Folder Commands pop-up menu,
or press the Paste key on the keyboard.

The file icon is displayed in the folder pane and a message confinning the link
is displayed in the footer, as shown in the example in Figure 2-54.

Figure 2-54 An example of a link completion message

0

-

NtwFolder

~

.rtr.sume.doc.Z

D

-

fd)
bird.rs

D

.rchiye

.Iiases

fd)

----~

-

--

.rtrtsume.doc

~

birdsof.ftather.rs birdsofaf.ather.rs2

linkIng' IuS( IFllemgrIExampies/archlve' from dpboard_

Link infonnation is displayed as part of the properties of the fue, as shown in the
example in Figure 2-55. See ''File and Folder Properties" later in this chapter for
more infonnation about file properties.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

38

Revision A of 111une 1990

Figure 2-55 links are displayed as part of the file type properties.

,

.~

D

,

File Manaler: File Properties
Name: archly,.

Owner: _w_ln_sOf
_ _ _ _ _ __

Croup: staff

~-----------

Size: 0 bytes
last Modified: Mon Jan 22 16:52:481990
last Accessed: Mon Jan 29 09:47:491990

-

Tvpe: link to /usr /Fllemgr /Examples/archlve

--

You can remove a link by selecting the file and choosing Really Delete fro.m the
Cut submenu. Removing a link does not remove the original file.

Removing a Link

If you remove the original file without also deleting the link, the icon for the link
changes to display a broken chain. In the example shown in Figure 2-56, the

original file named aliases has been deleted, but the linked file remains.
Figure 2-56 A broken link
File Manager: /llome/winsor/Exampies

I2l
[File V)(View V}(Edit V)

(props

V) (Horne V) (coto:

V ). rs.

~

-2.8 Copying Files to
Other Systems

0
Hewfolder

B

aliases

D

arch/vI

~
artr.sume.doc

~

~
I-

...

T

If you are running the automounter, you can transfer files between systems in the

same way that you move and copy files on your system. The / net folder contains
all the machines on your local netwoIK.
To fmd out if auotmounter is rwming, in a Shell Tool or Command Tool type:
ps ax I grep automount
If the automounter is rwming, the system displays a message listing the process
number and other information about automounter.
If you are not running the automounter, you can use the Remote Copy item on the

Flle menu, shown in Figure 2-57, to execute the standard remote copy (rep)
operating system command, which allows you to transfer copies of files between
systems. You can copy files from your system to another system, or from another
system to YOUI'S, providing that the pennissions and ownership of directories and
files allow you to do so. See the man page for rep for more infonnation.

Revision A of ll1une 1990

Chapter 2 -File Manager 39

Figure 2-57 File Menu with Remote Copy highlighted

Print File
Create Folder
Create Document

••
• •·9
Your Commands

t>~

o

extras

o
fcs

To transfer files from your system to another system, follow these steps:
1. Select the tile or tiles you want to transfer.
2. Display the Remote Copy pop-up window by choosing Remote Copy from
the File menu.

The file names are displayed in the Source Path field of the Remote Copy
window, as shown in the example in Figure 2-58. The default for the Source
Machine is your machine. It is not necessary for you to fill in the field if your
machine is the correct Source Machine.
Figure 2-58 The Remote Copy pop-up window
~

File Manager:llemote Cop V
Source Machine: ...._ _ _ _ _ _ __
Source Pa th: (Dye artresume.doc classes

Destination Machine:
Destination Path:

-----------------

-----------------

3. Type in the name of the destination machine hi the Destination Machine
text field.
4. Type the destination path in the Destination Path text field.
In the example shown in Figure 2-59, two files, artresume. doc and
classes, will be copied to the /tmp directory on the machine named

shargola.

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

40

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-59 An example of the Remote Copy window with entries in the fields
~

File Mallager: Remote CoPV
Source Machine:
Source Pa th:

-------GIve artnsum"do( classes

Destination Machl.e: shargola

-~------

Destination path: ;..It_m..;.,..p+II--_ _ _ _ __
(COpy)

s.

Click SELECT on the Copy button to initiate the transfer.

While the transfer is in process, the Copy button displays the standard busy
pattern. When the copy is complete, the Remote Copy window is dismissed
unless you have pinned it.
To transfer files from another system to your system, you must know the path and
file name of the files you want to transfer. To transfer a file from a remote machine
to your machine, follow these steps:
1. Type the name of the remote machine in the Source Machine text field.
2. Type the path and file name of the file you want to transfer in the Source
Path text field.
3. You can leave the Destination Machine field blank or'type your machine
name.
4. Type the path and file name for the file in the Destination Path text field.
If you want to change the name of the file as part of the transfer, type the new
file name at the end of the path.

S. Click SELECT on the Copy button to start the transfer.

2.9 File and Folder
Properties

Each folder and file in ,your file system has the following set of properties
associated with it:
[] Name
[] Ownership
[] Group
[] Pennissions (read, write, execute)
You can display these properties for an individual selected file using the FIle
Properties pop-up window. You can change these properties if you own the file
and have the correct pennissions set.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 41

The File Properties window also displays the following infonnation about each
file:
[J

Date the fue was last modified

(]

Date the file was last accessed

[J

File type

[J

Mount point

(]

Mounted from

[J

Free space

Figure 2-60 shows an example of a File Properties window.

Figure 2-60 An example of a File Properties window
.-I)::Q

File Nanager: File Properties
Name: artresum•• dof;.,
Owner: winsor

----------------------------------Size: 12.896 bytes

Croup: daemon

last Modified: Fri Jan 19 09:49:00 1990
last Accessed: Mon Jan 29 13:13:331990
Tvpe: Frame Maker document
Permissions Read Write Execute
Owner:

~

Croup:

~

World:

~

if
if
if

0

0
0

Mount Point: Ihome

Mounted From: /d9Y/sd2c
Free Space: 26.511 kbytes (46%)

To display the File Properties window, select a file or a group of files and choose
File Properties from the Properties menu, as shown in Figure 2-61, or from the
Folder Commands menu. If you have not selected a file, the File Properties item
is inactive.

RevisionAof 11 June 1990

42

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-61 The Properties menu

Tool PropertIes.,

H you select more than one file, the FJle Properties window shows those properties
that the selected files can share in common. Figure 2-62 shows an example of a
FJle Properties window when multiple files are selected. The document names and
specific document infonnation are not displayed. You can change the pennissions
for the group of selected fIles to be the same by clicking SELECf on the check
boxes to change the pennissions and then clicking SELECf on the Apply button.

Figure 2-62 File Properties window
.-t:G

Fie .. ana ..r: File PropertlH

OWller~

w_in_so.....
r.o....-_ _ __

Croup: da_.m_on_ _ _ __

Size:
Last No.lfl,4:

last Accessed:
Ttl":

PerMissions lea. Write Execute
OWfter:

ernp:
Werl4:

liJ'
liJ'
!if

liJ'
liJ'
&tJ

0

0
0

Mount Pelat: /horne

No_t•• from: /dIav/sd2c

Free S,aee: 2G.511 kbytes (-4s.)

Changing Properties

Every file and directory has a security system organized around permissions.
Pennissions determine which users can read a file, write to (or change) it, or
execute it (applications are executed). You must own the file to change its
permissions. Users are categorized as owner, group, and world.
(]

Owner designates the owner of the file.

(]

Group designates the name of a specified group that can access the file.

(]

World allows access to anyone on your network.

You can change file properties for any file that you own. If you do not own the file,
the write pennissions determine whether you can access a file to change it
Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 43

To change file properties, type new infonnation in the text fields. Click SELECf
on a check box to either add or remove a check. The check boxes toggle between
checked and unchecked.
When you have changed the properties, click SELECT on the Apply button to
apply them. 1be changes take effect immediately.
You can change common properties on more than one file in the same way.

2.10 Customizing Your
File Manager

. You can customize your File Manager in the following ways:
o

You can customize the tree display of folders in the path pane.

o

You can set application-specific properties for the File Manager.

o

You can create your own custom commands and add them to the Your
Commands submenu that you access from the File menu.

These methods are described in the sections that follow.
Path Pane Display Options

The View menu contains commands that you can use to "prune" the tree view in
the path pane so that it contains branches. of the tree that are useful to you and
suppresses other folders that you may not need to access.
If you frequently move or copy files between folders, you may find that using the
tree display allows you to perfonn more operations using drag and drop, since more

folders can be displayed in the File Manager window with the Tree option than
with the Path option.
When you display your path as a tree, you can choose the following options from
the View menu:
o

Hide Subfolders

(]

Show All Subfolders

o

Begin Tree Here

o

Add Tree's Parent

Subfolders are folders that are farther down the tree than the CUtTent folder. Figure
2-63 shows a tree that contains all folders from the root directory downward.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

44

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-63 An example of a complete tree path

The following examples show a series of progressions, using each of the view
modification commands from the View menu.
Clicking SELECf on the winsor folder and choosing Hide Subfolders results in
the display shown in Figure 2-64. Compare that display with the one shown in
Figure 2-63.

Figure 2-64 An example of hiding subfolders
12)

Choosing Show Subfolders without making any other changes to the display in the
path pane produces the display shown in Figure 2-65 ..

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 4S

Figure 2-65 An example of showing sub/olders

With the winsor folder selected, choosing Begin Tree Here changes the display
as shown in Figure 2-66.

Figure 2-66 An example of changing the beginning point of the tree

Choosing Show Parent adds one folder farther up in the path, and its subfolders:, as
shown in Figure 2-67.

Revision A of 11 Jane 1990

46

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-67 An example of adding a parent/older

File Manager Tool
Properties

You can change the way File Manger behaves and the way it presents certain
infolDlation by changing controls in the Tool Properties window. To display the
Tool Properties window, choose Tool Properties from the Properties menu or move
the pointer onto the window background of the File Manager and press the
Properties key on the keyboard.
The Tool Properties window is shown in Figure 2-68.
Figure 2-68 The Tool Properties window
.~

File Manager: Tool Properties

I Permissions I ~ I Owner II Croup II Size II Date I
Hidden flies: I Invisible I Visible I
Deletions: I Confirm I D<>n:'t Confirm I
Default Document Editor: I textedltor I Other. I
list Options:

Default Print Script

.;.t;'PAlr.._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

See Filter Pattern: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

longest Fllename: 255

When you have changed the desired file manager properties, click SELECT on the
Apply button to record the changes. The tool property changes take effect
immediately and are displayed in the FIle Manager window.
List Options

The List Options allow you to choose how much infolUlation is displayed when
you display the contents of the folder pane as a list with mini-icons. To display the

list with mini-icons, choose List from Folder Display on the View menu.
The List Options are nonexclusive settings. You can choose none, some, or all of
the options. To set an option, click SELECT to toggle it from off to on, or from on

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 47

to off. Chosen options have a thickened border. Figure 2-69 shows an example of
a list when all of the list options are chosen.
Figure 2-69 A/older pane with all of the Ust Options set
,1"(2)

File a.a....r: 1......./wl"s.r

(File V) (View V HEdit V)

(props V ){Home V ) (Coto: V)..

~
c:J drw-rw-rwD-rw-rw-rwD -rw-rw-rwD -rw-rw-rwc:J drw-rw-rwc:J drw-rw-rwc:J drw-rw-rwc:J drw-rw-rwc:J drw-rw-rwc:Jdrw-rw-rwr:::l drw-rw-rwD -rw-rw-rwD-rw-rw-rw-

~

Hidden Files

--

2
1
1
1
2
2
3

2
2
2
2
1
1

winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor
winsor

-

staff
daemon
staff
daemon
staff
staff
staff
staff
staff
staff
staff
daemon
staff

12288

40571
41939

8825
2560
5632
S12
102..
358..
512
1024
12896
12896

Jan 1910:11
Jan 1909:49
Jan2913:07
Jan 19 09:49
Jan 1910:18
Jan2610:48
Jan 29 09:47
Jan 24 14:29
Jan 2212:41
Jan2212:42
Jan 2512:12
Jan 1909:-49
Jan 19 14:37

I-

220pen
A-Wletter.doc
8OFletters.doc
8OFIetters.doc.backup
calendar
Oeskset
Examples
cettlngstarted
MaHtool

~

...

f-

Prlnttool
Snapshot
artresurne.doc
artresume.doc.1

~

The Hidden Flles settings allow you to choose whether or not to display those files
ordinarily not displayed. Most hidden files begin with at least one dot (.), and are
often referred to as Dot Files. Oick SELBeI' on the setting you want to use.
Figure 2-70 shows an example of a listing with hidden files displayed.
Figure 2-70 A/older pane with Hidden Files visible
(2)
~ (View

Fae N.nager: Ihome/wlnsor

v) (Edit

V)

(props V )CHome V l(coto:

v)..

~

~
..136

D
D
D
D

~

..fYlype

• tmJcon

.bind

.cak:toolrc

.cal09

.cIockrc

.em.re

~_.cshrc

.defaults

.fflemgrrc

~

.trash.icon

D
LJ

....~
....

D
D
D

.

-

-

Deletions

The Deletions settings allow you to choose whether Flle Manager displays
confinnation notices for delete operations. It is generally a good idea to leave this
option set to Confirm. If you choose Don't Confinn, you may inadvertently delete-some information from your file system that you did not want to.

Default Document Editor

The Default Document Editor setting specifies what default editor the Flle
Manager uses to display data file icons that are not specifically bound to another
application. If you click SELECT on Other, a text field is displayed in which you
can type the name of a different text editor application. If you specify a different
text editor that does not display its own window, you must specify that a shelltool

Revision A of 11 June 1990

48

Revision A of 11 June 1990

is started before the text editor. You should also invoke the sleep command after
the shelltool and before the text editor. The sleep command gives the shelltool
enough time to start up before the text editor tries to detennine the dimensions of
the shelltool. Use the format shown in Figure 2-71, and replace the editor vi with
the editor you want to use.
Figure 2-71 The Default Document Editor textfleld
fP

File Ma...er: Tool PnJpertles
List options:
Hidden Files:
Deletions:

Default Document Editor:
Default Print Script:

I ~ IOwner II Croup I ~ IDate I
Invisible I Visible I
Confirm I Oon#t Confirm I
textltdltor I Other: I shelltool sh -c ·sleep 3; yl SFILE·
Permissions

Ipre.

-

Default Print Script

The Default Print Script text field allows you to specify a different default print
script for files that are printed from the File Manager. The default is the standard
Ipr operating system print command. If you want to print ASCII files using a
PostScript filter and without a header page, type the following into the Default
Print Script text field: cat $FILE I mp I Ipr -h.

See Filter Pattern

The See Filter Pattern text field allows you to specify that only files of a certain
type are displayed in the folder pane of the File Manager. In the example shown
in Figure 2-72, the filter pattern * . r s shows only the raster fues in a directory,
even though other flies are there. Note that the header of the window shows you
what filter pattern is set.
Figure 2-72 A/older pane with a *.rsfllter pattern set
"'(2)

@!:!) (View

file M......r: tUter: • .rs /home/wlnsor

V HEdit V)

(props

v)(Home

V) (Goto: V) ..

~

~

birdrs

ldl
ldl
ldl

brokenladyrs

CW-5Orrs

darkJow8r rs

chapter,agers

[d
dtsktopleyel,rs

Longest File Name

~

birdsof.feather,rs

[d.

-

dogrs

..

jooo

-

Id
il

doggle,rs

lI-

•

--

--

The Longest Ftle Name numeric field allows you to choose how many characters
of each file name are displayed in the folder pane of the File Manager. You can
type any number from 0 to 999. If you typically have very long file names, you can
change the default number of 25S to a shorter length, say 8 or 10, to display more
icons in the same area of the folder pane.

NOTE

The number of characters is calculated/or variable-width/onts to determine the
length of the text that is displayed. The num!Jer 0/ characters displayed/or each

file name may vary.
Revision A of 11 JlDle 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 49

Names that do not fit within the specified length are followed by a > to show that
the complete name is not displayed. Figure 2-73 shows an example of the' folder
pane with shorter file names set.
Figure 2-73 A/older pane with shorter file names specified
r(2)

,

File Manager: /home/wlnsor

~(Vlew

V) (Edit V)

(Props

V) (Home V l(Coto: V).

~

0
0

220pen

~

0

[J 0 0 0
0 Exarnple>Cettlngs>
~ [J Oeskset
Mantool Prlnttoof

~

iB

~ [J
bin

A-Wlette'llOFlette~OFlette>Calendar

Snapsho>ertresum~rtresum~rtr.sum>

~ ~ ~

D

0

'::

H

~

~ ~ ~ ~

blnderk> bird.rs birdsofa>bltmapr>brokenla>

~ ~ ~

it

~ 0mall

chapter> cursor.rsdarkpow>dead.let> desktop> dog.rs doggie.rs flyer.doc foUowm>

.-.

If you want to see the complete file name, you can double-click SELECf on the
name. In this example, the file beginning "birdsofafeather" is selected, and the full

name is displayed in an editable text field, as shown in the example in Figure 2-74.
Figure 2-74 Displaying a completeJile name when shon names are specified
file Manager: Ihome/wlnsor
(File V)(View V)(Edit V)

,

~~C§O:V).-------

I~

I

28n •.!!eJd.eJ~Lgar 0e9....8J2" M9.~ pI~1 ~
oiiliiliiJoD~Il~Ia
bin
bind eric> bircllirdsofafeather.rs

Snapsho)Qrtresum~rtresum~rtresum>

~~~D~~~~ra

chapter> ~or.rsdarkpow>dead.let> desktop> dog.rs dO~ie.rs flyer.doc foHowm>

The Your Commands Menu

okenla'

o

mall

The Your Commands menu that you access from the File menu, shown in
Figure 2-75, allows you to create and store commonly used operating system
commands. Once you have added the commands to the menu, you can use them at
any time by choosing them from the Your Commands submenu. Figure 2-75
shows the default items on the Your Commands submenu.

A.Lsun
".~

mlcrosystems

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

50

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Figure 2-75 The Your Commands submenu

p;r int file
Create Folder
Create Document
Remote Copy ...

Use the Shell item as a convenient way to open a Shell Tool window.
Use the Enter Command item to display the Enter Command pop-up window,
shown in Figure 2-76, that you use to create items to be included on the menu.

Figure 2-76 The Enter Commandpop-up window
.~

Enter Command

Command: ..
+ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Creating Your Commands

You can type any SunOS operating system command on this menu. If the
command requires a window in which to display its infonnation, be sure to include
the command for a window-based tool such as shell tool at the beginning of the
command.
Suppose you want to print a file using a print script that is different from the default
print script specified from the File Manager Tool Properties window. You can add
that command to the Your Commands menu by following the steps below:

1. Display the Enter Commands pop-up window.
Type the command in the text field. In this example you would type the
.
following: cat $FILE I Ipr -h.
This command prints files you select in the File Manager without printing a
header.

2. Move the pointer to the Enter button and click SELECT.
The command is stored in a • fvcmd file in your home directo~, and is added
to the Your Commands submenu. Figure 2-77 shows the menu with the new
command.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 51

Figure 2-77 The Your Commands submenu with a new command

J;rirlt fli.:Create Folder
Crea te Document
Remote Copy...

o

To use the item, select a fIle or files to print, and choose the command from the
Your Commands submenu. If you want to edit or remove commands from the
submenu, you must edit the • fvcmd fIle in your home directory.

2.11 Shortcuts

The File Manager provides you with pop-up menus for both the path and folder
panes, and a Home menu to help you navigate through your file system. These
shortcut features are described in the following sections.

Pop-up Menus

Pop-up menus in the DeskSet applications contain a subset of frequently-used
commands from the control area You can display and choose from a pop-up menu
anywhere in the pane by pressing the MENU mouse button, choosing an item from
the menu, and releasing MENU.
The commands on the path pane pop-up menu, shown in Figure 2-78, work the
same way as they do when you choose them from the menus in the control area.
As with other menu items in the FIle Manager and the other DeskSet tools, items
that require a selection are inactive unless you have made a selection on which the
command can operate.
Figure 2-78 The Path Pane pop-up menu
~

FII. Mana,.r: /home/wlnsor

@:!)(VieWV)(EditV)(PropsV)(HorneV)(Coto:v)...._ _ _--.,._ _
Path Comlnands

ttlriE'Subf·)lder£

Sh(-WAII SIJbfC-ldt!'.--;
(:aljir. Traio ~oi-re

Add Tr..·s Parent

Revision A of 11 June 1990

52

Revision A of 11 June 1990

The Folder Commands pop-up menu, shown in Figure 2-79, contains a different set
of commands that are more useful to the functionality of the folder pane.
Figure 2-79 The Folder Commands pop-up menu

--

141 I.

0
0

,

220pen

A-OW

Olskslt

£1

0

Snapshot

D

blnderlcon.rs.lock

n

1:01

(C:l.e'l

p.·ir.t Flit!'

u

IJ~.

~

[d)

0

Show ClIpboard c>

b r .rs

~

0
0
0

MaUtool
1:'

Flit!' p...,Pt!'.·t*~...

ij
~Oflettlrs.doc.ba>

Select All
U!lk
C·)&))'
'astl
(ut

artr

-

F..derC.......lNIs

artrlsumt.doc.2·

Calendar

I~

Print tool

bin

olroso a eatner.r itmaorevlewmem:> brokenladv.rs

...
The only command that is unique to the Folder Commands pop-up menu is the Up
command. The Up command is always inactive for the FIle Manager base window.
It is active in Folder pop-up windows and in the Wastebasket, where it is possible
to move down a path (by double-clicking SELECT on selected folders), but where
there is no other way to move back up the path. When you are at the top level of
the hierarchy in a Folder pop-up window (the folder you initially dragged onto the
worlcspace) or in the Wastebasket (the topmost folder you dl:agged or cut to the
Wastebasket), Up is inactive.
Using the Home Menu

One of the menu buttons in the control area is Home. By clicking SELECT on the
Home button, you can quickly return to your home folder from anywhere in the fue
system.
The Home button also has a menu that stores a recent history of the folders that you
have accessed since you started the File Manager. Your home folder is the default
item on this menu and is always the item at the top of the menu. The rest of the
items on the menu show you up to nine of your most recently-accessed folders.
You can change back to any of these folders by choosing the appropriate path from
the Home menu. Figure 2-80 shows an example of items on a Home menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 2 - File Manager 53

Figure 2-80 An example o/the Home menu

Ihome/wlnsor/Oeskset
!home/winsor/22open
lusr IFllemgr

2.12 Troubleshooting

If files you expect to see in the folder pane are not being displayed, check to be sure
that you have not specified a filter pattern from the File Manager Tool Properties
window that suppresses the display of those files. When a filter is specified, it is
al ways displayed in the header of the File Manager base window.
If you have trouble transferring files between remote systems, you may not have

the correct pennissions to access the fue, directory or system, or the remote system
may not be accessible through the networic. Contact the person who owns the fues
(or the person who asked you to transfer the files) to change pennissions so the
transfer will work.. To find out if the remote system is available on your networlc.,
contact your system administrator.
t

Revision A of 11 June 1990J

54

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Revision A of 11 June 1990

3
Mail Tool
The Mail Tool application provides a convenient and intuitive way to use the
UNIX mail handling facilities.
Using Mail Tool by itself, you can write, send, and receive electronic mail and
organize your mail messages into logical groupings.
Using drag and drop, Mail Tool works in combination with File Manager, Print
Tool, Text Editor, and Calendar Manager to provide an integrated workspace
environment You can organize information effectively and communicate not only
with other users on the electronic mail network but with other applications on your
workspace.
This chapter describes how to use the Mail Tool application and how you can use
the intuitive drag and drop method to copy or move ft.Ies into and out of Mail Tool
and the other DeskSet applications.

3.1 How Mail Tool Is
Organized

The Mail Tool application has two base windows. The primary base window
shows you a list of electronic mail messages that you have received. You read your
mail messages in a View Message pop-up window. To respond to messages or to
compose new messages you open a Compose base window that closes to its own
icon. Once you have opened a Compose base window, you can use it to write and
send electronic mail messages without opening the primary Mail Tool base
window. Each of these windows is described in detail later in this chapter.

3.2 TheMaii Tool Icons

The icons for each Mail Tool base window show you useful infonnation about the
Mail Tool application. The primary icon for Mail Tool, for the window that shows
you incoming mail messages, looks like a rural American mail box with the door
closed and the flag down. When new mail arrives, the flag goes up and the qoor of
the mail box opens to show you that you have new mail messages. Figure 3-1
shows these views of the mailbox icon.

Figure 3-1

The primary Mail Tool icon

mailtool

mailtool

ss

Revision A of 11 June 1990

56

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

The Compose Mail Tool icon shows an envelope, a pencil, and a label indicating
the recipient of the message. When you close the Compose window before you
have indicated the recipient(s), the '70:" label has no name. Figure 3-2 shows these
views of the Compose icon.
Figure 3-2

The Compose Mail Tool icon

-----_...
0:
3.3 The Primary Mail
Tool Base Window

o:maynat

The primary Mail Tool base window, shown in Figure 3-3, provides a set of
controls with which you access other parts of the Mail Tool application, displays a
list of your electronic mail messages, and shows you the status of your mail
messages.
The primary Mail Tool base window, by default, shows you a list of the mail
messages in your In Tray. See "Organizing Your Mail Messages" for infonnation
about moving or copying mail messages from your In Tray into mail files.

Figure 3-3

The primary Mail Tool base window
~
~(View

v)@[!) (Compose v) Mall file:

1 Br1dge@sun.com

1-tI

N

,

Mall Tool - lusrlspool/mail/wlnsor

2 ger1@shargola
3 gerieshargola
4 geritshargola
5 tut@cairo
6 ~er1 @shargo 1a
7 winsor
8 winsor

Fri
Mon
Fri
Fri
Fri
Mon
Mon
Mon

Oec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Uec
Dec

12).
1 17:98 19/792 next bridge Vednesday, Oe
4 13:19 35/895 Richard's whereabouts
8 14:98 37/1938 PS(Janice winsor)
e 14:99 639/25777 SIGCHI
8 19:51
9/159 Re: Frame 2.9 license
11 98:47 25/798 OL lunch
~b/ljblj
11 14:blj
Menu items in mult1-colum
11 15:17 14/395 ~riting about Mail Tool

~

8 messa ges. 1 new. 0 de lete d

Controls

The control area has four menu buttons: File, View, Edit, and Compose. The
following sections provide a brief introductory deSCription of each of these
controls.

The Flle Menu

File has a menu, shown in Figure 3-4, with choices that you can use to organize
your mail messages, print them, or commit changes (such as deleting messages).

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 -Mail Tool 51

Figure 3-4

The File menu
I'?IJII. . .----~

Co)"]' Irit

Previous
(Next

[j

Use Messages to view selected messages with either an abbreviated or full
.

heade~
[j

Use Previous to view the message before the current message.

[j

Use Next to view the message following the current message.

[j

Use Sort By to sort messages in your mail files. Since you canrtot sort the
messages in your In Tray, the Sort By item is inactive unless you are displaying
mail headers in yourmail files. See "Organizing Your Mail Messages" later
in this chapter for more information about mail files.

See "Viewing Messages" later in this chapter for more information about using the
first three items on the View menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

58

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

The Edit Menu

Undelete
Find...

t>

Properties...

C1

Use Cut and Copy to put selected messages onto the clipboard. You can then
paste these messages from the clipboard into other windows.

C1

Use Delete to delete selected messages.

C1

Use Undelete to restore deleted messages.

C1

Use Find to fmd messages in your In Tray by sender and/or by subject. See
"Finding Messages" later in this chapter for more infonnation about using the
Find pop-up window.

C1

Use Properties to customize your Mail Tool application. See "Customizing
Your Mail Tool" later in this chapter for more infonnation about Mail Tool
properties.

Compose has a menu, shown in Figure 3-7, with choices for opening Compose base
windows from which you can write and send mail messages.

The Compose Menu

Figure 3-7

The Compose menu

C1

Use New to open a new Compose window.

C1

Use Reply to open a Compose window to respond to a selected message. See
"Replying to Messages" later in this chapter for more infonnation about Reply
options.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 - Mail Tool 59

(]

Use Forward to open a Compose window that includes selected message for
forwaming.

(]

Use Vacation to initiate or stop an automatic response to incoming messages
when you are away from your mail. See uUsing the Vacation Notifier" later in
this chapter for more information about Vacation options.

The Mail File Text Field

You use the Mail Flle text field and abbreviated menu button to create and view
mail file messages. See UOrganizing Your Mail Messages" later in this chapter for
infonnation on creating and viewing mail files.

Mail Message Headers

Each line in the scrolling list of the primary Mail Tool base window represents a
single electronic mail message, and is called the header for the mail message. Each
header has nine columns of infonnation as follows:
a

The first column shows you the status of the mail message:
•

An arrow points to the cu"ent message.

•

An N shows you that the message is new.

•

A U shows that a message is unread.

•

A blank is displayed when you have viewed the message.

a The second column contains a message number that is automatically assigned
to messages by the Mail Tool in the order in which they arrive.

a

The third column contains the electronic mail address of the sender of the
message.

(] The fourth column contains the day of the week the message was received.

a The fifth and sixth columns contain the month and date that the message was
received.
(] The seventh column contains the time the message was received.
D

The eighth column tells you how big the message is. The first number tells you
how many lines are in the message, the second number tells you the number of
characters in the message. These numbers include the number of lines and
characters of the full message header, as well as the text of the message.

D

The ninth column contains the subject of the message when the person who
sent the message provides a subject line. An (E) at the start of the subject text
shows that the message is encoded.

Status Messages

Status messages are displayed at the right side of the footer telling you how many --messages are in your in tray, how many new messages you have and how many you
have deleted.

Selecting Message Headers

You can select each message header by moving the pointer into the line and
clicking SELECf. A selected header has a box around it, as shown in Figure 3-8.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

60

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 3-8

The primary Mail Tool base window
~
~ (View V) (Edit V)

I

.

N

.,

Mall Tool - lusrispool/ftlall/wlflsor

1
2
3
41
5
6
7

8r1dgeesun.cCIIII
gerieshargol.
ged.shargo 18'
oer H!sharoo 18
tuteca1ro
gerieshargola
winsor
B winsor
9 agteshur1ken

(compose V) Mall rile:

Fr1
Non
Fri
J"r1
fr1
Non

Man
Man
Mon

Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec

1 17:88
4 13:18
8 141:88
B 141:89
8 19:51
11 88:417
11 141:58
11 15:17
11 15: 39

121.

191782
35/895

next bridge ¥ednesday I De I':
IIRichard'. whereabouts
It;
37/1838 PS(Jan1ce winsor)

O.,t:J/~O(((

9/159

25178a
26/858
141/395

281766

~miCHI

Re: frame 2.8 license
Ol lunch
Menu items in IlUlti-colun
Yriting about Mail Tool
New Style
c:::l

9 messages. , new. 0 deleted

You can select more than one message at a time for most of the Mail Tool
operations. To select additional messages, move the pointer into the line and click
ADJUST. If a message is already selected, clicking ADJUST deselects it.
When a message or group of messages is selected, you can choose commands from
a Mail Tool menu, or you can drag and drop the messages from Mail Tool onto
other applications such as File Manager, Calendar Manager, Print Tool or Tape
Tool.
Finding Messages

To help you find messages, you can search your In Tray or mail files for messages
that have been sent to you by a specific person, or by subject To fmd a message,
first display the Find pop-up window by choosing Find from the Edit menu, as
shown in Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9

The Find item on the Edit menu

Properties ...

The Find pop-up window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10 The Findpop-up window
Mall Tool: Find ~essa.es

Q
Sender: •
Subject:

(Find Forward )

(Find Backward)

(select All )

You can search for messages by sender, by subject, or by subject and sender. The
Search text fields are case-insensitive and match partial words and phrases. You
do not need to type a complete sender name, and you can use keywords to match
subjects. For example, typing the name "winsor" in the Sender text field will find
files sent by "winsor@castle" as well as '~winsor."
Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 - Mail Tool 61

To search for messages by sender, type the sender name in the Sender text field.
Clicking SELECf on the Find Forward button selects the next message header
with the sender name you specify. Qiclong SELECf on the Find Backward button
selects the previous message header. Oicking SELECf on the Select All button
selects all message headers with the sender name. An information message is
displayed in the footer of the Find Messages window telling you how many
messages are selected, as shown in the example in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 An in/ormation message in the Find Messages window
~

Mall Tool: Find Messages

Sender: winsor.
Subject:
(Find Forward)

(Find Backward)

(select All )

'0 Items found and selected

To search for messages by subject, type a word or phrase in the Subject text field.
To search for messages by sender and by subject, type the appropriate infonnation
in each text field and click SELECf on one of the buttons.

3.4 Viewing Messages

To view a message, follow these steps:
1. Move the pointer onto the line of a header and click SELECT.

A rectangular box is displayed around the selected header.
2. Move the pointer onto the View menu button and press MENU..

The View menu is displayed.
3. Drag the pointer to highlight Messages.
4. Release SELECT.

A View Message pop-up window is displayed showing you the text of the
selected message, with an abbreviated header, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

,-

62

~

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 3-12 The View Message pop-up window
.....

Mall Tool: View Messa.e

,

~

gerieshargola Fr1 Oec 8 14:89:91 1989
110: winsor.castle
Subject: SIGCHI
~rom

----- Begin Included Message ----)From jcbefr1sbee Yed Nov 29 15:28:82 1989
From: jcbefrisbee (Jim Secker)
To: SayCHlejf
Subject: CHI '98 Conference on Human Factors and Computing Systems
Cc: sriram@cremona, 1slam@mish1ma, lemke.ncd
I hadn't aeen this come across the wire yet, so thought that I would
fo~ard it via the SayCHI alias.
-Jim
-- included text -CHI '99 (the seventh annual Conference on Human Factors and
Computing Systems) will be held in Seattle, ~ashington, from April
1st to 5th, 199B.
The theme of CHI '9B is Empowering People:

facilitating their

Alternatively, you can double-click SELECf on the header of a mail message to
display the View Message window without using a menu.
The number of the message that is displayed is always shown in the window header
of the View Message pop-up window (Message 4 in this example).
The View Message pop-up window uses the standard text editing pane and -pop-up
menu. You can edit the text in the View Message pane. If you have made -editing
changes to the message, and if you have set the Mail Tool properties so that you
are asked for a confinnation, a Notice is displayed when you change messages or
close the window, asking if you want to save the changes. See "Customizing Your
Mail Tool" for more infonnation about Mail Tool properties.
The View Message pop-up window can be split into two or more panes in order to
view and edit different pans of the mail message at the same time. See Chapter 5
for infonnation about editing text and splitting the text pane.
Using the Pushpin in the
View Message Window

The View Message pop-up window has a pushpin that you can use to pin the
window to the workspace if you want to keep a message (or several messages)
visible.
If you do not click SELECf on the pushpin to pin the window, the View Message
pop-up window is reused for subsequent mail messages that you view. If you do
pin the View Message pop-up, a new View Message pop-up will be displayed for

the next message you view.
Viewing the Next or Previous
Message

When the View Message pop-up window is displayed but not pinned, you can view
the next message in the same window by moving the pointer to the View menu

button and clicking SELECf. The next message is displayed using the existing

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 - Mail Tool 63

View Message window. If no unpinned View Message window is displayed,
choosing an item from the View menu automatically displays one.
NOTE

Clicking SELECT activates the default item for the menu. If you have changed the
default, you must display the View menu and choose Next.

Alternatively, you can double-click SELECf on the header of the next message to
display it in the View Message window.
When the last message in your In Tray is already displayed in the View Message
window, choosing Next displays the previous message.
To display the previous message, move the pointer to the View menu button, press
MENU, choose Previous, as shown in Figure 3-13, and release MENU.
Figure 3-13 Choosing Messagefrom the Previous submenu

Viewing Messages With a
Full Header

Mail Tool messages are nonnally displayed with an abbreviated header. The
contents of this header are detennined by the "ignore" variable in your .mailrc
file. All mail headers are displayed except those listed after "ignore". For
example, if you do not want to see the header fields Message-Id, Received, RetumPath, or Status, use any text editor to add the following line to -the . mailrc file
in your home directory:
ignore message-id received return-path status

If you do not have the "ignore" variable in your. mailrc file, you will always see
a full message header. If you have the "ignore" variable set, you will nonnally see
an abbreviated header. To display a message with the full message header.
regardless of the setting of the "ignore" variable, follow these steps:

1. Select a message.
2. Move the pointer to the View menu button and press MENU.
3. When the View menu is displayed, highlight Messages.
4. Drag the pointer to the right to display the Messages submenu.

s.

Drag the pointer to highlight Full Header.

6. Release MENU.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

64

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 3-14 shows an example of a full message header.

Figure 3-14 A/ull message header
.~

Mall Tool: View Message 4

From ger1eshargola Fri Dec 8 14:89:81 1989
eturn-Path: From jcbefrisbee ¥ed Nov 29 15:28:82 1989
From: jcbefr1sbee (Jim Becker)
To: BayCHIejf
f ~ Subject:
CHI '98 Conference on Human Factors and Computing Systems
~ ~ Cc: sr1ramecremona, islamtmishima, lemkeencd
~

)

~

(

[

I hadn't seen this come across the wire yet, so thought that I would
forward it via the BaytHI alias.
-Jim
-- included teKt --

IIf
i-

~
~

NOTE

CHI '98 (the seventh annual Conference on Human Factors and
Computing Systems) will be held in Seattle, ¥ash1ngton, from April
1st to 5th, 1998.
The theme of CHI ' 98 1s &\pawed ng Peop le:

facilitating their

The View Message windows are displayed in numerical order, not in the order that
you selected them.
You can move the windows so they do not overlap one another, click SELECf on
the header to bring an individual message window to the front of the screen, or
dismiss each window individually after you have read the message.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 - Mail Tool 65

Once you have displayed a message in a View Message window, it is marlced as
"read" whether or not you actually have read the message.

3.5 Printing Messages

You can print your electronic mail messages by using either Mail Tool or Print
Tool.
To print your messages from Mail Tool, follow these steps:
1. In the primary Mail Tool base window, select the headers for the messages
you want to print.

Caution:

It is best to never select more than five headers to be printed at one time.
Selecting and printing many messages at one time uses a lot of swap space,
which can potentially cause your server to crash.
2. Choose Print from the File menu.

Figure 3-16 shows these steps.
Figure 3-16 Printing multiple mail messages
Mall Tool - /.,srlspool/maillwlnsor

( Compose V) Mall file:
.~

Open
Move Into Mall File

~

un. com
o
rgola

Fri
Fr1
Mon
Men

Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec

1
8
11
11

17:99
19:51
98:47
14:58

lID

19/792
9/159
25/798
26/858

next bridge ~ednesdaYI De •
Re: Fr.me 2.9 license
Ol lunch
Menu items i~ multi-colum

Copy Into Mail File

ga;,
Save changes
Done

22 messages, 0 new,

o deleted

Alternatively, you can use Print Tool to print your mail messages, by following
these steps:
.
1. With both Mail Tool and Print Tool running, select the headers for the
messages you want to print.
2. Press the Control key and SELECT and drag the headers until the hot
spot of the pointer is on either the Print Tool icon or the open Print Tool
window.
NOTE

The selected mailfiles will be deleted ifyou do not press the Control key before you
press SELEcr to drag them. Dragging with SELECT moves the files, removing
them/rom the Mail Tool application. They are stored in the Undelete window, and ~
you can recover them as long as you have not saved changes to Mail Tool.
The pointer changes to the duplicate pointer. A small envelope is displayed if
you are dragging one mail header, or three small envelopes are displayed if you
are dragging several mail headers. In the example shown in Figure 3-17, three
overlapping envelopes move with the pointer~

Revision A of 11 June 1990

66

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 3-17 Printing using drag and drop
Mall Tool - lusrlspoo

I2J
~ (View

18

V) (Edit V)

.ar~d@steamer

11 11m H!bardO 1DtI
12 rpn@fordtruck
13 hohensee@eliot
14 poseur!earle
Ib scnaDD eel::as~
16 w1nsor
17 batten@sunmicro
18 owl@danse
19 julies@sherpa

I

U
L
I

~

(compose V) Mall file:
Mon Dec
Mon Oec
Mon Dec
Man Dec
Tue Dec
lueOec
lue Oec
Tue Dec
Tue Dec
Tue Dec

11 18:82
11 1S: 86
11 28: 94
11 23: 32

-~
~

18
5

12 88:43

9·

l~

It!:bt!

3

11::i4

;:s

1~

12 11:39
12 11:58
12 12:86

Print Tool
file: •

Printer: Ii) spitfire
Copies:. _,_
fUter: I Hone
I Plot

~

4
1
5

3. Release SELECT to drop the headers.

Ipr

El3
I Raster I TeX
I Cit Plot I trotf
I control

J
I

I other: I

(Print HStatus )(Stop Printing V)

-

-Jl;l

If the Print Tool window is open, infonnation messages are displayed in the
footer of the Print Tool window showing you the printing status. Figure 3-18

shows an open Print Tool window that has accepted Mail Tool messages for
printing. See Chapter 6 for more infonnation about the Print Tool application.
Figure 3-18 Print Tool printing mail messages
(2)

Print Tool
file: Itmp/mall,wlnsor.629503345.

Printer:

121

spitfire

1 Print Jobes) Submitted

3.6 Deleting Messages

It is a good idea to periodically save or delete obsolete messages from your In Tray.
See "Organizing Your Mail Messages" for infonnation on how to move or copy
messages from your In Tray into mail files. nus section describes how to delete
. messages.
1. Select the message headers for messages you want to delete.

Click SELECf to select the first message, then click ADJUST on each
subsequent message to either add it to the group or remove it from the group if
it is already selected.
2. Choose Delete from the Edit menu.

Figure 3-19 shows some selected message headers and the Delete item
highlighted on the Edit menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 - Mail Tool 67

Figure 3-19 Deleting messages
Mall Tool - lusrispoollmall/winsor

(£)

(E!ill (Vi8WV) _

I
'lit!

I

28 8cha
21 jul1
22 5aJe
23 earl
25 5cha
26 tut@

l Compose VJ Mall file: (2)
Ie Dec 12 12:21 33/1383 New look Critique
Ie Dec 12 12:28 75/2416 deskset feedback from IR

.-t:e
Cut
Copy
Undelete
Find",

e>

~

12 12:28

19/589

Ie

12 1.q:t!~
12 14:26
12 1.q:~

bZ/l~£'b

Dec
Dec
e Dee
e Dec

2711111
17/~~2

Re:
I'

Edit

D>

Find

D>

E)(tras D>

For a description of the text editing commands, see Chapter 5.
Creating and Using
Templates

The Mail Tool application allows you to create your own template files containing
text that you frequently use for composing messages. DeskSet installation
provides one standard template for reminders of appointments and meetings that is__
compatible with the Calendar Manager application.
When you create a template document, you can add it to the Templates submenu
from the Mail Tool Properties window. See '-'Template Properties" earlier in this
chapter for information about creating your own templates and "Using Templates" .
earlier in this chapter for information about using them.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

88

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Creating and Using Mail
Tool Distribution Lists

You can create your own distribution lists containing groups of user names.
Instead of typing a distribution list of ten names, you can type the single name that
you specify as the name of the alias in the To text field.
There are two kinds of distribution lists, or aliases, you can create on your own
system:
o

Aliases in your •mai lr c file that only you can use.

D

Aliases in your /etc/aliases file that anyone can use.

This section describes how to create each of these aliases.
Creating and Using Aliases in
.mailrc

To create an alias in your. mailrc file, you must edit your. mailrc file in your
home directory using any text editor. On a separate line in the file, type alias
aliasnarne username usernarne. Separate each item with a space and end
the group with a Return.
Figure 3-53 shows an example of an alias line in a .mailrc file.

Figure 3-53 An example of an alias group in mailrc
textedit - (.mailre), dir: /home/wlnsor

ali as friends a lbert@monkey gene@bigbird fred@skyhi9'l

When the alias is complete, save the changes.
To use the alias, simply type the name of the alias (for example, friends) in the
To, Cc, or Bcc line of the Compose Messages window. The names you typed in
the rue are expanded and included as part of the outgoing message.
The Vacation notifier responds to individuals you have liste4 as part of aliases in
your. mailrc file. See "Using the Vacation Notifier" earlier in this chapter for
. more infonnation.
Creating and Using Local Aliases
in fetc/aliases

To create an alias in your / et c / alias es fue, you must have root access to your
system. Edit your / etc/ aliases file using any text editor. Under the Local
Aliases category, on a separate line, type aliasnarne : username, usernarne.
Separate each item with a comma and end the group with a Return. You can
include a space after each comma, if desired.
Figure 3-54 shows an example of an alias group in fetcfaliases.

Figure 3-54 An example of an alias group in Jete/aliases
textedit - (aliases), dir: 'etc

fr1ends:albertemonkey.geneeb1gb1rd.fredeskyhi9'l

When the alias is complete, save the changes, type newaliases and press Return
to record the new alias grouping with the sendmail program.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 - Mail Tool 89

To use the alias, type the name of the alias in the To, Cc, or Bcc line of the Compose
Messages window. The names you typed in the file are not expanded as part of the
outgoing message. The alias group itself is displayed as the user name when the
message is receiVed. To use an alias on someone else's system, type the alias
name, @, and their machine name in the To line of the Compose Messages
window. For example, someone else could send mail to the "friends" alias in the
example by typing friends@castle.

3.13 Using Drag and Drop
with Mail Tool

You can select single or multiple headers in the Mail Tool base window and copy
or move them to other DeskSet applications.
You-can drop message headers onto the following destinations:
CJ

File Manager

[J

Text Editor

[J

Print Tool

[J

Tape Tool

0

Calendar Manager

0

Mail Tool Compose window

To drag and drop a copy of a message header, follow these steps:
1. Click. SELECT on the message header.
2. Press the Control key and then SELECT.
3. Release the Control key.
4. Drag the pointer to the destination.
A small envelope moves with the pointer to show you that you are dragging a
mail message, as shown in the example in Figure 3-55. When you select
multiple message headers, a group of envelopes is dragged with the pointer.

Figure 3-55 Dragging a copy 0/ a message header

Man Tool-/usrispool/mail/wiftser
(File V HYiew V )( Edit V)

( Compos. V) ..... Fie:

256 sehappleeEast
Fri Jan 26 17:24
257 lauevision
Fri Jan 26 18:16
258..,l1Hamaea1thea
Fri Jan 26 19:28
259 sehappleeEast
Sat Jan 27 17:56
268 Mailer-Daemon
s..m Jan 28 89:26
261 winsOf"
Sun Jan 28 89:31
262 Mailer-Daemoneeafro Sun Jan 28 89:32
un an
:
Sun Jan 28 e9:~6

Iil.

154/6281 Mateo drops in on us
28/691 Re: suggestion for displ.
72/2278 o.skSet Online Help: Sta
1SS/~529 Draft of Typographic ConY
19115373 Returned un: User unkno
2-t8/15821 (E) Encoded Mail Me.sages
197/5693 Returned .afl: Remote
228/6385
264 messages, 0 new, 0 deleted

s.

Release SELECT.

RevisiODi A of 11 June 1990

90

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

To move message headers, follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the message header.
The header is selected.
2. Press SELECT.
3. Drag the pointer to the destination.
4. Release SELECT.

Warning:

Ifl0U move message headers anywhere outside of the Moil Tool In Tray, the
messages are deleted from the Mail Tool In Tray. You can, however, recover
these messages from the Undelete pop-up window as long as you have not
saved changes to Mail TooL
You can schedule appointments in Calendar Manager by dropping a copy of a
message header onto the Calendar Manager icon or window. See Chapter 4 for
more infonnation about the Calendar Manager application.
The Mail Tool Compose window accepts dropped files from the File Manager and
Text Editor.

3.14 Troubleshooting

It is not a good idea to run multiple versions of Mail Tool at the same time.

Running multiple Mail Tool applications can cause the system to become confused
about the state of the mail spool file that keeps track of messages in your In Tray.
If you make changes and choose either Save Changes or Done from the File menu,
that infonnation is used to modify messages in your In Tray. When you have made
changes using different versions of the Mail Tool application, or the Mail program,
it is possible that you could lose messages that you intended to save.
You can avoid confusing Mail Tool about the state of your IIi Tray by getting into
the habit of choosing Done from the File menu at the end of each day, or when it
is likely that you will be logging into your machine and reading mail from a remote
location.
If you forget to choose Done, and log into your machine to read mail, you can tell
Mail Tool to choose Done by following the steps below:

1. From a shell prompt type ps -ax I grep mailtool and press Return.
The listing should look like the one shown in Figure 3-56.
Figure 3-56 An example of a ps listing/or mailtool
[65]castle{w1nsor}S ps -ax I grep ma11tool "
413 co I
2:18/home/sundesk/b1n/ •• /b1n.sun4/b1n-20/mailtool
11935 p1 S
B:BB grep ma11tool
[66]castle{w1nsor}S

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 3 - Mail Tool 91

2. Look in the left-hand column of the listing for mailtool (not the listing for
grep mail tool) to find the process number (PID).

The process number is the first number on each line.
3. Type kill -30 PID and press Return.
In the example above, the process number is 413, so you would type:
kill -30 413

4. Read your mail as you normally do from the remote location.

The next time you open your Mail Tool, the changes you make to your In Tray
from the remote location are incorporated and recorded as part of the Mail Tool
application.

Warning:

The steps above only work with the DeskSet Mail Tool application. Using these
steps/or other versions of Mail Tool wiU kill Mail TooL

The Mail utility uses a lock file to prevent two or more processes from altering your
mail spool file at the same time. HMail Tool quits unexpectedly and takes the Mail
utility with it, the lock file may be left behind.
If Mail Tool takes a long time to open the In Tray, either when you specifically

request it or when you open Mail Tool after you have chosen Done from the File
menu, check /var / spool/mail for a file named username .lock, where
username is your login name. To remove the file, from a system prompt, type
rm /var / spool/mail/ username .lock and press the Return key. For
example, if your username is "fred", you would tyt>e
rm /var/spool/mail/fred.lock.

Mail Tool lets you select and print several mail messages at one time. This uses a
lot of swap space, which can potentially cause your server to crash. Therefore you
should not select more than five messages to be printed simultaneously.

Revision A of 11 Iune 1990

92

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 June 1990

4
:.-=:: ...:......«.:........ :::... , ... ","

A." "," ••••••••

.:: ....:.,;:. .,:.......... :-".:......:... .;...., ........::.,.:..: ..:.........:............. .

Calendar Manager
The Calendar Manager application is an appointment and resource scheduling tool
with the following features:
o

Displays a day, wee~ month, or year at a glance

o

Schedules a single or repeating event

o

Provides the following reminders of events that can be used individually or
combined with one another:
•

Beeping, flashing, and/or opening a Reminder pop-up window

•

Sending a reminder mail message about an appointment

o

Specifies security for your appointments

o

Accesses, browses, and edits the calendar appointments of other users

o

Prints high-quality output

This chapter describes these features of the Calendar Manager.

4.1 Calendar Manager
Views
Icon

The Calendar Manager provides different ways to view your calendar
appointments. This section describes all the ways you can view the calendar.
When the Calendar Manager application is displayed as an icon, it shows the
current month with the current date highlighted, as shown in Figure 4-1. The
current month and date are displayed in the icon regardless of the view you choose
to display when the Calendar Manager window is open.

Figure 4-1

An example of the Calendar Manager icon
May 1990

S M T W T F S

12345

6

7

8

9 10 11

fj]]

13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31

93

Revision A of 11 June 1990

94

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Window

The Calendar Manager base window has a control area and an area for displaying
the calendar in the view you choose. The default display is the current month at a
glance, which shows appointment scheduling for a one-month period. You can,
however, change the default from the Properties window. See "Customizing Your
Calendar Manager" later in this chapter for more information on changing defaults.
Figure 4-2 shows an example of the default Calendar Manager window.
Figure 4-2

An example of the default Calendar Manager window
(!)
( View v)

calendar Manager: "renda.Jungle

Q!lI!) (

Browse v)

~

( Prey) ( Today) ( Next)

MavlS90
:tun

!llton

2~0

6

10100 DukStt
2100 NUtllttt

wea

Tue
1

2
SUfl'III

ThU

20

14
10100 DeskSet

21
':00 STC/ITC
10100 DeskSet

27

28

Melllorial DaV

4

5

•

9

10

11

12

15

16

17

18

1$

2100S~III

11:30 IIIurvit
12100 ,,"ifs I

no User tt

13

:tat

ft'l

3
12:15 LullC" wi

2:Dt Stlfl'III

22
':00 STC/ITC
2~O St.n III

29
2lO0 SUfl'III

First Drift De
430 ,ellllV.

23

Dav Off
1030 Monttrev

24

J:OOOlle~II-

25

26

'100 STC/ITC

30

11:30 IUllch-

31
1UI0

It'"

lilt

Copyright (c) 1987-1990 Sun Mlcrosystems, Inc.

Note that one appointment is displayed for each line and the text for the
appoinunents is clipped to accommodate the size of the date box.
The current day is automatically selected when you open the Calendar Manager
window. A day that is selected has a double border. In Figure 4-2, above, May 7
is the selected day. You can select any other day by pointing to a different day and
clicking SELBCf.
TIle base window has resize comers that you can use to change its size. If you want

to display more information on each line, use one of the resize comers to stretch
the window horizontally, as shown in Figure 4-3.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 95

Figure 4-3

A Calendar Manager window that has been resized
(!)

CaIeMar Manqer: a.,.IId . .julttle

( Vie .... 9) ~ ( Browse v)

MaVllM

_

sua

( Print 9)

( PrlIY)

T_

n

1a.. fIUIf _ _

wea
2

TlUI

l
12:'15

S

.~. . ~IkStt Mettl
Z"N4rIIIet!t

•

I

15

tS

a.. SItIII'r_ftiII

LeIlClo"Ie

11

2e

14

, ... ~1kS« Mttd

21

, . . STC/lTCCeM
ta"
....« Mud
~

27

2.

IIIe_Wo."

Z. . Sltlll'rMt_

22

, . . STC/lTCC C..

Z. . sulf_ttift

21

z....,,_ftiII

.

sat

11'1

5

11

'1:l11-'.w~,

12

12. . AIIII','ullct.

J"uHrteftillt

13

(Today) ( Next)

oey Off

,.'''OII_"__

23
t .. STC/lTCC eM

24

25

30

31

_P'H"' ••,

FlmOriltl>efkSet

,131-.cft-Uft!

17

":lI~'f""""

'tIf

tI

25

" . . .." .. ettiflg

Copyright (d 1917-1190 Sun Mi0"8systems, Inc.

If you want to increase the number of lines for appointments, use one of the resize

comers to stretch the window vertically.
The Navigation Controls

Figure 4-4

The control area of the Calendar Manager application has three buttons at the right,
shown in Figure 4-4, that you can use to browse quickly through the view of the
calendar currently displayed.
The navigation control buttons

\\---=-----....=---.,.,=-l~(§D~
\..

---"

Clicking SELECf on Prev moves the view (whether it is day, week, month, or
year) backward one unit. Oicking SELECf on Next moves the view forward one
unit Oicking SELECT on Today returns you to "today."
Day View

The day-at-a-glance view is useful when you have many appointments scheduled
for a single day. To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it
displays appointments for one day, follow these steps:
1. Move the pointer into the rectangle for the day you want to view and click
SELECT.
2. Move the pointer to the View menu button.
3. Press MENU.
4. Drag the pointer to highlight the Day item on the menu, as shown in
Figure 4-5.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

96

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-5

Highlighting the Day item

s.

Release MENU.

The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the selected day.
Figure 4-6 shows an example of a day display.
Figure 4-6

A day view
Ii)

caleltd_ "'.....er. 1M'e ......j ....I.

(§

( View v) ~ (Broows. v) ( Print v)
Me .. 1Iav

•

"'av 7,1'.

•

"'orlll",

After_II

12

7

.111

11111

•..

1

~

,nil

a=oo 2

t

fa ..

11

fa III

2:10_.

o« ... vitw

11111

,e:oD-u:oo •••u .. _
1.

fa ..

(Today) ( Next)

'_k

...

Cetot.renct ~

:I
PIlI

a:oo- ......... t .........t ...
j4IIIin'lofI'ict
,,.,
,..,11 .,mlo..

4
II'"

S

p.

,
11111

Cepyrltht Cd 1117-1'. h .. MIcrosYSteMS,I.c.

You can set the range of hours that are displayed for the day view from the
Properties window. See "Customizing Your Calendar Manager" later in this
chapter for more infonnation. The day view displays all the information you enter
about the appointment in the Appointment Editor pop-up window, not just the first
line. See "Scheduling and Editing Appointments" later in this chapter for more
information about the Appointment Editor.
Week View

To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it displays
appointments for one week, choose Week from the View menu.
The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the week containing
the current date, as shown in Figure 4-7. The week view in the lower left corner of
the window shows you the blocks of time allocated for appointments during the
week.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 97

Figure 4-7 A week view
(!J

Calendar Mana.er: ..,. ..daeJungle

( View v)

@§ ( Browse v) ~

( Prey) (Today)

(Next)

Week Starting May 7,1990
Monday 7

1~;;.!!ti~

z:oo,.-z:..,.

WednesdayS

Tuesday'

Thursday 10

fto'idayll

11:3DUt-1z:..,.
IllUrvlew apps 1110
1z:oo,.-1:IOo,.

~.-a:oo,.
IIIUti...

N&IInettt

Anlrs lunch

",.-4:00,.

User ttstlnl IIIUt

• IC!!:1
10
1,12
1

42

a
5

•
•
•
"I

T

W

T

F

I
I

•

S

S

Saturday 12

Sunday 13
8:309.-.:00,.

I
I

Silllpsons

......

Copyright (c) 1987-1990 Sun Microsvstems,lnc.

Alternatively, you can point to the number for an individual day in the Month view
and click SELECf to change the view to the week containing that day_
Year View

To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it displays the
calendar for the current year, choose Year from the View menu.
The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the current year.
Figure 4-8 shows the Calendar Manager window with 1990 displayed.

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

98

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-8

A year view
iii

caIe~.,

( Vilw .. )

C!!!!)

lHO

......-. .......J.....

Q!!!) [T'*r) ~

(a-s. .. ) (Print .. )
'cb~",

March
l--l'
S " T ' T f S 5 1 1 T I T f 5 SIITVTfS
I 2 3
I 2 3
I 2 J ~ , 1
.. $ 5 7 • " , .. 5 , 7 , .,0
1 • " 0 " 12 U
~ t5 11 17 ,. " 20 " t2 t2 I .. '5 " t7 It 12 n ~ 15 II 17
21222J~252121 ,.tt2CI2l2223~ IItt2CI212223~
252127.
21253031
2521272121.31

--

May
~rI
S " T • T , S SliT" T F S '"TVTfS
2 3 .. 5
I 2J~5'7
2
• • ,011 12 U 1~ I 7 • • 10 II 12 3 4 5 . , • •
'S " 17 ,. ,. 20 21 n'415"171.'. II t1 t2 III 14 IS "
Z22J~2521Z721 a212223~25a 17 " 1t 21 21 22 2lI
~252127212130
27.21."

,

,

21.

August
!!2tember
5 " T • T f 5 SIITITfS SIITVTfS
I 2 I 4 5 • 1
1 2 3 4
• • 10 11 12 12 '4
234'171
1$1511,."2021 12 " '4 15 " 17 I. • " " IZ tJ 14 15
22232'425212121 1I2C212223:M25 II II It II 21 21 n
2127212130)1
2)~2521272125
25 • 31

I!!!t:

,

5 , 7 • ',0',

JO

OCtober
N~r
December
S"TIITfS SIITITfl S"TVTfS
1
I 2 J ~ , 1
2 3
1
I' U U
455"'" 234""
'4 15 11 17 II " 20 11 12 13 , .. 15 1C t7 • 10 t1 'Z n 14 15
ZI22232'4252C27 ,.,.a2l22232'4 " 17 I. It 2CI 21 22
252127.2130
21 25 30 31
23342521272121

,

• "0

JOII

c:..",,\tlrt Cd

'''7-'''' S........sYftr_.IM.

The Calendar Manager provides year-at-a-glance views for the years 1970 through
1999.

4.2 Scheduling and
Editing
Appointments
Figure 4-9

You schedule appointments from the Appointment Editor pop-up window. You
display the Appointment Editor window by selecting a day and choosing
Appointment from the Edit menu, as shown in Figure 4-9.
Choosing Appointment from the Edit menu

CPrint v)

13

14

130 simpsons 10:00 DeskSet

Alternatively, you can double-click SELECT on an hour (for Day view) or a day
(for Week or Month view) to display the Appointment Editor.
Note that clicking SELECf when the pointer is on any date number in the Month
view changes the view to a Week view and does not display the Appointment
Editor. This is a quick method to display the Week view, as described in the "Week
View" section earlier in this chapter.
The Appointment Editor pop-up window automatically displays the selected day
and lists scheduled appointments in the scrolling list, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Revision A of 11 Iune 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 99

Figure 4-10 The Appointment Editor pop-up window
eM Appointment Editor
Date: Mon May 7.1990

What: •_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

10:00 OeskSet Meeting
2:00 Nannette
3:00 User testing meetl

~.

Start

End:

(!)

~I

I

AM

(!) ~ AM

I PM I
I PM I

Repeat:

None

Dally

Weekly

Biweekly

Monthly

Vearly

lemlnder:@Advance:_s_mlnSRepeat:(!) _ _

I Flash I
I Open I

L-

mlns

~

lItitlS

~

,

hours Mall To; t"·"rl'~3.~IIJrt91"

onsert)

( Delete

)

( Change )

( Defaults )

The Appointment Editor pop-up window has the following controls:
CJ

A Date field that automatically displays the selected date. You can type in
another date to schedule additional appointments using any fonnat described
in the next section, "Entering a New Appointment". Note that there are several
acceptable fonnats, and that you do not have to type in the day of the week
even though the day of the week is displayed.

o

A What field in which you type infonnation about the appointment. The first
line of this field is displayed in the Month view, so the first line should describe
the appointment You can also include details about the appointment in this
field, such as the appointment place, a brief meeting agenda, or a reminder to
bring something to the appointment

o

A scrolling list that displays existing appointments for the selected date.

CJ

A Start and End set of controls that you use to set the time of the appointment
You can either use the time menu or type in a number in the text fields. The
time menu is available via the Start and End abbreviated menu buttons. The
choice of times on this menu is detennined by the Day Bounds settings from
the Properties window. See "Customizing Your Calendar Manager" later in
this chapter for more infonnation. When you set a start time, the end time is
automatically set to one hour later. IT the appointment is longer than an hour, .-.
you can set a different end time by choosing a time from the time menu or by
typing a time in the text field. The last choice on the time menu is "None",
which you can use if you don't want a time associated with an appointment
This is useful for "to do" list items or reminders, such as "Report Due", or
appointments that refer to the entire day, such as "Memorial Day."

Revision A of 11 June 1990

100

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

o

Repeat controls that you use to indicate whether the appointment is individual,
daily, weekly, biweekly, monthly, or yearly. When an appointment repeats at
a regular interval, you can set the number of times the appointment is repeated.

a Reminder controls that determine how you are reminded of an appointment
You can use as many of the reminder controls as you like for each appoinnnent.
In the example shown in Figure 4-11, Beep, flash and Open are set. Mail is

not set. Note that the Mail To text field is inactive and therefore dimmed.
When you click SELECf on Mail, the text field is automatically activated.

Figure 4-11 The Reminder settings in the Appointment Editor window
Iteminder: I Beep

I Flash
I Open
I Mail

I

Adyance: 5

mlns

5

mins

5

mins

2

hours

Man To: wlnsorClcastle

D

Advance text fields that determine how far in advance of an appointment a
reminder action takes place.

D

Insert, Delete, Change, and Defaults buttons that you use to enter, remove, or
modify appoinnnents.

You can change the default settings for the Appointment Editor pop-up window
from the Calendar Manager Properties window. See "Customizing Your Calendar
Manager" later in this chapter for more information about properties.
Entering a New
Appointment

To enter a new appointment on the day displayed, follow these steps:
1. If the caret is not already positioned in the What text field, move the

pointer into the text field and click SELECT. Type information about the
appointment.

You can type up to 255 characters on each line.
2. To set the time, move the pointer to the Start text field, click SELECT to
set the insert point, and type in a time. If necessary, click SELECT on the
PM setting.

Alternatively, you can move the pointer onto the abbreviated menu button and
press MENU to display a menu from which you can choose hours that are
detenninedby the setting of day boundaries from the Properti~ window. See
"Customizing Your Calendar Manager" later in this chapter for more
information
Each hour item has a submenu with 00, 15, 30, and 45 minute items.
Figure 4-12 shows the Time menu and a submenu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 101

Figure 4-12 The Time menu and a submenu

Highlight the time you want and release MENU to enter the time in the text
field. When you choose a time from the menu, the correct AM or PM setting
is automatically chosen for you.. If you choose "None", no time is associated
with the appointment.
3. The time in the End text field is automatically set to one hour later than
the time in the Start text field. To change the duration for the appointment
from the default of one hour, move the pointer to the End text field, click
SELECT to set the insert point, and type in a. time. If necessary, click
SELECT on the PM setting.

Alternatively, you can move the pointer ontO the abbreviated menu button and
press MENU to display the time menu as described in Step 2.
4. If the appointment is one that is repeated on a regular basis, choose the
appropriate Repeat setting by moving the pointer onto it and clicking
SELECT.

You can choose repeat intervals of None , Daily, Weekly, Biweekly (every two
weeks), Monthly, or Yearly.
5. When Repeat is set to None, the Repeat text field is inactive and is dimmed
to show you that it will not accept input.

When you choose a repeating appointment, the Repeat text field and
abbreviated menu button are active and the units are displayed following the
text field, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 The Repeat lextfield

repeat-

....................................
None
Weekly

Daily

Monthly

Vearly

Biweekly

~~~~~~!:......®....~~.............!!!~~!~~;
You can choose the number of times you want the appoinunent to repeat. For
example, you may know that a weekly meeting will be scheduled for the next
two month period. Move the pointer onto the abbreviated menu button and

Revision A of 11 June 1990

102

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

press MENU to display a menu containing repeat items from 2 through 14 and
"forever". Highlight the item you want and release MENU to enter the repeat
rate in the text field.
Alternatively, you can move the pointer to the Repeat text field and type in a
number. The default number usually sets the appointment to repeat for a year.
For example, the default number is 365 when the repeat interval is Daily, or 52
when the repeat interval is Weekly. The default number for the Yearly setting
is two years. If you want the appointment to repeat indefinitely, you can type
the word "forever" in the text field.
6. Choose the way you want to be reminded of this appointment.

You can set none, some, or all of the Reminder options. Beep and Flash cause
the Calendar Manager icon to beep and flash if it is closed. The Calendar
Manager window itself will beep and flash if it is open. If you choose Open,
at the time specified for Open the appointment Reminder pop-up window is
displayed showing the appointment infonnation. Figure 4-14 shows an
example of the Reminder pop-up window.
Figure 4-14 An example of the Reminder pop-up window
.~

Calendar: Reminder

Staff meeting

sn/90
from

3:45 to

4:45

Bldg 5, Bradbury Conf Rm
Take Design Committee

material for status
presentation

Choosing the Mail setting automatically mails a reminder to the email
addresses you type into the To text field.
7. You can change the Advance times by typing a new whole number into the
appropriate text field (decimals and fractions are not accepted formats).

You can also change the default Advance times from the Properties window.
See "Customiz~g Your Calendar Manager" for more infonnation.
8. When you have entered all the information for the appointment, click
SELECT on the Insert button.

The appointment is added to the scrolling ~st in the Appointment Editor
window and to the Calendar Manager window.
If you want to enter appointments for another day double-click SELECf on the
new day in the Calendar Manager base window or type a new date in the Date field
t

using any of the fonnats listed below t and then follow the preceding steps.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 103

You can type a new date using the following date fonnats:
Cl

MM/DD/YY or MID/YY (for example, 10{l6!90 or 7/5/90)

(]

Mon Day, Yr or Month Day, Year (for example, Aug 26, 90 or August 26,
1990)

Cl

Day Mon Day, Yr (for example, Sat May 12, 1990)

(]

Today

(]

Tomorrow

Cl

Yesterday

(]

Next Weekday (for example,Next Wednesday)

(]

Last Weekday (for example, Last Wednesday)

When you are finished with the Appointment Editor window, dismiss it by cliCking
SELECf on the pushpin or choosing Dismiss from the pop-up Window menu.

Deleting an Existing
Appointment

To delete an existing appointment, follow these steps:

1. Select a date and display the Appointment Editor pop-up window.
2. Move the pointer over the appointment in the scrolling list that you want
to delete and click SELECT.
The appointment is highlighted, as shown in Figure 4-15, the appointment
infonnation is displayed in the What field, and the author of the appointment
is displayed in the footer.

Figure 4-15 An Appointment Editor window with a highlighted appointment
~

CM Appointment Editor

Date: Mon May 7,1990
What: OeskSet MeetinS1e
Bartok Conference Room

~ 0:00 OeskSet Meeting
2:00 Nannette
3:00 User testing meeti

~
-

~
C'iM!rt)

I

(

Delete)

( Change)

( Oefaults )

Author: 'renda_Jungle

If you want to delete several appointments at one time, click SELECf on each
additional appointment you want to delete.
3. Move the pointer onto the Delete button and click SELECT.
The appointment is deleted from both the scrolling list and the Calendar
Manager base window.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

104

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

If you select a repeating appointment and click SELECT on the Delete button, a
Notice is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-16, allowing you to delete the
appointment for the selected date only, for all dates, or to cancel the operation

Figure 4-16 The Notice/or repeating events
The appointment
10:00 OeskSet Meeting
Is part of a repeating series.
00 you want to delete?

Editing an Existing
Appointment

To edit an existing appointment, follow these steps:

1. Select an hour (from a Day view) or a day from a Week or Month view and
display the Appointment Editor pop-up window.
Unless you have made a selection, the Appointment Editor displays
appointments for the current date.
2. Point to the appointment in the scrolling list that you want to edit and click
SELECT.
The appointment is highlighted, the appointment infonnation is displayed in
the What text field, and the author of the appointment is displayed in the footer.
3. Change the information in the Appointment Editor window to reflect the
new information for the appointment.
4. Move the pointer onto the Change button and click SELECT.
The changes you made to the appointment are made to both the scrolling list
and the Calendar Manager base window.
If you select a repeating appointment and click SELECT on the Change button, a
Notice is displayed allowing you to change the appointment for the selected
appointment only, for all appointments in the repeating series, or to cancel the
operation.

Note that the Date entry cannot be changed for all appointments in a repeating
series. If, for example, you want to change a repeating meeting from every
Tuesday to every Wednesday, you need to first delete the repeating appointment,
then reinsert it on the new day_

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 105

4.3 Customizing Your
Calendar Manager

You can customize the following parts of the Calendar Manager application from
the Properties window:
o

Editor Defaults, for the Appointment Editor pop-up window.

o

Day Boundaries and View, to specify boundaries for the Day view, time
ranges on the Start and End menus in the Appointment Editor window, and the
default View setting for the Calendar Manager base window.

o

Browser Calendars, the set of user names automatically displayed on the
Browse menu of the Calendar Manager base window and in the Browse popupwiodow.

o

Access List and Pennissions, to specify security access defaults.

The Properties window has four separate displays that you use to modify the four
different sets of properties listed previously. Figure 4-17 shows the Properties
window with the default display of Editor Defaults.
Figure 4-17 The Editor Defaults Properties window
~

eM Properties

Display:

iii

lemlnders:

Editor Defaults
~

~

Advance: _5_

mlns

_5_ mins
_5_ mins

,

( APply)

hours

C§D ( Defaults )

You display the Properties window by moving the pointer into the control area or
pane of the Calendar Manager window and pressing the Properties key (L3) on the
keyboard. You can also display the Properties window by choosing Properties
from the Edit menu.
You use the Display menu to choose a set or category of properties to display, as
shown in Figure 4-18.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

106

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-18 The/our Calendar MfJIUlger Properties categories
eM Properties

S51
Display.

Remind

&. Editor Defaults
Editor Defaults

",Ins

Day 90undarJes and View

",Ins

Browser Calendars
Access List and

",Ins

Permissions

--

hOU~

-To display a particular category of properties,
choose the appropriate item from the
""--

Display menu shown in Figure 4-18. When you release MENU, the contents of the
property window shows the properties you can set for that category.
When you have changed properties, you must apply them by clicking SELECf on
the Apply button. This only applies the properties currently displayed. To change
properties of a different category, display the new category, change the desired
settings, and click SELECf on the Apply button again.
.
Editor Defaults Properties

The Editor Defaults properties, shown in Figures 4-17 and 4-19, specify the
defaults for the Appointment Editor pop-up window. When you set the editor
defaults from the Properties window, they are automatically set each time you
display the Appointment window.

Figure 4-19 The Editor Defaults Properties
~

eM Properties

Displav: @) Editor Defaults
Reminders: ~ Advance: _5_

mlns

~

_5_ mins

lopen I

_5_

~

_1_ hours

( Apply )

Ci§'8D (

mins

Defaults )

To change the defaults, click SELECf on the settings you want Click SELECf in
the text field and type a new number. Figure 4-19 shows an example of the
.
Reminders with Beep, Flash, and Open set
When you click SELECf on the Apply button, the new defaults become effective
immediately. Changing the Reminders or Advance settings does not affect any
appointments that have already been scheduled using the old default choices.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapler 4 - Calendar Manager 107

Day Boundaries and View
Properties

The Day Boundaries and View controls, shown in Figure 4-20, specify the
boundary times for your day, and the default View setting for the Calendar
Manager base window.

Figure 4-20 The Day Boundaries and View Properties
~

eM Properties

Display.

@) Day Boundaries and View

Dav Boundaries
Begin:

--0====::::::1 7:D0 a.m.
~ 7:D0

End:

p.m.

Default View
Show:

( APply)

Changing the Day Boundaries

I Year I Month I Week I Day I

("'R!S!D (

Defaults)

You can specify the range of hours for both the Day view in the Calendar Manager
base window and the Start and End time menus in the Appointment Editor window
using the Day Boundaries sliders shown in Figure 4-20.
The current value is displayed to the right of each slider. To change the setting,
follow these steps:

1. Move the pointer to the slider drag box (the open rectangle) and press
SELECT.
2. Drag the pointer to the left or to the light.
Note that the time changes as you drag the slider. The pointer is "locked" onto
the drag box as long as you keep SELECf pressed.

3. When the time you want is displayed, release SELECT.
Alternatively, you can move the pointer onto the slider bar to the left or right of the
drag box and click SELECf to change the time hour by hour.

NOTE

You cannot set a day boundary that ends before it begins. When the values overlap,
the drag boxes are synchronized and move together so that the end time is always
at least one hour after the start time.
When you have set the day boundaries, click SELECI' on the Apply button to
record them. The changes are applied and take effect immediately.
Figure 4-21 shows the sliders with the day boundaries set for 8 AM and 5 PM, and
the Day view and Appointment Editor menus that are affected.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

108

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-21 How the Day Boundaries sliders affect Calendar Manager
IP

CM Pro.-rtles

"s.1av: (i) Oer Iouncllrles and View

o.v ........nes
_III:

- - 0 = ........

£IMI: ~I. . ~...
(!)

. .f . .ItYlew

ca........ Ma,...er: ..,...neJ .... I•
~Todav~

( View,,) ( [dlt,,) ( Browse ,,) ( Prtnt ,,)

'MW: ~

.....1:VM-v7.' . .

•...•

G2Dc]

-

(lid:

.
......... _ ...
_c-...c._
,.... -11_

Dec._iew

,III2

_ - _ •••• t.st. . . . . . . . . .

11

~III

2: ..

,III
3

............. ...-.
jeooicc', tftk.

3: I>
~: I>

None
(

_- _ _a

11:1>
12:1>

1: I>
~

1

.111

1_

9: •

After.M1I

12

t

10: I>

.... I.IIer.~

•
.111

~

~

SWt

MenlI ..

A~d) II

•

.111

~ Co,yrlght (c) 1,.7-1". '-II NlcroSyst.IIIS,IIIe.

Changing the Default View of the
Base Window

You can set the default view of the Calendar Manager base window to Year,
Month, Week, or Day using the Default View settings show~ in Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 The Properties window Default View settings
Default View

Show:

I Year I Month I Week I Day I

To change the default view, click SELECf on the setting you want and then click
SELECf on the Apply button. The change is applied and takes effect immediately.
Browser Calendars
Properties

You can use the Calendar Manager to display and edit appointments for other
users. The user names (login and system name) you enter in the Properties window
are recorded and displayed on the Browse menu of the Calendar Manager base
window. If you quit the Calendar Manager application and start it up again, the
login names on this scrolling list remain available on the Browse menu.
See "Browsing Remote Calendars" later in this chapter for infoIDlation on how to
browse. Use the Browser Calendars scrolling list and the Name button and text
field, shown in Figure 4-23, to enter and edit the login names of those users whose
calendar appointments you access most frequently.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 109

Figure 4-23 The Browser Calendars Properties
eM

tP

Pro pertles

Display. ~ Browser Calendars

~
c:::J

Name ~

( APply)

CReset)

( Defaults )

New user names are displayed on the Browse menu in the order you enter them in
the Browser Calendars scrolling list If you plan to add a number of user names to
the Browse menu at the same time, you might want to enter them in an order that
makes sense to you. Consider entering the most frequently accessed names first,
putting the names in alphabetical order, or grouping them by departments.
Adding Users to the Browser

You add other users following the steps below:
1. In the Name field, type the email address of the user you want to add to
the Browse menu (for example, 8ug@cobra).
2. Press Return to add the name.

Alternatively, you can choose Add from the Name menu, as shown in
Figure 4-24, or from the scrolling list pane pop-up menu.

Figure 4-24 Choosing Add/rom the Name menu
eM Pro perties

(iI

Display. ~ Browser Calendars

I
I
Name

~II

n::::::J

II

sU9~cobra..

--I
Delete

( APply) ( Reset) ( Defaults )

The name is added to the scrolling list, as shown in Figure 4-25.

Revision A of 11 Iune 1990

110

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-25 The Browse scrolling list with a user name added
eM Properties

~

ffi

Display:

Browser Calendars

I~

SU9~(obra

I

I

~------------------~!~
Name

ffi

~SU~9~~~(o~b~r,
___________

( Apply)

('Re"S'et) ( Defaults )

You can enter any user name in this scrolling list. To improve system and network
perfonnance, the Calendar Manager does not confinn that the user name is valid or
that the appointments for that user name are available when you enter that user
name in the Browse scrolling list Calendar Manager does this checking when you
choose the Browse option from the Browse menu or the Browser pop-up menu.
When you have completed adding names to the Browser scrolling list, click
SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes. These changes are not
automatically displayed, since the Calendar Manager only looks at the list of
browser calendars when you start it To display these changes as part of the
Calendar Manager, quit and restart the application. The changes are reflected in
both the Browse menu and the Browser pop-up window, as shown in Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 How the Browser Calendar properties affect the Calendar Manager
lVJ

Calendar Manag

( View v) ( Edit v

(

I

(Browse ...
wlnsorCicastle
sugClcobra

June 1990
SUD

I

J

4

I

,.:•• 0'1 1 ...1

1:., 0 ••1,11

1.:00 0'1 I ...,

-

wlnsorClcastie

~U9ClCobra

I

Wed

~
...

•

4=-.

It&

aa

u

'1:" ....... "

'1=-0' ..

-You delete a user name from
....

Deleting Users from the Browser

II

Name: SU2~(ob!3.

'1:1. , ••

;;;: :::#""

a.

CM BrOWser

Print v

) ,.

Tue

MOD

cP

c::BD

( Delete )

C§S!)

------'

the Browse menu by following these steps:

1. Display the Properties window.
2. Choose Browser Calendars on the Display menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 -

Calendar Manager 1 I J

3. Point to a name in the scrolling list and click SELECT to select it.
4. The line is highlighted.
5. Choose Delete from the Name menu, as shown in Figure 4-27, or from the
scrolling list pane pop-up menu.

Figure 4-27 Choosing Delete from the Name menu
~

eM Properties

Display: @) Browser Calendars
I

I ~u9~cobra

I,,

,.
i

,

I

II

I

I

I

i..,

I

Name

!=;

II~
I~

~br.
Add

( APply) ( Reset) ( Defaults )

6. To record the changes to the Browser Calendars scrolling list, click
SELECT on the Apply button.

The names are not deleted from the Browse menu until you quit Calendar Manager
and start it up again.
Access List and Permissions
Properties

The Calendar Manager browser allows you to browse the appointments for others..
as well as allowing other users to browse your appointments. See 4cBrowsing
Remote Calendars" later in this chapter for more infonnation about browsing.
The Access List and Pennissions properties let you specify who may browse or
change your appointments.

NOTE

The permissions you give to a user apply to all ofyour appointments. If you give
someone permission to change your appointments, that user will be able to change
all your appointments, not just specific ones. Make sure the user is trusted before
providing Insert or Delete permissions.
The default access list,-shown in Figure 4-28, gives all users permission to browse
your calendar, but not to insert or delete appointments.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

112

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-28 Access List and Permissions Properties
~

eM Properties

Display. @) Access List and Permissions

~

=---world_ B

Name@) ...._ _ _ _ _ _ __
Permissions:

( APply)

IBrowse I I Insert I IDelete I

Q!!!D ( Defaults )

The scrolling list displays a list of everyone who has access to your calendar. The
entry "world" means everyone who is using the DeskSet Environment. If you
delete the world entry, only the users you specifically add will be able to read your
appoinunents.
To the right of each name in the scrolling list are letters indicating the pennissions
that user has. The available pennissions are "B" for Browse, meaning the user can
read your appoinunents, "1" for Insert, meaning the user can insert new
appoinunents in your calendar, and "D" for Delete, meaning the user can delete
existing appointments from your calendar.
If you give more pennissions to the world than you give to an individual, that
individual will still have the world pennissions. For example, if you give a user

named Jim pennission to browse your calendar, but the world has pennission to.
browse and insert, Jim will inherit the world pennissions and will be able to insert
appoinunents as well as browse your calendar.
If you give someone both Insert and Delete pennission, that person can also edit or

change existing appoinbnents. The name of the person who most recently edited
an appoinunent is displayed in the footer of the Appointment Editor window when
that appointment is selected.
You add to and delete users. from the Access List in the same way as you do for the
Browser Calendars scrolling list You can also change the existing pennissions for
a user already on the Access List The methods of editing the Access List are
described below:
Adding Users to the Access List

To add a user, follow these steps:
1. In the Name field, type the email address of the user you want to add.
2. Select the permissions you want to give the user. In Figure 4-29, Browse,
Insert, and Delete are all selected.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 -

Calendar Manager 113

3. To add the name, choose Add from the Name menu, as shown in
Figure 4-29, or from the scrolling list pane pop-up menu.

Figure 4-29 Adding a name to the Access Ust
eM

~

Pro pertles

Display: @) Access list and Permissions
c:::l

antoniatklondike
walterf..,ork
wi nsor.castle

BID
BI
I

~

I

c:::l

Name

II

larry~seabreeze...

.!!G_

Permis~

Delete
Change

~ I Insert

I I Delete I

( APply) ~ (Defaults)

4. Repeat the first three steps to add other users.

5.. When· you have completed the list, click SELECT on the Apply button to
record the changes.

Deleting Users from the Access
List

To delete a user, follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the user name in the scrolling list. If you want to delete
several users at one time, click SELECT on each additional user name you
want to delete.
2. Choose Delete from the Name menu or the scrolling list pane pop-up
menu.
3. Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes.

Changing the Access List

To change the existing pennissions for a user already onthe Access List, follow
these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the user name in the scrolling list.

You can only change the pennissions for one user at a time. If you click
SELECT on more than one user, the Change item on the Name menu is
dimmed.

2. Select the new permissions you want to give the user.
In Figure 4-30, Browse and Insert are selected to replace the existing
permission of Insert for winsor@castle.

3. Choose Change from the Name menu, as shown in Figure 4-30, or from
the scrolling list pane pop-up menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

114

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-30 Changing an entry in the Access Ust
~

eM Properties

Display: @) Access List and Permissions
antoniafk1ondike
.,a1 tertwork
~i nso rtcastle
1arryt.seabreeze

BID

91
I

~
I

.I •

BID

I

c::::J

Name
Permls~

II

wlnsor(!castle.
Add
Delete

a.IIII·1I

~

I Insert I I Delete I

( APply) ( Reset) ( Defaults )

4. Click· SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes.

4.4 Browsing Remote
Calendars

The Calendar Manager application allows you to access the appointment schedules
of other users if you are included on their Access List. This convenient feature
allows administrative personnel and their staff to coordinate Scheduling of
appointments. It can, for example, allow individual users access to the
appointments that coordinate scheduling of conference rooms.
The default is for the Calendar Manager application to allow you access to your
own calendar appointments. You can add and delete other user names on the
Browse menu from the Properties window, as described in the previous section. If
you have not added names to the Browse menu from the Properties window, the
Browse menu button initially contains two items: A Browse window item and an
item for your login and machine name. Figure 4-31 shows an example of the
default Browse menu.

Figure 4-31 An example of a defaUlt Browse menu
Print
Browse ...
brenda~jungle

Adding Another User's
Appointments to the
Browser

You can temporarily add another user's appointment schedule to the Browse menu
from the Browse pop-up window. User names ~at you add from the Browse popup window remain on the Browse menu until you quit the Calendar Manager
application or delete them using the Delete button in the Browse pop-up window.
To display the Browse pop-up window choose the Browse item from the Browse
menu. An example of the Browse pop-up window is shown in Figure 4-32.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 115

Figure 4-32 The Browse pop-up window
cP

eM Browser

Name:

I

~.

________________

bre nda~Jungle

I:

'---_-----...11=

~

(Delete) (Browse)

The Browser scrolling list shows all the user names from the Browse menu,
whether you added them from the Properties window or the Browse window.
You temporarily add other users to the Browse menu following the steps below:
1. In the Name field, type the email address of the user you want to add to
your browser.

2. Move the pointer onto the Add button and click SELECT.

Alternatively, you can press the Return key. The user name is added to the
scrolling list and to the Browse menu.
You can enter any user name in this scrolling list. The Calendar Manager does not
confinn that the user name is valid or that the appointments for that user name are
available until you click SELECf on Browse in the Browser pop-up window or
choose the user name from the Browse menu. This checking can be a time
consuming operation, so it is not done at the time you add a name to the scrolling
list.
Browsing a Remote
Calendar

Once a user name has been added to the Browse menu, you can display and/or edit
the appointments for that user, (depending on the access permissions that user has
given you), by choosing the user name from the Browse menu. Alternatively, you
can change the Calendar Manager base window to display appointments for
another user from the Browser window. Qick SELECT on the user name in the
scrolling list to choose it and then click SELECT on the Browse button.
If the Calendar Manager cannot find the user name or access the appointments for--

that user, the error message "Unable to access user@machine ••• " is
displayed in the footer of the Browser window. The appropriate user and machine
names are displayed in the error message.
If the Calendar Manager can access the appointments for that user, they are

displayed in the Calendar Manager base window, and the name of the user is
displayed in the header following the words "Calendar Manager". If you do not

Revision A of 11 June 1990

116

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

have browse access for that user you cannot see or edit any of their appointments,
but you can see blocks of scheduled time. as shown in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-33 Browsing a Calendar with Week view when you don't have Browse Access
@)

Cale ndar Manager: walterework

( View v)

(id!f'V)

(Browse v) (Print v)

~ ~ ~

week Starting June 4,1 S90
Mondav"

TuesdavS

Wednesdav..

Thursdav 7

Ff'ldav 8

Saturday 9

Sunday 10

~ ____~__~__~__~__~_S__~S__~I

l1~!!t:::t:::""""~----~----~J

12
1

~t---""'_rl--­

:..-._t------I

~ ~----+_-+-----~--~----~-_r----~J

: ~----+_----+-----~----~----~----_r----~J

Copyright (c) 1987-1990 Sun Microsystems, Inc.

To change back to your own calendar, choose your user name from the Browse
menu.
Deleting A User from the
Browse Menu

To delete another user's name from your Browse menu, follow these steps:
1. Choose the Browse window item from the Browse menu.

The Browser pop-up window is displayed.
2. Move the pointer onto the user name you want to delete and click
SELECT.

The user name is highlighted.
3. Move the pointer onto the Delete button and click SELECT.

The user name is removed from the scrolling list, but remains displayed in the
Name field. If you inadvertently deleted a name, you can add the name again
by clicking on the Add button without retyping the name.
You can temporarily delete user names that you have added from the Properties
window, as well as any user names you have added from the Browser pop-up
window. When you delete names that you entered from the Properties window, the
names are redisplayed the next time you quit the application and start it up again.

Revision A of 11 Iune 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 117

4.5 Printing Calendar
Views

The Calendar Manager application provides high-quality printed output for day,
week, month, and year vjews~ You set the printer name and options from the
Printer Options window that you access from the Print menu. You print Calendar
Manager output by choosing the view you want to print from the Print menu.

The Printer Options
Pop-up Window

You can set printing options from the Printer Options pop-up window.
Figure 4-34 shows the default settings for the Printer Options window.

Figure 4-34 The Printer Options pop-up window
~

eM Printer Options

I

I

I

Destination: Printer File
Printer: .;.;.Iw..
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

~

output Width:

He 19 ht: 10.00
Position: , .00
~

Inches from left

Inches from bottom

Months: _,_'61.1
Copies: _,_EE:1
(

Print)

From this window, you can specify the following print options:
(j

The destination of the printed output (Printer or File)

(j

The printer name or file destination and file name

(j

The width and height of the printed image

(j

The left and bottom margin

[] The number of units that print
In Figure 4-34 above, the unit is Months. When a day view is displayed, the
unit is Days, and so on. You can tell what view will print from the label on this

field. The selected unit (day, week, month, year) always begins the sequence.
Subsequent units print according to the number you enter in this field.
To change the unit, choose a new option from the View menu.
[]

The number of copies to print

Clicking SELECf on the Print button in the Printer Options window prints the
view that is displayed in the Calendar Manager base window. For example, if you
are displaying appointments for a day at a glance, choosing Print prints a day view.
When you change the settings from the Printer Options window, they become the
new default printer settings until you quit the Calendar Manager application and
start it up again.
Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

118

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Day View

To print appointments for the current day, choose Day from the Print menu. To
print appointments for a day other than the current one, move the pointer onto the
day you want to print and click SELECT. Then choose Day from the Print menu.
Appointments for the day are printed in the format shown in Figure 4-35.
Figure 4-35 A printed day view
Monday December 4, 1989

1.:00.....11,00....
OW Business Team
Bldg 1. Banok Conf Rm

a=

3:3O.......5:OOpm

~Ita Con'-nce Room

Bring Information for
Design Committee

status report.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 119

Week View

To print appointments for the current week, choose Week from the Print menu. To
print appointments for a week other than the current one, move the pointer onto the
day you want to print and click SELEer. Then choose Week from the Print menu.
Appointments for the week are printed in the fOImat shown in Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 A printed week view

............
JCtrrdt
ltu..1I:u..

.IrunIy" SCSIta SCSA
ltu-u:u..

t:&.It:&a

flEX: Ptigs ExItnsirIc 10 X

OPEHlOOK
ltu..ltu..
Open Wincbn 0id:IIII
ltU-ltu..
SP~

PhiotaPIY

SCII os ani SYr4
9:0lIl. . . . .

SPAR; ~

ltl5em-ll!u.lI

f:GQa.~1I

NIIISAM

Net !SAM
....14tCIOt1l

t:45I.~.

GX TICInIi:Igy
t-.&.It:&11

SCII os , SVr.

t-.&.IO:&II
SPARC~

au...lI:u..
11:lla.l2:GOpm
p.., DweIapHrt 1JqH! ~ Orientd~ iI SInIaIds II SCII
ltu...ltu..
M:u..II:&1I
11:11a.l2:GOpm
SM3 AuIhian CllIIyS
.bmey . . SCSI 10 SCSA
()pin Fcm
1O:15I..11:15a1l

s

s

Revision A of 11 J\Ule 1990

120

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Month View

To print appointments for the current month, choose Month from the Print menu.
To print appointments for a week other than the current one, move the pointer onto
the day you want to print and click SELECT. Then choose Month from the Print
menu. Appointments for the month are printed in the format shown in Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37 A printed month view

December 1989
2

12

10
17

18

19

16
20

22

23

24

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 121

Year View

To print the current year, choose Year from the Print menu. To print a year other
than the current one, change the year view to the year you want to print. Then
choose Year from the Print menu. You can print a standard view of the year, as
shown in Figure 4-38, or a schedule view of the year, as shown in Figure 4-39.
Figure 4-38 A printed standard year view

1989
~~~~~i!~I~fll'~!ifi~l~l~~~l~i~Ii~i~~iI~: ijiji~jiliml~I!j~~~~jjijij!~I~lj )!~!~)II~~~ljl)!!!MKflljlll~jlll)!))jjIjl)~)j~
SMTWTFS
12345 , 1
• '1.11121314
IS l' 17 II If 21 21
22 23 24 15 2f 27 21
29 3e 31

SIlTWTFS
123 4
5 ' 7 . '1'11
12 13 14 15 l' 17 II
If 2t 21 22 23 24 2S
~ rr 21

SIlTWTFS
123 4
5 ' , . '1.11
12 13 14 IS I' 17 II
19 20 21 22 23 24 15
~ rr 21 19 30 31

~~~IljI~\j\\j\\j\\\\\\lPHE\\\\\\jjj\\\\\\j\\\j\j1I i\~~~\lj~jj~ij~\l~jji~Iljljjmlj~jl~~j~jj~ljlj~j~\~\~\j\\\jj\j~jdIjjjjjjjjjjI~jjjjjjjjjmjm:jj[jjjIj\j\tm~~jm~j
SMTWTFS
I
1 3 4 5 , 7'
, I' 11 11 13 14 IS
16 17 18 If 20 21 22
23 24 15·~ rr 21 2f
30

SMTWTFS
123 4 5 ,
7"
18 11 11 13
14 15 16 17 II If 10
21 11 23 24 15 16 27
21 29 3e 31

SMTWTFS
113
4 5 , 7 I '10
11 11 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 28 11 21 23 24
15 ~ 27 21 19 30

jj}:I!l!~!~!l:l~!!j!!!j~:~f,!!!I!!j!tljr!1l}!!l' !!r!l!l!I!:t!!!~piit.l!!!l!I!JtI!!!l!: ·!!!!:jIl!!!j!$.~p.~~m~~t:[l[II:!~::::~i:
SMTWTFS
I
1 3 4 5 , 7'
, 10 11 11 13 14 IS
I' 17 18 If 20 11 22
23 24 15 2' rr 21 29
30 31

SMTWTFS
1 2 3 .. 5
' 7 I ' I ' 11 11
13 14 IS I' 17 II 19
20 11 22 13 24 15 ~
rr 21 29 30 31

SMTWTFS
1 2
3 4 5 , 7· I . ,
10 11 11 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 10 21 22 23
24 15 26 rr 21 29 30

jjI~I~)ItJ~9~fll~III!!II~)!' l)))!~!I!)!l!!!B9Y~)li.r!!!!!~Ifj!~~!~!): I)!)I!t!!!!jP§~m~~r!!!!!!:!:I!I::::::
SMTWTFS
113 4 5 , 7
• , I. 11 11 13 14
IS l' 17 18 l' 1t 21
22 23 24 15 2' 27 21
29 3t 31

SMTWTFS
113 4
5 ' 7 • '18 11
11 13 14 IS I' 17 18
If 2t 11 22 23 24 2S
26 rr 21 29 3t

SMTWTFS
I 1
3 4 5 , 7 8 9
18 11 11 13 14 IS I'
17 I. ., 2t 21 22 23
24 15 U rr 21 29 30
31

Revision A of 11 ]Wle 1990

122

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 4-39 A printed schedule year view

__ Mt,.

--990

JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY

JUN
JUL
SEP

OCT

DEC

4.6 Drag and Drop from
Mail Tool to the
Calendar Manager

You can enter appointments into the Calendar Manager from Mail Tool by
dragging and dropping a mail message header when the mail message provides the
appoinunent information in a fonnat that the Calendar Manager can interpret

Creating an Appointment
Message from Mail Tool

Mail Tool provides a template that you can use to create mail messages in the
fonnat that Calendar Manager can accept, as shown in Figure 4-40. See Chapter 3
for more information about Mail Tool templates.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 123

Figure 4-40 TheMail Tool template/or Calendar Manager messages
Mall Tool: Cempose Message

(Include v) (Dellyer v) (Header v) (Name Finder... ) (Clear)
To:

Subject: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - {
Cc:

----------------------~

•• Calendar Appoint.ent ••
Date:
Start:
End:
What:

1>•• /dd/yy<1

I>hh: •• p.<1
I>hh: •• pI<1

I >l1n8 1 11ne 2<1

•
Alternatively, you can type a message following the rules listed below.
o

You can type either uppercase letters, lowercase letters, or a combination of the
two. For example, "Date", "date", "DATE", and "DaTe" are all-acceptable.

o

Type a tab or white space(s) before the Date, Start, End, and What fields.

o

After the words Date, Start, End, and What, type a colon and white space(s) or
tabes).

o

Type Return after each line.

o

Use any fonnat for _the Date field that is accepted by the Appointtnent Editor,
as described previously.
-

o

Type hours and minutes, separated by a colon, in the Start and End fields. You
can follow the time with AM or PM, or you can use military time. If the date
is not military time or is not followed by PM, Calendar Manager will assume
the time is AM.

o

You can type up to Slines of text in the What field, with a maximum of 255
characters per line. Follow each line with a Return, and type white space(s) or
tab(s) before each of the second through fifth lines.

A mail message can contain several appointments and have explanatory text either
before or after each appointment. The Calendar Manager application accepts only
the infonnation in the Date, Start, End, and What fields and ignores everything else
in the mail message. TIle Calendar Manager application will accept multiple
appointments in the same mail message as long as each message is in the .
acceptable fonnat.
Dragging an Appointment
Message from Mail Tool

When you receive a mail message that has appointment infonnation in the correct
fonnat, or a mail reminder generated by another Calendar Manager application,
you can drag and drop it onto the Calendar Manager to schedule your appointment
by following these steps:
1. Open the Mail Tool window that displays your mail message headers.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

124

t-.

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

2. Point to the header and click SELECT to select it.
3. Press the Control key on the keyboard and the SELECT mouse button.
If you don't press the Control key first, the mail message is moved and deleted
from the Mail Tool instead of copied.

Once you have pressed SELECT, you can release the Control key.
4. Drag the pointer a short distance.
The poInter changes to the duplicate pointer and a small envelope representing
the mail message is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-41.

Figure 4-41 Dragging a mail message
64 winsor
67 winsor

s.

Drag the envelope onto the Calendar Manager.
You can drop it onto the Calendar Manager icon or anywhere on the open
Calendar Manager window.

6. Release SELECT.
When the appointment has been successfully scheduled, an information message is
displayed in the footer of the Calendar Manager base window. Figure 4-42 shows
an example of such an information message.

Figure 4-42 An example of an information message for a scheduled appointment

If the appointment is in a format that Calendar Manager cannot understand, a
Notice is displayed informing you that the appointment cannot be scheduled, as

shown in Figure 4-43.

Figure 4-43 Invalid format Notice

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 4 - Calendar Manager 125

4.7 Troubleshooting

The Calendar Manager application consists of two parts:
A database manager, called rpc . cmsd (Calendar Manager service), that
maintains the information for the Calendar Manager application

o

o The Calendar Manager application itself, called cm
The Calendar Manager application cannot function without the Calendar Manager
service. In order for the Calendar Manager sexvice to run, you must have run the
install_cmgr script. See the OpenWindows Installation and Start-up
Guide forinfonnation about install_cmgr.
If your Calendar Manager consistently does not display appoinonents, or if you get
"RPC timeout" messages in the console window, rpc. cmsd is probably not
running. To check your configuration, use these steps:

1. Open a Shell Tool or Command Tool.
2. At the system prompt, type ps -axw I grep rpc. cmsd and press
Return.

3. Look at the listing displayed in the window.
Figure 4-44 shows a listing that contains the Calendar Manager service
process.
Figure 4-44 A ps listing showing the rpc.cmsd process
% ps -axw I grep rpc.cIsd

196 co!W
3759 pO 5

0:07 rpc.cmsd
0:00 grep rpc.cIsd

%

Note that you can ignore the entry grep rpc. cmsd in your ps listing.
If you do not have an rpc . cmsd process running, follow these steps:

1. If you have a Calendar Manager application running, quit the Calendar
Manager by choosing Quit from the Window menu.
2. Become root.
3. At the system prompt, type cd $OPENWINHOME/xview/bin andpress
Return.
4. Type install_cmgr and press Return.
S. Start up another Calendar Manager application.
6. To make sure that the Calendar Manager Service is now running, type
ps -axw I grep rpc. cmsd and press Return.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

126

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 June 1990

5
Text Editor
The Text Editor is an interactive ASCn text editor. The editing functionality
provided in this DeskSet application is also available to you in the text editing
panes of the Console and the Command Tool, and in the View and Compose
windows of the Mail Tool.
The Text Editor application is integrated with the DeskSet drag and drop
functionality. You can drag Text Editor files from the Flle Manager, or from the
window background of the Text Editor window itself. You- can drop Text Editor
files onto the Print Tool, Tape Tool, and Mail Tool Compose windows.
You can cut and paste directly between Text Editor windows and any other text
window in the DeskSet
This chapter describes how to use the Text Editor.

5.1 The Text Editor Icon

Figure 5-1

The Text Editor icon shows you as much as it can of the beginning of the file name.
When the file has been edited and you have not saved the changes, the file name is
preceded by a ">" symbol. When there is no file, or when you have .created a new
file but have not saved it, the icon displays the words "No File" in the icon.
Figure 5-1 shows an example of three Text Editor icons. The one on the left
contains a file named "example." The one in the middle contains a file named
"example" that has been edited but not saved. The one on the 'right contains either
no file at all, or a file that has never been saved.

Text Editor icons

.-----...,

JaJ251l1
example

S.2

The Text Editor Base·'
Window

>example

NO FILE

The Text Editor base window, shown in Figure 5-2, has a control area and a text -pane that you use to compose and edit your text message. The header of the Text
Editor window always displays the name of the file you are editing (or the word
"None" when you have not assigned a name to the file), and shows you the
directory where the file is located. When you have made editing changes, or have
not yet saved a file, the word "edited" is displayed in parentheses following the file
name.

127

Revision A of 11 June 1990

128

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 5-2

The Text Editor base window
Text Editor - (NONE), dlr: /home/wlnsor

•

The Control Area

The control area of the Text Editor has File, View, Edit, and Find buttons. The
Text Editor pane has a pop-up menu, shown in Figure 5-3, containing these same
commands. The Text Pane pop-up menu is also provided in the text editing panes
of the Console, Command Tool, and Mail Tool applications.
The commands for each of the items in Text Pane pop-up menu operate in the same
way as the controls in the Text Editor base window, described in the following
sections. There is an additional item on the TextPane pop-up menu called Extras,
which is described later in this chapter.

Revision A of 11 Iune 1990

Chapter S - Text Editor 129

Figure 5-3

The Text Pane pop-up menu

"

~ (View

V) (Edit V) (Find V)

Text Pane

eFile
View

Edit
Find

The File Menu

~)

~
~
~

The File menu, shown in Figure 5-4, contains items that you can use to load and
save your text files, and for other file-related functions.

Figure 5-4

The File menu

Saye Current File

(Store as New File ... )
Include File ...
Empty Document

Use the Load File item to display the Text: Load pop-up window shown in
Figure 5-5. Type the directory and name of the file you want to load. Qielting
SELECf on the Load File button loads the file in the window, replacing any
existing text

Figure 5-5

The Text: Load pop-up window
Text:load
Directory. /home/jungle/brenda
rile: ...._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

(Load File)
Use the Save Current File item to save the contents of the Text Editor pane in the
current directory, using the file name displayed in the header of the Text Editor
window. If "NONE" is shown as the file name, use the Store as New File aption.
Use Store as New File to display a Text: Store pop-up window, shown in
Figure 5-6. Type a directory and file name, and click SELECf on the Store as New-File button to save the contents of the Text Editor pane. The Text: Store pop-up
window automatically displays the current directory in the Directory text field.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

130

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 5-6

The Text: Store pop-up window
.-i:O

Text:Store

Directory. /home/Jungle/brend,

nle: __- -_________________________________

( Store as New ftie)

Use the Include File item to display the Text: Include pop-up window shown in
Figure 5-7.. Type the directory and name of the file you want to include, and click
SELECT on the Include File button to include the file you specify at the insert point
in the text pane.
Figure 5-7

The Text: Include pop-up window
Text:lnclude
Directory. Ihome/Jungle/brenda

Rle: ..
* _______________________________

(include File)

Use the Empty Document item to clear the contents of the text pane. If you have
made editing changes and have not saved them, a Notice is displayed asking you
to confinn or cancel the operation.
The View Menu

The View menu, shown in Figure 5-8, provides choices you can use to control the
position of the cursor and the way the line wrap is used.
Figure 5-8

The View menu

Use the Select Line at Number item to display the Text: Line Number pop-up
window shown in Figure 5.:9. Type the number of the line that you want selected,
and click SELECT on the Select Line at Number button. The text on the specified
line is selected, and the insert point is moved to the end of the selected text
Figure 5-9

The Text: line Number pop-up window
Q
Text:lIne Number
line Number: ..
+ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(select line at Number)

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

Chapter 5 - Text Editor 131

Use the What Line Number? item to locate the line number where the selected text
begins. The line number is displayed in a Notice. When there is no current
selection in the Text Editor window the Notice displays an error message instead
of a line number.
t

Use the Show Caret at Top item to move the line with the caret to the third line
from the top of the text pane.
The Change Line Wrap submenu provides three choices for line wrapping: word,
character, and clip lines. The text shown in Figure 5-10 is wrapped at a character,
so words are broken at the end of lines.
Figure 5-10 Lines wrapped at a character

Change 1Ilie Wr

to work. Based on .Y
wrinkles and a
this was about 10 y
ears or so into
usual exit. and e
nded up in East
through the electri
c fence gates. 1,·,~;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;:.J had just recently IOV
ed. Eyeryone WB!
ded ared that she had
done sOle figuring. and
s was her 32nd office since bei
ng at the cOlpany.
Not all of us were still here. Henry had just opened his 0
wn phone repair business called Dead Ringers. and John was
considering retirelent fro. the co~puter business to organi
ze 9 of his friends. his brother. wife. and seyen kids into

The most commonly used wrapping method is to wrap at the end of words. The
text shown in Figure 5-11 is wrapped at the end of words.
Figure 5-11 Lines wrapped at a word

,..._______

to work. Based onlY
this was about 10
the usual exit. and
ked through the
that we had just
recently loved • .....- - -...... n9. and Mary declared
that she had done sale figuring. and this was her 32nd
offic8 since being at the cOlpany.
~

Not all of us were still here. Henry had just opened his
own phone repair business called Dead Ringers. and John was
conSidering retire.ent frol the co.puter business to
organize of his friends. his brother. wife. and seven kids

Revision A of ll1une 1990

132·

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

If you choose Qip Lines, the beginning of each line that ends with a Return is
displayed. The text shown in Figure 5-12 has Returns only at the end of each
paragraph.

Figure 5-12 Clipped lines

What Line Number?
Show Caret at Top
'. h;:jngE' line Wrap

I unpacked and he
Next Alison told us

The Edit Menu

•• driving to

work.
just opened hi s

n9.

We had lot

rse she was busy

The Edit menu, shown in Figure 5-13, provides standard editing functions.

Figure 5-13 The Edit menu

TheFmdMenu

o

Use Again to repeat the last editing action.

o

Use Undo to undo the last editing action or all editing ac~ons and restore what
was there before, depending on which item you choose from the Undo
submenu.

o

Use Copy to store a copy of the selected text on the clipboard. Only one
selection can be stored on the clipboard at a time. If something is already on
the clipboard and you do a copy or cut, the contents of the clipboard are
overwritten with the new infonnation.

o

Use Paste to insert the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point

o

Use Cut to remove the selected text and store it on the clipboard. Only one
selection can be stored on the clipboard at a time.

The Find menu, shown in Figure 5-14, includes items that help you to search for
specific text strings, special characters, and delimiters to fmd a text string and
replace it with another.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter S - Text Editor 133

Figure 5-14 The Find menu
v

C>

Find Marked Text..
Replace l:>fleld<1 c>

Ok. so it started out
wrinkles and a few gr._ _ _ _.....
years or so into the future. I passed the usual
ended up ;n East Peyton Place. As I walked thr.
electric fence gates. it was obvious t~at we
ecently loyed. Eyeryone was unpacking. an
done

The Text: Find and Replace Item. Use the Find and Replace item to display the
Text: Find and Replace pop-up window . If you have a current selection, it is
automatically displayed in the Find text field, as shown in the example in
Figure 5-15.
Figure 5-15 The Text: Find and Replace pop-up window
.~
~

Text:Find and Replace

:

~dr~e=a~~

____________________________________________________

(Replace): _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

CFind then Replace)

(Replace then Find)

CReplace All)

@) All Text

To fmd a text string and select it, type the text in the Find field and click SELECI'
on the Find button. Oick SELECf on the Find button again to find and select the
next occurrence of the text string.
To replace the current selection with a text string, type the text in the Replace field
and click SELECf on the Replace button. You can use the Replace button together
with the Find button to find a string and then replace it with another, or separately
to replace highlighted text. You can replace a string with nothing by leaving the
Replace text field blank.
.
The buttons at the bottom of the Find and Replace window combine fmd and
replace operations, allowing you to Find then Replace, Replace then Find, or
Replace All.
You can specify whether you want the find and replace operations to apply to all
of the text, or restrict the operation to the text between the insert point and the end
of the document by using the abbreviated menu button to select either All Text or
To End. The current setting is listed to the right of the abbreviated menu button.
The Find Selection Item. Use the Find Selection item of the Find menu to search
the fue for another occurrence of the text string that is highlighted as the current
selection. You can search fOlward or backward from the insert point by choosing
Forward or Backward from the Find Selection sub-menu.
The Find Marked Text Item. Use the Find Marked Text item of the Find menu
to highlight text between a matched set of delimiters provided as options in the
Text:Find Marked Text pop-up window, shown in Figure 5-16.

Revision A of ll1une 1990

134

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 5-16 The Text:FindMarked Text pop-up window
.-0:0

I () I" I

Text:Flnd Marked Text

I () I,· .,
(Find Pair) : I Forward I Backward I Expand I
1#

I"

II> Ye Pair)

You can search and highlight text for any of the matched delimiters provided as
choices in the Text:Find Marked Text pop-up window by clicking SELECf on one
of the sets of delimiters, and then clicking SELECf on the Find Pair button. Use
the Backward or Forward choice to direct the search either backward or forward
from the current insertion point If you have nested delimiterS, such as matched
parentheses in code, you can use the Expand choice to select text outward from the
current insertion point to the next outer pair of specified delimiters.
To surround the selected text with the selected delimiters, click SELECf on .the
Insert Pair button. To delete a matched pair of delimiters from the selected text,
click SELECf on the Remove Pair button.
The Replace Field Item. The Text Editor pane recognizes any text between the
characters I> and field<1 item of the
Find menu. The Replace l>field<1 submenu provides three options: Expand, Next,
and Previous:

o When the caret in the Text Editor pane is between field delimiters, choose
Expand to search in both directions and select the entire field and its delimiters.

o Use Next to search forward from the insert point and select the next field.
o Use Previous to search backward from the insert point and select the previous
field.
The Extras Menu

There is an additional item on the Text Pane pop-up menu, called Extras, that is not
also a button in the Control area. This menu contains some useful commands to
fonnat the selected text. See the section "Customizing Your Text Editor" later in
this chapter for infonnation about how to customize the Extras menu to contain
your own commands. This section describes the default Extras menu, shown in
Figure 5-17.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 5 - Text Editor 135

Figure 5-17 The Text Pane Extras sub-menu
v

Text Pane

File

c>

View

c>

Edit
Find

c>

D

Format
Capitalize "c>
Sh 1ft lines
c>
Pretty-print C
Insert Brackets c>
Re mOYi Brackets t>

The Format Item. Choose Fonnat to reformat selected long lines of text into
physical lines of no more than 72 characters. This is useful, for example, when
reading mail with lines longer than the width of the window. It is also useful to
fonnat text with long lines before printing it, to make sure that lines will not be
truncated by the printer.
Format uses the UNIX fmt command. It does not split words between lines, and
it preserves blank lines and the spacing between words.
The Capitalize Item. You can use the Capitalize jtem to capitalize selected text.
You use the first item on the Capitalize submenu, abcd->ABCD, to capitalize every
letter of the selected text. Use the second item on the Capitalize submenu,
ABCD->abcd, to tum all the letters of the selected text into lowercase. You can
use the last item of the Capitalize submenu, abcd->Abcd, to capitalize the first
letter of every selected word. Uppercase letters within a word are not changed.
The Shift Lines Item. Choose the Shift Lines item to insert or remove a Tab
character at the beginning of each line in the selected text Use the submenu of this
item to specify whether to shift right or left. Choose shift right to insert a Tab
character, and shift left to remove a Tab character.
The Pretty-print C Item. This item uses the UNIX indent command to format
C program listings. It formats the selection according to standard specifications.
or to the specifications of a • indent. pro file if you have one. For more
infonnation, refer to the SunOS Reference Manual.
The Insert Brackets Item. You can use the Insert Brackets item to quickly insert
any of the following type of brackets around the selected text, depending on what
item you choose from the Insert Brackets sub-menu: ( ), [ ], { } or" ".
The Remove Brackets Item. Choose the Remove Brackets item to remove any
of the following brackets around the selected text, depending on what item you
choose from the Remove Brackets sub-menu: (), [], { } or"
ft.

Revision A of 11 I\U1e 1990

136

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

5.3 Selecting Text

You select text in the Text Editor pane in the same ways that you select and operate
on text in the other DeskSet applications. See the Open Windows User's Guide for
more information about selecting and operating on text
Selected text is highlighted (shown in reverse video), and is pending delete: when
you type a new character, highlighted text is replaced with the new infonnation that
you type.
You can select "text in the following ways:

a Move the pointer and click SELECf to set the insert point, as shown by a
triangular caret.
Cl

To select a word, move the pointer onto the word and double-click SELECf.

a To select a paragraph, move the pointer onto the paragraph and triple-click
SELECf.
Cl

To select the entire document, quadruple-click SELECf.

a To select any continuous body of text, move the pointer to the place where you
want to begin the select, press SELECf, drag the pointer over the text you want
to select, and release SELECf.

S.4

Operating on Text

Cl

You can also select a continuous body of text by clicking SELECf to set the
insert point, moving the pointer to the end of the selection and clicking
ADJUST.

Cl

You can expand text that is currently selected, adding to the beginning or the
end of the text by moving the pointer and clicking ADJUST.

Cl

You can adjust the selection, making it smaller by moving the pointer into the
highlighted text and clicking ADJUST. The text is adjusted. Highlighting is
removed from the selection. Reducing a selection in this way is usually fairly
intuitive. However, it may not work exactly as you expect, since the
adjustment depends on how you made the original selection and the starting
position of the insert point.

You operate on text in the Text Editor pane in the same ways that you operate on
text in the other DeskSet applications, using the clipboard and cut/copy/paste
functions from the Edit menu or from the keyboard.
To copy text, follow these steps:
1. Select the text to be copied.
2. Choose Copy from the Edit menu or press the Copy key on the keyboard.

A copy of the selected text is put on the clipboard.
3. Move the pointer to the place where you want to insert the text and click
SELECT to set the insert point.
4. Choose Paste from the Edit menu or press the Paste key on the keyboard.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 5 - Text Editor 137

To move text, the steps are similar, except that you choose Cut instead of Copy,
and the selected text is removed from its original location.

s.s

Splitting Panes

The Text Editor pane can be split into two or more panes so that you can view and
edit different parts of the document at the same time. The document itself is not
split, so any ~iting changes you make in one view are reflected in other views as
well. See the OpenWindows User's Guide for detailed information on how to split
panes and how to remove split panes. The following steps describe one method of
splitting the Text Editor pane:
1. Move the pointer to the top cable anchor of the vertical scroll bar and press
SELECT.
2. Drag the pointer downward into the pane.

A horizontal line is displayed from the left edge of the pane to the center of the
cable anchor to show where the split will occur.
3. Release SELECT.

The pane is now split into two panes, such as the example in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 A Text Editor Split Pane
@)

Text Editor - story, dlr; /home/jungle/brenda

I have to tell you guys about a dreal I had last night.

were all there. let.e prefa
2. Printing 

e' • •

3. No entries.

When the printing job is complete, the Print Tool window flashes and beeps.
NOTE

Status messages are not provided for files that are printed without using the Print
Tool.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

144

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Choosing Another Printer

The Print Tool automatically displays the name of the first printer entry in your
/etc/printcap file. All printers that are available to you are listed on the

Printer menu. The names on the Printer menu are retrieved from the entries in your
/etc/printcap file. The name used for each printer is the first or second name
of the /etc/printcap entry, whichever is longest Make sure there are no
spaces before any of these printer names in your /etc/printcap file, or the
Print Tool will not be able to print to that printer.
To choose another printer follow these steps:

1. Point to the abbreviated menu button next to the Printer label.
2. Press MENU.
The Printer menu is displayed, as shown in the example in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5

An example of the Printer menu
I£)

Print Tool

file:
Printer:
crunchy
hannah
Ims
polde
sandstone
smooth
sosumi

B.

crunchy

grumpy
kraljev
mania
printery
scupper
sweden
spitfire

v---

er
lot
rol

TeX

troff
other:

-

p Printing V J
---...,..

3. Drag the pointer to the name of the printer you want to choose.
4. Release MENU.
The name of the new printer you chose is displayed to tlie right of the
abbreviated menu button.
To add other printers to your system configuration (and the Printer menu), contact
your system administrator for infonnation about configuring your
/ etc/printcap file.
Using the Print Tool Filters

When the rue you are printing has a print filter script bound to it in either
/etc/filetype or • filetype in your home directory, that script is
automatically used by Print Tool. You can change the default print filter scripts for
each application using the Binder. See Chapter 12 for more infonnation about the
Binder application.
The filter format is automatically chosen and displayed when you drop a file on
Print Tool or type its file name in the Print Tool window and click SELECf on the
Print button.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 6 - Print Tool and Tape Tool 145

Here is a brief description of the seven standard filter fonnats:

a

None provides no filter.

a Plot is a filter for files produced by the UNIX command plot, which produces
plotting instructions, in particular for graphics tenninals and printer/plotters.

a Pr prints text into pages headed by date, file name, and page number.
a Raster is a ruter for raster images.
a

CifPlot is a filter for files produced by the UNIX command cifplot.

a

Control interprets the first character of each line as a standard FORTRAN
carriage control character.

a TeX is a filter for tex documents.
a Troff is a filter for files containing troff commands.
None and troff are provided as part of the standard SunOS installation. The other
filters may be provided as part of other printer installations.
If you occasionally need to print a file with another print method, you can choose
Other. A text field is displayed into which you can type any command line print

method, including UNIX pipes. This text field accepts three variables:

a

$FILE substitutes the name of the specified file in the print script.

a

$PRINTER substitutes the name of the printer currently selected in Print Tool.

a

$eop IES substitutes the number of copies currently specified in the Copies

text field.
For example, if you want to pretty-print a C file using the vgr ind command and
pipe the output to lpr, you would follow these steps:
.
1. Click SELECT on Other.
2. In the text field, type vgrind -t $FILE I Ipr -P $PRINTER -t

3. Type the name of the file in the File text field, or drag and drop the file you
want to print onto Print Tool.
Checking the Print Queue
Status

You can view jobs in the print queue by clicking SELECT on the Status button.
When there are no entries, the message No Entries is displayed in the footer.
When there are entries in the print queue, the list of all the jobs for that printer (not
just yours) is displayed in the scrolling list in the lower part of the Print Tool
window, as shown in Figure 6-6.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

146

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 6-6

---

An example ofjobs in the Print queue
~

-

(print) (status) (Stop Printing

.,-

v)

active

186 lail.winsor.627 winsor

~rlnting

Itmp/mall.winsor.627611322...

~
6

Stopping Printing

J

You can stop printing all your jobs in the job queue by choosing All Print Jobs from
the Stop Printing menu. To stop selected jobs, follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the Status button to display jobs in the print queue.
2. Point to a job in the scrolling list that you want to stop and click SELECT.
To stop more than one job at a time, point to additional jobs and click
SELECT.
3. When you have selected the jobs you want to stop, point to the Stop
Printing button and press SELECT.

Alternatively, you can point to the Stop Printing button, press MENU, drag the
pointer to highlight the Selected Print Job item, and release MENU.
NOTE

Troubleshooting

When you stop printing one or more print jobs, the Print Tool remains busy and
does not accept further input until the printer acknowledges the request. Depending on the number ofjobs selected and the status of the printer queue, it may take
a long time (several minutes)for the printer to respond to your request.
If a file has an inappropriate print script in /etc/filetype or • filetype in
your home directory, the Prin~ Tool may hang when you use it to print that file. The
print script may be missing the $FILE, $PRINTER, or $eOp IES variable. See

Chapter 12 for infonnation about how to change print scripts using the Binder.
NOTE

The Print Tool and the File Manager read the filetypejiles when you start the
appUcation. Jfyou make changes to the Binder, you must quit the tool and restart
it/or the changes to take effect.

When you print multiple mail headers by dragging and dropping them onto the
Print Tool icon or window, they are batched together as one print job. Print Tool
starts printing each new mail message at the top of a new page.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 6 -

Print Tool and Tape Tool 147

If you print a file and the appropriate filter is not available on the printer, you will

receive an error mail message.

6.2 Tape Tool

The Tape Tool application provides a user interface to the UNIX tar tape
archiving and retrieval functions. Refer to the man page for tar for more detailed
infolDlation. The Tape Tool is designed to allow you to archive selected files and
directories onto a streaming tape cartridge, and to list and retrieve files from a
streaming tape cartridge that have been archived using the tar command.
Alternatively, you can use Tape Tool to archive individual files to and from one
large archive file instead of to and from a streaming tape cartridge. The Tape Tool
is not intended to be an all-purpose system backup tool, and cannot read tapes that
have been written using the epio command.

The Tape Tool Icon

The Tape Tool icon has an image of a streaming tape cartridge, as shown in
Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7

The Tape Tool icon

tapetool
You can select flies and folders from the File Manager and the Mail Tool to be
archived on tape. You can drag and drop them as a group or individually onto the
Tape Tool icon or onto the open Tape Tool window to accumulate a list of files to
be written to a streaming tape cartridge. When you drop a file or group of files onto
the Tape Tool icon, the tape in the Tape Tool icon moves, as shown in Figure 6-8,
to show you that you have selected files for archiving but have not yet completed
the process.

Figure 6-8

The Tape Tool icon when files are listed/or archiving

[I]
tapetool
The Tape Tool Base Window

You can perfOIDl the following operations from the Tape Tool base window. shown
in Figure 6-9:
o

List the files from a streaming tape cartridge or archive rue that have been
archived using the tar command.

o

Read some or all of the files from the tape or archive file into the directory that
you specify.

o

Write specific files or directories that you specify onto a streaming tape
cartridge or into an archive file.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

148

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

o
Figure 6-9

Display a window from which you set the properties for the tar command
from the Tape Tool Properties window.

The Tape Tool base window
@)
( list.. ) ( Read

Tapetool

v) ( ':'-!rite)

( Props... )

(File To Write:) •

Destination: /home/Jungle/brenda

~
"
.....
't

The control area provides controls for listing, reading to tape, writing from tape,
and setting Tape Tool properties.
The File To Write button and text field allow you to type in the names of files that
you want to write to tape. After typing in the name of a file to write, press the
Return key or click SELECf on the File To Write button. The scrolling list displays
a list of the files you specify by typing file names or by dragging and dropping
icons from the File Manager.
The Destination field allows you to specify where files that are read from the tape
are put in your file system when they were archived without a path name or with a
relative path name. The default destination is your current working directory. You
can change the destination to anywhere you want in the file system by typing the
path name in the Destination text field.

Caution:

If the files on a tape have a complete path (absolute path), the files are always
put in the directory specified on the tape, regardless of what you type in the
Destination field. To strip files of their absolute path name when you archive
them, set the Delete Dir option in the Tape Tool Properties window to All and
click SELECT on the Apply button ..
Each of these functions is described in more detail in the following sections.

The Tape Tool Properties
Window

Before you read to or write from a tape or archive file, it is a good idea to display
the Tape Tool Properties window shown in Figure 6-10, to confino that the
properties you want to use are set correctly.
t

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 6 - Print Tool and Tape Tool 149

Figure 6-10 The Tape Tool Properties window
.~

Tapetool: Pro pertles

Device: /dey/rst§..
Tar Options

Write:

Read:
Delete Dlr:
Other:

I I No sees+ I I Block I/O
Sym links I I Show Errs I I Suppress
No eheck I I Mod Time I I Orig Mode I
No sees

None

I All I Pattern I

Err Exit

I I Exclude I

o

Use the Device text field to identify the tape drive to your system. TIle most
common device numbers for a tape drive are / dev / r st 8 and / dev / r st O.
Alternatively, you can specify a file name in this field if you wish to read or
write files to and from one big archive file instead of to and from a streaming
tape cartridge.

o

Use the Write nonexclusive settings to choose none, some, or all of the write
options listed here:
•

Use No sees to exclude all sees directories.

•

Use No sees+ to exclude all sees directories, files with a suffix
files named errs, core, and a. out.
.

•

Use Block I/O to specify a blocking factor fot better throughput. When
you click SELECf on this setting, a text field is displayed in which you
can type the blocking factor you want Tape Tool to use.

•

Use Sym Links to follow symbolic links as if they were normal files.

•

.0, and

Use Show Errs to display error messages if all links to archived files cannot
be resolved.

•
(]

Use Suppress to suppress infolDlation showing owner and iue modes for
portability.

Use the Read nonexclusive settings to choose none, some, or all of the read
options listed here:
•

Use No eheck to ignore directory checksum errors.

•

Use Mod Time to keep Tape Tool from resetting the modification time of
files that it reads from the tape.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

150

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

•

Use Qrig Mode to restore the named files to their original mode, ignoring
the default umask setting of 2.

a Use the Delete Dir settings to choose whether you want selected files to be
stripped completely of their path names, use complete path names, or use a specific path name. When you click SELECf on Pattern, a text field is displayed
in which you can type the name of a path to use for all the files.

a Use the Other exclusive setting to choose none, one, or both of the following
options for both read and write operations:
•

Use Err Exit to exit the operation as soon as an error is encountered.

•

Use Exclude to specify a file name that contains a list of files and/or directories that you want to exclude from reading from the tape. This item can
be useful when the tape contains many files and you want to retrieve all but
a few of them.

When you have set the options you want, click SELECf on the Apply button to
apply the changes. These options will remain in effect until you quit the Tape Tool
application.

Listing Files from a Tape

To view a list of files from a tape, follow these steps:

1. Insert the tape in the tape drive.
2. Click SELECT on the List button.
A Tape Contents pop-up window displays a list of files from the tape in the
scrolling list, and information messages are displayed in the footer of the Tape
Tool base window, as shown in the example in Figure 6-11.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 6 - Print Tool and Tape Tool 151

Figure 6-11 The Tape Contents pop-up window

.,

Tapetool

g ) [Read V) (write J (Props... )
(File To Write:) ...._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ •
Destin. tlon:
".---

..---...

-

-

643 Item(s) Found

---

Tapetool: Tape Contents/files to Read

( File To Read:) •
I/hole/w1nsorl21open/21artl1st.dOC
Ihole/w1nsorl21open/21openlookl.doc
Iholle/w1nsor/21open/21openlook19.doc
Ihole/w1nsorl21open/21openlookl1.doc
Ihole/w1nsor/21open/21openlook12.doc
Ihole/w1nsorl21open/21openlook13.doc
Ihole/w1nsorl21open/21openlook14.doc
Ihole/winsorl21open/21openlooklS.doc
Ihole!w1nsorI21open/21openlook16.doc
Ihole/w1nsorl21open/21openlook17.doc
Ihole/winsor/21open/21openlook19.doc
Ihole/w1nsor/21open/21openlook2.doc

NOTE

Editing the List of Files in the
Tape Contents Window

-

c!

,

,J

~

,.. .-0:0

-

~

It may takefrom afew seconds to several minutes to list the files on the tape,
depending on how many files are on the tape. While the files are listing, the Tape
Contents window is busy and cannot accept any user input. You can, however,.
press the Stop key on the keyboard to stop the operation.
Once the files are listed, you can retrieve all of the files in the list, retrieve specific
selected files, or edit the list to remove files you do not want to retrieve. This
section describes several ways that you can edit and select from the Tape Contents
scrolling list.
The Tape Contents window has a pop-up menu, shown in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12 Selectedfiles in the Tape Contents window
r.~

Tapetool: Tape Contents/Files to Read

(File To Read:).
21open/21artlist.doc
210pen/21openlookl.doc
21open/21openlooklB.doc
21open/21openlookll.doc
21open/21openlook12.doc
21open/21openlook13.doc
21open/21openlook14.doc
21open/21openlook15.doc
21open/21openlook16.doc
21open/21openlook17.doc
21open/21openlook18.doc
21open/21openlook2.doc

,

Read Functions

"

)
(select All
OeselectAII
Oelete Selected

To select all the files on the tape, choose Select All from the Read Functions popup menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

152

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

To edit the list, select a group of files by clicking SELECT on the name of each file
that you want to delete. Clicking SELECf on a selected file deselects it Selected
files are highlighted, as shown in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Selectedfiles in the Tape Contents window
~cP

Tapetool: Tape Contents/Files to Read

(File To Read:) •
catconvertge nerk
~Iodcanalog.rs

I...

I

d«kdlgltal.rs
clockicon.rs
tlOCkPOP up me nu.rs
lockprops.rs
cmaccess.rs
cmapply.rs

I~

II

I

1t:::J
...I

To remove these files from the list, choose Delete Selected from the Read
Functions pop-up menu. If you want to delete all the flIes from the list, choose
Select All and then Delete Selected from the pop-up menu.
If you inadvertently delete a file that you want to restore, you can add it back to the

list by typing the file name in the File To Read text field, then pressing the Return
key or clicking SELECf on the File To Read button.
When you have edited the scrolling list to your satisfaction, you can choose an
operation from the Read menu described in the next section.
Reading Files from a Tape

The Read menu, shown in Figure 6-14, has three options that you can use to read
files from the tape or archive file to the destination directory specified in the Tape
Tool base window.

Figure 6-14 The Read menu
==-r-- (Props ... )

Caution:

When you read tiles that have a path name in front of them (an absolute
path), as shown in the Tape Contents list, that path name is always used as
the destination.
If the files are not preceded by a file name, the directory you specify in the

Destination text field is used as the destination.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 6 -

Using the Read Selected Item

Print Tool and Tape Tool 153

When you have listed the contents of a tape and selected all or some of the files,
choosing Selected from the Read menu copies the specified files to the destination
directory shown in the control area.
When you have not listed the contents of a tape, choosing Selected displays the
Tape Contents window without a listing. If you know the names of specific files
that you want to retrieve, you can type a name in the File To Read text field, then
press the Return key or click SELECI' on the File To Read button to add them to
the list.

Using the Read Entire List Item

When you have listed the fues from a tape, choosing Entire List from the Read
menu reads the entire list of files from the Tape Contents window.
When you have not listed the contents of a tape, choosing Entire List displays the
Tape Contents window without a listing.
While the files are being read, infonnation messages are displayed in the footer of
the Tape Tool window showing you the percentage of files that have been read. As
the flIes are read, they are removed from the Tape Contents window~ When the
process is complete, an infonnation message is displayed in the footer of the Tape
Tool window telling you how many files were read.
If there are a large number of flIes, it may take several minutes for the files to be
copied to your system.

Using the Read Entire Tape Item

Choosing Entire Tape from the Read menu copies all of the fues on the tape to the
destination directory without displaying the Tape Contents window. -

Writing Files to a Tape

To write files to a tape, first accumulate the list of files you want to archive. You
can specify files in the following ways:
(]

Select files from the File Manager, and drag and drop a copy of those files onto
the Tape Tool.
The files are accumulated in the scrolling list in the Tape Tool base window,
as shown in Figure 6-15.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

154

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 6-15 A list offiles to be written to tape
,..~

,

Tapetool

(List... ) (Read v) (Write ) (props ... )
( File To Write:) •
Destination: Ihome/wlnsor

~

[)/hole/w1nsor/artresule.doc
[)/ha.e/winsor/bird.rs
~/hole/winsor/b1rdsofafeather.rs

~/hoI8/w1nsor/brokenlady.rs

[)/hole/w1nsor/darkpower.rs
[)/hole/w1nsor/dog.rs
~/hole/winsor/doggie.rs

7 Items(s) grabbed

a Alternatively, you can type the name of a directory or of an individual fue in
the File To Write text field and then press the Return key or click SELECf on the File To Write button.
The infonnation is added to the scrolling list.
The Tape Tool scrolling list has a pop-up menu, shown in Figure 6-16, that you
can use to edit the list by deleting all of the files or selected files.
Figure 6-16 The Write Functions pop-up menu

fl2J

Tapetool

.,

(List. .. ) (Read v) (~rl~e ) (Props ... )
(File To Write:) •
Destlna tlon:

....

Write Functions
(Delete selectea)

...-

Delete All
~

~

'-

•

_-___ I

To write the list of files to the tape, follow these steps:

1. Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Properties
window and confirm that you have the correct options set.
It is a good idea to check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you write
files to a tape, since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start it
up again.

2. Check the tape to be sure that it is not write-protected.
3. Insert the tape in the tape drive.
4. Click SELECT on the Write button.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 6 - Print Tool and Tape Tool 155

Troubleshooting

H you receive a checksum error when reading fues from a tar tape, there may be
a mismatch between the block size on the tape and the block size you specify.
To correct the block size, choose Block 110 from the Tape Tool Properties
window. In the text field that appears, type the correct block size (the one from the
tape).
If you reUieve files from a tape and they are not copied to the destination directory
you specify, list the contents of the tape to see if the file names are preceded by an

absolute path name. When you retrieve files that have an absolute path name~ that
path is used as the destination directory.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

156

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 June 1990

7
•

' . ' ,"w

•

•

••••

0"

.".

'."

o.

.....

. : •••• : . -

•••

'.'~ ·.I'N••• ~·_:••J'....~•

.I'

••: ••••• ,;:,. ,;;....

: -• •

.-..

•

-

• • • • • • • ,;;

-0':

-:

;tJ'-"._:-.-

-° 0 -............ ::..:.::.-•••••••••"~.'••' •••

.I'

Snapshot
The DeskSet Environment provides an application called Snapshot that you can
use to take black and white or grayscale and color snapshots of regions, windows,
or the entire screen. The snapshots are created and stored as raster files.
This chapter describes how to use the Snapshot application.
When you use Snapshot on a black and white monitor, the snapshots created are
always black and white. When you take snapshots on a color monitor, the
snapshots are usually in color. If you have a color monitor but you are running
OpenWindows in black and white (in the overlay plane only), the snapshots created
are black and white. Some applications can handle black and white snapshots but
cannot handle grayscale or color snapshots. See "Troubleshooting" later in this
chapter for infonnation about how to determine whether a snapshot is black and
white or color. See the OpenWindows Installation and Stan-Up Guide for
infonnation about how to run OpenWindows in black and white on a color monitor.

7.1 The Snapshot Icon

The Snapshot icon is an image of a camera, as shown in Figure 7-L

and Base Window
Figure 7-1

The Snapshot icon

trW

The Snapshot base window, shown in Figure 7-2, contains all the controls you need
to take snapshots.·

157

Revision A of 11 June 1990

158

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 7-2

The Snapshot base window
@)

Snapshot - directory:/home/junglelbrenda
Directory: Ihome/Jungle/brend,

'

File: snapshotrs
Timer:

UD 2 14 Ie I '6 I seconds
I Tim.;-!" E:ell I

( Snap Window)

(Snap Region)

(View Snap)
'L.

7.2 Locating and
Naming Snapshot
Files

I Hide Snapshot During capture I
( Snap Saeen)

(Print Snap v)
.J

When you start it, the Snapshot application uses your current woddng directory
(typically the home directory) and a file named snapshot. rs as the default for
the Directory and File text fields.
You can put your Snapshot flIes anywhere you want in your file system. Type the
path of the directory in the Directory field and the file name in the File text field.
It is a good idea to use . r s or some other common suffix for raster file names to
make it easier for you to manage them as a group.

7.3 Setting the Timer

Snapshot has a timer that you can use to set the time period between when you
initiate the snapshot and when it is taken. The timer is especially useful if you are
taking snapshots of menus that you must display after you start the snapshot, or if
you want to be sure the pointer is at a specific location when the snapshot is taken.
When the timer is set to 0 seconds, the snapshot i~ taken immediately ~ Wh~n the
timer is set from 2 to 16 seconds, the Timer Bell setting is activated. When the
Timer Bell setting is on, a bell beeps once each second between when you initiate
the snapshot and when it is taken, followed by four quick successive bells when the
snapshot is taken.
Click SELECT on the Timer setting that you want, and click SELECT on the Timer
Bell setting to toggle it from off to on, or vice versa.

7.4 Hiding Snapshot
During Capture

Sometimes you may want to take a snapshot of a large portion of the screen or of
the entire workspace without showing the Snapshot window. In such cases, click
SELECT on the Hide Snapshot During Capture setting to remove the Snapshot
window from the screen while the snapshot is in progress.
When the Hide Snapshot During Capture setting is toggled on, Snapshot
automatically adjusts the Timer setting to eight seconds. This is to guarantee that
there will be enough time to remove the Snapshot window before the snapshot is
taken. Remember to reset the Timer setting after you toggle the Hide Snapshot
During Capture setting back off.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 7 - Snapshot 159

7.s Snapshot Buttons

Snapshot provides you with three buttons for creating snapshots:
(]

Snap Window

(] Snap Region
(] Snap Screen
This section describes how to use each of these buttons.
Snapping a Window

You can take snapshots of windows and icons following these steps:
1. Make sure the window or icon you want to snap is completely visible and
is not partially obscured by overlapping windows unless you want to
include them in the snapshot.
2. Type the name of the directory and the file name you want to use for the
snapshot in the text fields at the top of the Snapshot base window.
3. Set the timer and timer bell if you want to use them.
4. If you want to hide Snapshot during the capture operation, click SELECT
on that setting.
S. Click SELECT on the Snap Window button.
If the file name you have specified already exists in that directory, a Notice is

displayed asking for confinnation that you want to overwrite the file.
The Snap Window button displays the standard busy pattern and an
infonnation message is displayed in the footer.
6. Move the pointer into the header of the window you want to snap and click
SELECT to start the snapshot. To cancel the operation, click either the
ADJUST or MENU mouse buttons.

When the pointer is in the header of the window, the entire window is snapped~
including the header. When the pointer is in a pane of a window, only that pane
is snapped.
When the snapshot is complete, an infonnation message is displayed in the
footer of the Snaps~ot window telling you that the Snap succeeded. Figure
7-3 shows an example of an infonnation message in the footer.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

160

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 7-3

The Snapshot information message
(!)

Snapshot - dlrectorv:/home/Jungle/brenda
Directory: /home/Jungle/brenda
File: sampfesnap.,..

Timer:

14 1a 116 I seconds
I Timor'· E:eil I I Hide Snapshot During Capture I
10) 2

(Snap Window)

(Snap Region)

(View Snap)

(Snap Saeen)

(Print Snap v)

Snap succeeded.

NOTE

When you have the timer set, and are taking snapshots of windows or icons,
Snapshot records the window position when the snap is initiated. If you move the
window before the snapshot is completed, you may not get all of the information
you wanted in the snapshot.
You can view the snapshot in a pop-up window by clicking SELECT on the View
Snap button. See "Viewing a Snapshot" later in this chapter for more infonnation.

Snapping a Region

You can take snapshots of any rectangular area that you specify using the
Snap Region button. The following example shows how to take a snapshot of the
pop-up menu for the Command Tool pane.
1. Open a Command Tool window.

2. Type the path of the directory and the file name you want to use for the
snapshot in the text fields at the top of the Snapshot base window.
3. Set the timer to four seconds (or longer), and turn the timer bell on.
4. Decide where in the Command Tool window you want to put the menu.
Display the menu to determine how large a region you need to define.
S. Click SELECT on the Snap Region button.

The Snap Region button displays the standard busy pattern and an infonnation
message is displayed in the footer.
6. Move the pointer into the Command Tool window and·click SELECT to
define one corner of the region. Move the pointer and c1~ck SELECT
again to define a rectangular region.

A bounding box is displayed. You can adjust the size of the bounding box by
moving the pointer and clicking SELECf at a different place.
7. When the region is defined, click ADJUST to start the timer.
8. Move the pointer into the region and press MENU to display the
Command Tool pane pop-up menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter' -Snapshot 161

9. When the timer stops, and the information message is displayed, the
snapshot is complete.
Snapping the Screen

You can take snapshots of the entire screen following these steps:
1. Make sure the screen is set up in the configuration you want.
2. Type the path of the directory and the file name you want to use for the
snapshot in the text fields at the top of the Snapshot base window.
3. Click SELECT on Hide Snapshot During Capture unless you want the
Snapshot window as part of the screen shot.
4. Set the timer and timer bell if you want to use them.
S. Click SELECT on the Snap Screen button.
If you set the Hide Snapshot During Capture setting, the Snapshot window is

removed from the display and is redisplayed when the snapshot is complete.

7.6 Viewing a Snapshot

You can view any snapshot file at any time by typing the directory and the name
of the file in the text fields and clicking SELECT on the View Snap button.
A pop-up window is displayed, as shown in the ex~ple in Figure 7-4, showing the
contents of the snapshot file.

Figure 7-4

The View pop-up window

In addition, you can view a raster file by dragging the rue from the FlleManager
application and dropping it onto the View window or the Snapshot base window.
The raster file will then be displayed in the View pop-up window.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

162

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

You can view grayscale or color snapshots on a black and white monitor. Snapshot
automatically converts a copy of the grayscale or color image to black and white
so that it can display the file in the View Snap pop-up window. The file itself is
not changed.
You can only view one snapshot at a time. When the View window is displayed,
and you type a new snapshot file name in the text field and click SELECf on the
View Snap button, the View window is reused and automatically resizes to match
the size of the second snapshot file.

7.7 Printing a Snapshot

Figure 7-5

You can print your snapshot files by clicking SELECf on the Print Snap button. If
the default settings in the Print Options window are incorrect for your system, you
can change them by choosing Print Options from the Print Snap menu to display a
pop-up window, shown in Figure 7-5, that allows you to change your printer
settings for Snapshot
The Print Options pop-up window
Snapshot: Print Options

cP

I Printer I File I

Destination:

Printer: IWe

I Upright I Sideways I

Orientation:

Position: 0.25

- - Inches from left.
0.25 Inches from bottom
-

!.- Inches I Scale I Size I

Width:

I No I Ves I

Double Size:

(Print)

You can designate whether a snapshot is sent to a printer or to a file. When the
Destination option is set to Printer, use the Printer text field to specify which printer
you want to use.
When the Destination option is set to File, the text fields change to Directory and
File, as shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6

The print to file text fields
CP

Snapshot: Print Options

Destination:

I Printer I File I

Directory: _ _ _ _ _ __
File: ..._ _ _ _ __

--

.'-~--------------

Choose the orientation of the printed image on the page by clicking SELECT on
Upright to print a portrait image, or Sideways to print a landscape image.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 7 -Snapshot 163

You can change the margins for the printed image from 1/4 inch at the left and
bottom by typing new values in the Positions text fields.
You can specify the width of the printed image on the page by choosing Scale and
typing a value, either whole number or decimal, in the Width text field. The image
is automatically scaled proportionate to the width you select
When you click SELECT on Size, a Height text field is displayed, as shown in
Figure 7-7, allowing you to specify an absolute width and height for the image to
fit into.
Figure 7-7

The Size textfields

~:prl.tOPtl5d
Width: ~ Inches
Height:

~

Double Size: ( No

I Scale I Size I

Inches

I Yes I
(Print)

You can specify whether the file is printed in the size you specify, or whether it is
doubled in size by clicking SELECT on the Double Size option.
CliCking SELECf on the Print button prints the file that is specified in the File field
of the Snapshot base window.
Once you change the settings in the Print Options window, they are automatically
recorded and used each time you click SELECf on the Print Snap button of the
Snapshot window.

7.8 Troubleshooting

If the screen pointer does not show up in your snapshots, yoti are probably using

the Snapshot application on a color workstation with a cgsix framebuffer. The only
way to get the pointer to appear in your snapshots is to run Snapshot on a
workstation with a different kind of framebuffer. To find out if a workstation is
using a cgsix framebuffer, follow these steps:

1. Start up a Command Tool or Shell Tool.
2. At the system prompt, type / etc/ dmesg I grep cgsix
3. Press Return.
If the system replies with any messages containing the string "cgsix", you are

using a cgsix frame buffer, so the screen pointer will not appear in your snapshots.
If the system just returns another prompt, you are not using a cgsix frame buffer,

so the screen pointer will appear in your snapshots.
If you experience difficulty in using Snapshot files with other applications, it may
be because you are trying to incorporate a snapshot from a grayscale or color

monitor into an application that can only handle black and white images.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

164

DeskSetEnvironment Reference Guide

Raster files have three dimensions: height, width, and depth. Black and white
raster files are 1 bit deep. Grayscale and color raster flIes are 8 bits deep.
You can see if a raster file is I bit or 8 bits by typing file rasterfilename
and pressing Return from a Shell Tool or Command Tool prompt, or by selecting
the file from the File Manager and displaying the File Properties window. In the
example shown in Figure 7-8, the listing shows the file properties for all files
ending in • r s. As you can see from the listing, there is one 8-bit raster file

(snapshotrs) and the rest are I-bit files.

Figure 7-8

An example of a file command listing
42]castle{winsor S file -.rs
cmdtoolmenu.rs: rasterfile, 8K8Kl standard format image
samplesnap.rs: rasterfile, 114K285Kl standard format iMage
snapshot.rs:
rasterfile, 258K287K8 standard fOrMat 1.age
s.pr1ntmenu.rs: rasterfile, 463K126Kl standard format iMage
ssprinbaJindow.rs:
rasterfile, 293K322K1 standard forMat image
•••napmsg.rs:
rasterfile, 461K236Kl standard format image
sswindow.rs:
rasterfile, 461K236Kl standard format image
[43]castle{w1nsor}S +

You can convert 8-bit images to I-bit images using the rasfilter8tol
command. To convert a flle, type the following, then press Return:
rasfilter8tol inputfilename outputfilename

For example, to convert snapshot. rs from a color image to a black and white
image called convertedsnapshot . rs, type the following, then press Return:
rasfilter8tol snapshot.rs convertedsnapshot.rs

Revision A of 11 June 1990

8
. 0"' ." .. '.~..'. V,"' ..: ...... ." 0"..

.

."

0"':...:..... .:. :-:-1-.• :-:-:::.- ••..:.........:-••• ," '.": -...:. : .... ::X< ):. _,:';'. . '~"':"::"::" . . ' :••:=:....:,.:....:?:';. .•:::-' :".1'1/' .":"•.~-";', ..•~...........:•••••-:.••.••. " ••V ....

Shell Tool, Command Tool, and
Console
This chapter provides infonnation about the Shell Tool, Command Tool, and
Console. Shell Tool and Command Tool are standard Open Windows shells, or
command intetpreters. The Console is a special Command Tool designated for
displaying error and system messages sent by the SunOS operating system,
OpenWindows, and some applications. The Shell Tool and Command Tool are
essentially the same application, but with different default pane pop-up menus.

8.1 Shell Tool

Shell Tool is a command intetpreter that accepts SunOS commands and can be
used for shells or other programs that employ a standard teletype (tty) interface.
Figure 8-1 shows the Shell Tool icon and an open Shell Tool window.
Figure 8-1

A Shell Tool icon and base window

IW"I
n.n

(u~=c==cuc:c:c== ")

Ibin/csh

'.
~

shelltool -./bin/csh

J

A Shell Tool window has a header with a Window menu button, a Window menu,
resize comers, and a teJDlinal emulator pane. A Shell Tool window does not have
a scrollbar at start-up, but you can enable scrolling if desired. The insert point is
shown by a block cursor. When the insert point is not in the Shell Tool, the block
cursor is displayed as an outline of the block cursor. Editing is limited to the
current line. For example, you can only delete characters on the current line. Once
you press the Return key, the characters on the line are interpreted as a command.

165

Revision A of 11 June 1990

166

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

The Shell Tool Pop-up Menu

Figure 8-2

The Shell Tool tenninal emulator pane has a pop-up menu, shown in Figure 8-2.

The Shell Tool Term Pane pop-up menu
Term Pane
(Enable Page Mode)
Copy

Paste
Enable Saolling

Use the Enable Page Mode item to show you only one page or pane of text at a
time, just as the Unix mo re command does.
When you choose Enable Page Mode the pointer changes to a stop sign when the
window fills up, as shown in Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3

The Shell Tool pop-up menu
shelltool-/bin/c:sh

2 winsor
2 winsor
2 winsor
3 winsor
2 winsor
2 winsor
2 winsor
2 winsor
2 winsor

!

512
2569
15369
512
6656
1924
512
3564
1924

Feb
Feb
Feb
Jan
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb
Feb

11
11
28
29
11
11
6
11
11

15:19
15:18
11:46
89:47
15:17
15:18
89:54
15:18
15:18

8inder
Calendar
Oeskset
EKamples
Filemgr
Gett1ngstarted
Installation
Ma11tool
Printtool

Instead of continuing to flow the lines through the window, the display stops so that
you can look at it as long as you like. In addition, the Enable Page Mode item on
the Term Pane pop-up menu changes to Continue when there is more infonnation
that you can display.
When you want to see the next pane, press any key to display it You can also
choose Continue from the pop-up menu to display the next pane of infonnation.
When there is no more data to display, the first item of the Tenn Pane pop-up menu
changes to Disable Page Mode. You can choose Disable Page Mode from the popup menu to switch out of page mode.
Use the Copy item to copy highlighted text from the Shell Tool window to the
clipboard.
When there is text on the clipboard, you can use the Paste item to insert the
contents of the clipboard" at the insert point
The Enable Scrolling item can be used to tum the Shell Tool into a Command Tool.
When you choose Enable Scrolling, the name stripe at the top of the Shell Tool still
says "she11tool", but the application acts like a Command Tool. See the next
section for details about the Command Tool.

Revision A of 11 Jooe 1990

Chapter 8 - Shell Tool. Command Tool, and Console 167

8.2 Command Tool

Figure 8-4

Command Tool is an enhanced Shell Tool. It provides a scrolling pane that acts as
an editable command interpreter and can also provide a standard text editing pane.
The Command Tool icon looks the same as the Shell Tool icon shown in
Figure 8-1. Figure 8-4 shows an open Command Tool window.
A Command Tool base window

r 121

emdtool - Ibin/csh

.,

[26]castle{winsor}l.

A Command Tool window has a header with a Window menu button, a Window

menu, resize comers, a scrollbar, and. a text/te~inal emulator pane.
The Command Tool

The Command Tool Term Pane pop-up menu has the Edit, Fmd, and Extras items
of the standard text editing pop-up menu (described in Chapter 5), plus three
additional items: the History, File Editor, and Scrolling submenus. Figure 8-5
shows the Tenn Pane pop-up menu.

Pop~upMenu

Figure 8-5

The Command Tool Term Pane pop-up menu
cmdtool-/bin/csh

Term Pane
(History

The History Submenu

~)

Edit

~

Find

~

Extras

~

File Editor
Scrolling

~
~

The History of a Command Tool is a log of all the commands typed in that
Command Tool. You can access this log by scrolling the Term Pane with the
scrollbars or by saving the log to a file. This may be useful, for example, if you
have performed a complicated sequence ofoperations that you want to save or send
as part of a mail message for troubleshooting or debugging. The History submenu,
displayed in Figure 8-6, provides options to modify the history log.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

168

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 8-6

The Term Pane History submenu
I

cmdtool -/bln/csh

Term Pane ~
Edit
find
Extras

~

File Editor

~

Scrolling

c>

I Editable
1

Read Only ~

Store log as new fIl8,"=;::=::1
Clear log
I

The Mode setting determines whether the history log is Editable within the
'Command Tool, or Read Only. If you set the mode to Read Only, in order to
protect against accidental changes, you can still save the log to ~ file and edit that
file using the File Editor option described below. If the mode is editable, you can
edit text anywhere in the Term Pane and use the editing items on the Term Pane
pop-up menu. See Chapter 5, &'Text Editor", for information on the editing
functions.
Use the Store log as new file option to save the current history log to a file. When
you choose this option, the Text: Store pop-up window, shown in Figure 8-7, is
displayed.
Figure 8-7

The Text: Store pop-up window
.~

Text:Store

Directory. Ihome/jungle/brend,.
File: __- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

(store as Hew Fuel
Type the directory and name of the file you want to save the history in, and click
SELECf on the Store as New File button. You can treat this new file as you would
any other text rue. You can edit it and save it again or drag and drop it from the
File Manager onto a, Mail Tool Compose or Text Editor window.
Use the Clear log option to clear the current history log. This resets the Command
Tool history log as if you just started the Command Tool application. (Ibis does
not change the output of the UNIX history command).
The Flle Editor Submenu

The choice from the File Editor submenu determines whether a Text Editor Pane
is displayed. When you enable the File Editor, the Command Tool is split into two
panes: a Command Tool pane and a Text Editor pane, described in Chapter 5.
Figure 8-8 shows a Command Tool with the File Editor enabled.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 8 - Shell Tool. Command Tool. and Console 169

Figure 8-8

The Command Tool with the File Editor

-.

r(!)

,

cmdtool -/blnlcsh

=

--.•
.,

~ (view

v)

(Edit

v)

(Find

v)

~

•

..."

The Scrolling Submenu

The choice from the Scrolling submenu of the Command Tool Tenn Pane pop-up
menu detennines whether a scrollbar is displayed. When you disable scrolling, the
Command Tool acts like a Shell Tool.

8.3 Console

The Console is a special Command Tool that is used to display error and system
messages for the SunOS operating system, Open Windows, and some applications.
Figure 8-9 shows the Console icon and base window.
Figure 8-9

The Console icon and base window
r &l
cmdtool

-

( Uctccu::c:necc:>

CONSOLE

8.4 Troubleshooting

(CONSOLE) - Ibln/csh

Jan 2 11:59:44 castle su: winsor on
/dev/ttypl
NFS server hammer not responding still
trying
NFS server hammer ok

,

,~

Always have one (and only one) Console window running. If you do not have a
Console windowt messages are displayed in large type at the bottom of the screen.
To clear such messages, choose the Redisplay All utility from the WoJkspace
menu. If you have more than one Console window running, messages are
displayed in the most recently opened Console window. You may miss important
system messages if you have more than one Console window running and do not
look for messages in the newest one or if you have opened a new Console window
and then quit the most recently opened one.

Revision A of 11 J\D1e 1990

170

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 June 1990

9
Clock and Performance Meter
TIlis chapter provides information about the Clock and Perfonnance Meter.

9.1

Clock

Clock is a tool that displays an analog clock face icon showing the current time of
day. The icon displays a clock, as shown in the example in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1

The Clock icon
•

•
+.

+

•

•

~.

· t "'...

When you open the Clock icon, the clock is displayed in the pane of a base window,
as shown in Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2

The Clock base window
@)

..

May13

•

•

•

•

~.

•
•
•

•

The Clock base window has a header and resize comers. You can use the resize
comers to change the area of the window, making the clock larger or sma1l~r.
Customizing the Clock

You can customize the Clock using the settings in the Clock Properties window.
To display the Properties window, move the pointer onto the clock pane and press
the Properties key on the keyboard. Alternatively, you can press MENU to display
the Clock pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 9-3.

171

Revision A of 11 June 1990

172

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 9-3

The Clock pop-up menu
I

Mav13

l!J

•

I

Clock

. I

" PropertIes)

•

·.A

•
•
•

• • •

Choosing Properties from the pop-up menu displays the Oock Properties window,
as shown in Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-4

The Clock Properties window
.~

Clock Properties

Clock face:

I digital I analog I

Oispla y Options:

I Seconds I I Date I

(APply) (Reset) (Defaults)

Choosing digital and clicking SELECf on the Apply button changes the display in
the base window to a digital clock, as shown in Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5

A digital clock display
@)

May 13

The icon always displays an analog clock, regardless of the Clock Face property
setting.
Choosing Seconds displays seconds on the icon and on the analog and digital clock
faces.
Choosing Date displays the date in the header of the Clock base window but does
not affect the icon display.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 9 - Clock and Perfonnance Meter 173

9.2 Performance Meter

The Performance Meter allows you to monitor many aspects of system
perfoimance, such as processor performance, network performance, and I/O
perfonnance.
. You can run one or a combination of several Performance Meters at the same time.
Each Performance Meter has its own icon that displays a speedometer-like gauge.
The needles move as systems conditions change. The short needle, or "hour hand,"
tracks average perfonnance over a 20-second interval, and the long one, or
"second hand:' tracks current performance over a 2-second interval. The display
is updated every two seconds. You can change these default times from the
Perfonnance Meter Properties window described later in this chapter.
The performance option being measured is displayed in the lower left comer of the
icon and its maximum value is shown in the lower right comer. Figure 9-6 shows
an example of the Percent CPU Used Performance Meter icon.

Figure 9-6

The Percent CPU Used Performance Meter icon

cpu

lee

When you open a Perfonnance Meter icon, a window that is the same size as the
icon is displayed. Perfonnance data is displayed as a strip chart. Figure 9-7 shows
an example of the Percent CPU Used Perfonnance Meter base window.
Figure 9-7

The Percent CPU Used Performance Meter base window

~
lee
cpu

The window has resize comers that you can use to change the area of the window.
A resized Perfonnance Meter window is shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8

A resized Performance Meter base window

CIIU

The Performance Meter
Pop-up Menu

You can change the performance value to be monitored from any Perfonnance
Meter base window by choosing a different item from the pop-up menu shown in
Figure 9-9.

Revision A of 11 Jtme 1990

174

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 9-9

The Performance Meter pop-up menu
Performance Meter
(Show cpu
Show packets

~

Show page
Show swap
Show Interrupts

c

Show disk
Show context
Show load
Show colis

i ••

Show errs
Properties ...

Here are the perfonnance values you can display and a description of their
functions:
o

Choose Show cpu to monitor the percent of CPU being used.

o

Choose Show packets to monitor the number of Ethernet packets per second.

o Choose Show page to monitor the paging activity in pages per second.
o Choose Show swap to monitor the nwnber of jobs swapped per second.

Customizing Performance
Meters

o

Choose Show interrupts to monitor the number of job interrupts per second.

o

Choose Show disk to monitor disk traffic in transfers per second.

o

Choose Show context to monitor the number of context switches per second.

o

Choose Show load to monitor the average number of runnable processes over
the last minute.

o

Choose Show colls to monitor the number of collisions per second detected on
the Ethernet.

o

Choose Show errs to monitor the number of errors per second on receiving
packets.

You can customize some aspects of the Perfonnance Meter from the Properties
window shown in Figure 9-10.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

· Chapter 9 - Clock and Perfonnance Meter 175

Figure 9-10 The Performance Meter Properties window
.~

Perfmeter: Properties
Monitor:

Machine:

I cpu

I packets

I page

I swap

I Interrupts J

l~d~~~k--~I~(-on-te-K-t~I~'~~d---+I-~~"~s---+1-8rr-s--~1

I local I remote I MathlftP .. amp:

Sample time: ~

'.1••

_ _ _ __

seconds

Hour hand: ~ '.1 •• seconds
Second hand: _2_1.1 •• seconds

Choosing one of the Monitor settings and clicking SELECf on the Apply button
does the same thing as choosing one of the items from the Perfomlance Meter popup menu described in the previous section.
You can monitor perfonnance for your own system or for another system on the
network. To monitor a remote system, follow these steps:
1. Click SELECT on Remote.

The Machine name text field is activated.
2. Click SELECT in the text field to set the insert point and type the name of
the machine you want to monitor.

3. Click SELECT on the Apply button.
The Perfonnance Meter displays the name of the remote system at the bottom
of the pane under the name of the value you are monitoring.
To change back to your local system, click SELECf on Local,· then click SELECf
on the Apply button.
You can change the Sample Time, the frequency that the meters are updated, and
the units measured by the Hour Hand and Second Hand on the icon scale. The
default is for the hour hand to show a sample over a 20-second interval and the
minute hand the average over a 2-second interval. If you change the values in these
fields, remember to click SELEcr on the Apply button to record the changes.

9.3 Troubleshooting

Displaying seconds for the clock may affect system perfomlance.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

176

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 June 1990

10
",

•..•.......

.

..

0"..

. . :::.<.: ..... :.....:.•..

Calculator
The DeskSet Calculator is a scientific and financial calculator designed to perfonn
a variety of mathematical functions. It operates in much the same way as many
hand-held calculators. There are financial, logical, and scientific modes. You can
store numbers in ten different memory registers and retrieve and replace them
easily. In addition, you can store up to 10 of your own functions and constants in
menus.
The DeskSet Calculator initially displays numbers in fixed point notation and in
decimal base. You can also display numbers in engineering or scientific notation.
You can change the base of operation from decimal to binary, octal, or .
hexadecimal.
This chapter describes how to use the Calculator.

10.1 The Calculator Icon
and Base Window

The Calculator icon and base window are shown in Figure 10-1. The Calculator
base window does not have resize comers or a control area, since the buttons of the
calculator are the controls that activate its functions. The base window has six
rows of eight buttons. Qick SELECT on a button to activate it. Buttons that have
a menu mark have pulldown menus associated with them. }>ress MENU to display
the menu, highlight the item you want, and release MENU.

Figure 10-1 The Calculator icon and base window
7 8 9)<
4 5 6 I

(!)

calculator

0.00

1 2 3 -

e . =+
calculator

IIEX

la

FIX

DEC

IASIC

D

E

F

elr

Int

Frat

A

B

C

Bsp

Abs

Chs

Keys

ft)de V

7

8

9

X

1/x

xA2

Ace V

Me ••••

4

5

6

I

%

Sqrt

Con V

Fun V

1

2

3

-

(

)

Rcl v

Stov

+

Exp

Ase •••

Exchv

()Jit

-

0

177

Base V DispV

•

Revision Aof 11 June 1990

178

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

10.2 Performing Simple
Calculations

To perfonn a numerical operation, such as adding two numbers together, follow
these steps:
1. Click SELECT on the first digit, for example, 7.

The number is entered in the display at the upper right comer of the Calculator.
In Figure 10-1 the number 0.00 is displayed in the numeric display area.
2. Click SELECT on the operation you want to perform, for example, +, to
add a ~umber.
3. Click SELECT on the number you want to add to the first number, for
example, 6.

The number 6 is displayed in the numeric display area.
4. Click SELECT on the = sign.

The reSUlt, 13 in this example, is displayed in the numeric display area.
Alternatively, you can use the keyboard to enter numbers and simple arithmetic
functions. You can also use the Copy function key to store the numeric display to
the clipboard, and the Paste function key to retrieve the contents of the clipboard.
If an operation needing more than one input is partially complete, the pending

operation is displayed on the line beneath the current number as a reminder.
An important thing to remember about the Calculator is that calculations are
perfonned from left to right, with no arithmetic precedence. If you need arithmetic
precedence, then you should use parentheses. For example, the calculatio~:

2+3*4=
as perfonned by the DeskSet Calculator gives a result of 20. The same equation
perfonned with correct arithmetic precedence would give a result of 14. This can
be achieved with the Calculator by using parentheses:

2+(3*4)=

10.3 Modes of Operation

The Calculator has various modes of operation. The area below the header displays
the current number, followed by a mode line that shows what the current mode
settings are.

Numeric Bases

You can set the following numeric bases using the Base key pop-.up menu, as
shown in Figure 10-2:
a

Binary

a

Octal

(]

Decimal

a

Hexadecimal

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 10 - Calculator 179

Figure 10-2 The Numeric base pop-up menu

Int

Frae

AIls

Chs

The current base 'setting is indicated as the first item in the mode line. In
Figure 10-2, "DEC" indicates Decimal base.
Up to 40 digits can be entered for eadl number, regardless of the base, but internal
accuracy may be lost for large numbers.
The numeric keypad changes to display only those numbers appropriate to the base
mode that you choose. Inappropriate numbers are dimmed out. For example, in
Figure 10-2 above the hexadecimal letter keys (A-F) are dimmed. TIle numeric
base in that figure is decimal, so the hexadecimal letters are not valid or accessible.
Choosing Binary displays the digits 0 and 1 on the numeric keypad. Choosing
Octal displays the digits 0 through 7. Choosing Decimal displays the digits 0
through 9. Choosing Hexadecimal displays the digits 0 through 9 and also
activates the alphabetic keys at the top of the n~eric keypad.
Figure 10-3 shows the keypads for both Binary and Hexadecimal numeric bases.
Figure 10-3 The Binary keypad and the Hexadecimal keypad
(!)

/
HEX

••
Display Notation

FIX

DEC

0

E

F

A

8

C

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

0

I

-

.I

You can choose to display Calculator results in one of the following notations by
using the Disp key pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 10-4:

o Fixed point notation
o

Engineering notation

o

Scientific notation

Revision A of 11 J\Ule 1990

180

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 10-4 The Display type pop-up menu/or display notation mode

I

calculator

l!J

II

o. \.
1>£<:

HEX

FIX

Display type

B"SIC

D

E

F

elr

Int

Frae

A

B

C

asp

Pbs

Chs

Engineering

t Wg•...••

Base V Disp

SCientific

Keys

ttlde

...
The current display notation is displayed as the third item in the mode line. In
Figure 10-4 above. the mode line shows "FIX", indicating Fixed Point notation.
When the current display notation is Engineering, &CENG" appears on the mode
line. When the current notation is Scientific, "san is displayed.
When the current notation is Fixed Point, the Calculator will revert to Scientific
notation if a number is larger than the display will allow.

Major Calculator Modes

There are four major Calculator modes that detennine the available functions:
LJ

Basic

LJ

Financial

LJ

Logical

LJ

Scientific

You can choose these four modes using the Mode key pop-up menu shown in
Figure 10-5. The default mode is Basic mode, which uses the standard keys on
the Calculator base window. The other three modes have extra buttons that appear
on a pop-up window. For infonnation on these modes, see "Financial Functions",
"Logical Functions", and "Scientific Functions" later in this chapter.
Figure 10-5 The Mode pop-up menu

l!.I

Calculator

O.OOe+O
HEX

SCI

DEC

B"SIC

0

E

F

C1 r

Int

Frae

A

B

C

Dsp

Abs

Chs

Keys

Mode

7

8

9

X

1/x

xA2

Ace v

Mel.

4

5

6

/

Sqrt

Con V

Fun

,

.,

,

Base V Dlsp

~ Mode

"hi

mandai
logical

Scientific

The current major mode is displayed on the mode line underneath and slightly to
t

(-

'"

Rd V

..stgV

the left of the number display. In Figure 10-5 above, "BASIC" is listed as the
current mode.

Revision A of 11 J\Ule 1990

Chapter 10 - Calculator 181

Number Manipulation
Functions

The Calculator has twelve number manipulation functions, as shown in
Figure 10-6.

Figure 10-6 Number Manipulation /unctions

\

calculator

\

O.OOe+O
'.SIC

\

l

Int

Frac

Abs

Chs

1bc

)(A2

,

Sqrt

(

)

E)(p

Asc •••

•

(]

Use Int to return the integer portion of the currently displayed value.

(]

Use Frac to return the fractional portion of the currently displayed value.

CJ

Use Abs to return the absolute value of the currently displayed value.

CJ

Use Chs to change the arithmetic sign of the currently displayed value, or of an
exponent being entered with the Exp key.

CJ

Use 1Ix to return the value of I divided by the currently displayed value.

CJ

Use x"2 to return the square of the currently displayed value.

(]

Use % to calculate the percentage of the currently displayed value specified by
the next value entered. For example, to find out what 75% of 40 is, enter 40,
.click SELECf on %, enter 75, then click SELECf on =. The Calculator
returns the result 30.

CJ

Use Sqrt to return the square root of the currently displayed value.

CJ

Use ( and ) to give a calculation arithmetic precedence. All calculations
within parentheses are calculated first Parentheses can be nested. The result
of an operation containing parentheses is not perfonned until the last
parenthesis is matched.

CJ

Use Exp to start exponential input Any number entered after you choose Exp
is taken to be the exponent portion of this number. The numbers entered before
the Exp key are taken to be the mantissa If no numerical input has occurred
when the Exp key is entered, a mantissa of 1.0 is assumed. You can use the
Cbs key after entering the exponent to change its arithmetic sign.

CJ

Use Asc to display the ASCn value of a character in the appropriate numeric
base. The Asc key displays its own small pop-up window.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

182

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

10.4 Miscellaneous
Functions

The Calculator has five miscellaneous functions, shown in
Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7 Miscellaneous/unctions
0.00

CJ

Use Clear (Clr) to clear the current value from the display.

CJ

Use Backspace (Bsp) to remove the rightmost character from the current
display and recalculate its value. Note that internal accuracy is lost with this
operation.

CJ

Use Keys to change the display of the Calculator keys to show the keyboard
equivalents of each Calculator key for mouseless operation of the Calculator.
Everything that can be done by clicking SELECf can also be done using the
equivalent keyboard commands. Keys that have pop-up menus associated with
them require two keyboard commands: the first to select the command, and
the second to select the appropriate entry. When the pop-up menu contains
numerical values, the numbers 0 through 9 can be used. For the logical shift
pop-up menu, use the letters a through f for the numberS 10 through IS: Use
the first letter in lower case of all other menu items.
See the Calculator man pages included in Appendix C for more infoImation
about the keyboard mapping.

a Use Accuracy (Acc) to choose the number of digits of precision used in the
calculator display. This key has a pop-up menu associated with it, which lets
you specify 0 through 9 radix places. The default value is 2 radix places.

a Use Quit to quit the Calculator..

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 10 - Calculator 183

10.5 Memory Registers

The Calculator has 10 memory registers that you can access using the keys shown
in Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8 Memory Register functions

\

\

0.00
BASIC

file ••••
~

Rd v

\

\

Stov

E)(chv

o

Use Memory (Mem ...) to display a pop-up window showing the values of the
ten memory registers in the current base to the current accuracy.

o

Use Store (S1o) to store the current value in the memory register number that
you choose from the Store pop-up menu.

o

Use Recall (Rcl) to retrieve a value from the memory register number that you
choose from the Recall pop-up menu.

o

Use Register Exchange (Exch) to exchange the contents of the current display
with the current value in the memory register nUmber that you choose from the
Exch key pop-up menu.

The Exch, Sto, and Rcl keys have pop-up menus that you use to access the
registers. Figure 10-9 shows the Exchange pop-up menu.
Figure 10-9 The Exchange menu
r

p

\ ..

Rc1 ~. 0"..,.1
Exchange
Exch ;~e9ister 0 )
Register 1
Register 2
Register 3
Register 4
Register 5
Register 6
Register 7
Register 8
Register 9

Revision A of 11 June 1990

184

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

10.6 User Defined
Functions

The Calculator allows you to enter your own set of constants and to define your
own functions using the Con and Fun keys shown in Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-1 0 User-defined /unctions

I

\

0.00
IASIC

J
(

)

/
l
\

Conv

Fun V

Each of these keys has a pop-up menu associated with it. Choosing the first item
on the menu displays a pop-up window that lets you enter the value of a constant
or a function, and associate a name with that value. The numbers you enter are
stored in a . calctoolrc file in your home directory.
Once you have entered the new value, by clicking SELECT on the button at the
bottom of the pop-up window, the new value and its name are displayed in the popup menu associated with that Calculator key. To use the constant or function value,
. choose the desired item from the pop-up menu.
The following example describes how to create and save a function which, when
chosen, adds together two numbers taken from memory registers, and stores the
result in another memory register.
Note that when you enter a value for a new function, you must type the keyboard
equivalents in the Value field. To display the keyboard equivalents for each
Calculator key, click SELECT on the Keys button.
1. Move the pointer onto the Fun key and press the MENU mouse button.
2. Highlight Enter Function and release MENU to display the Enter
Function pop-up window.
3. Type in the number of the function you wish to add or replace in the
Function No: field.
4. Type a function name in the Name field, for example, addition.

S. Type a function into the Value field. To add the numbers in Memory
Registers 1 and 2, and store the sum in Register S, type 1l1+R2=SS •
6. Click SELECT on the Enter Function button to store the new function in
your • calctoolrc file and add it to the Functions menu.

To use the new function, choose it from the Functions menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 10 - Calculator 185

10.7 Financial Functions

The Calculator has the financial functions shown in Figure 10-11. This pop-up
window is displayed when you choose Financial from the Mode key pop-up menu.

Figure 10-11 Financial functions
Financial Mode.

The financial functions reUieve needed information from the memory registers.
For example, in order to determine the amount of an installment payment, the
Calculator needs to know the amoWlt of the loan, 1be interest rate, and the tenn of
the loan. You must store this information in the appropriate registers before you
click SELECT on the financial function button. See "Memory Registers" earlier
in this chapter for infonnation about how to store numbers in. the registers.
The function descriptions below includeinfonnation about what the Calculator is
expected to find in each register for each function. To get a more detailed example
of how to use each of these fmancial functions, press the Fl or Help key with the
pointer over the Calculator button you want help for.
o

o

Use Ctnn to compute the number of compounding periods it will take an
investment of present value to grow to a future value, earning a fIXed interest
rate per compounding period. The Calculator expects to find the following
numbers in the memory registers:
•

Register 0: Periodic interest rate

•

Register 1: Future value of the investment

•

Register 2: Present value of the investment

Use Ddb to compute the depreciation allowance on an asset for a specified
period of time, using the double-declining balance methOd. Store the
following infonnation in the memory registers:
•

Register 0: Amount paid for asset

•

Register 1: Salvage value of asset at end of life

•

Register 2: Useful life of an asset

•

Register 3: Time period for depreciation allowance

a Use Fv to detennine the future value of an investment The Calculator
computes the future value based on a series of equal payments, earning a
periodic interest rate over the number of payment periods in a term. The
memory registers need to contain the following numbers:
•

Register 0: Amount of each payment

•

Register·l: Interest rate

•

Register 2: Number of payments

Revision A of 11 J1Dle 1990

186

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

a

Use Pmt to compute the amount of the periodic payment of a loan. Most
installment loans are computed like ordinary annuities, in that payments are
made at the end of each payment period. Store the following information in
the memory registers:
•

Register 0: Principal or amount of the loan

•

Register 1: Periodic interest rate of the loan

•

Register 2: Term, or number of payments

a Use Pv to determine the present value of an investment The Calculator
computes the present value based on a series of equal payments discounted at
a periodic interest rate over the number of periods in term. The following
information is retrieved from the memory registers:
•

Register 0: Amount of each payment

•

Register 1: Periodic interest rate

•

Register 2: Term, or number of payments

a Use Rate to compute the periodic interest rate. It returns the periodic interest
necessary for a present value to grow to a future value over the specified
number of compounding periods in term. Store the follOwing information in
the memory registers:
•

Register 0: Future value

•

Register 1: Present value

•

Register 2: Tenn, or number of compounding periods

a Use SIn to compute the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period.
The straight-line method of depreciation divides the depreciable cost
(actual cost minus salvage value) evenly over the usefullife of an asset The
useful life is the number of periods, typically years, over which an asset is
depreciated. Use the memory registers to store the following infonnation:
•

Register 0: Cost of the asset

•

Register 1: Salvage value of the asset

•

Register 2: Useful life of the asset

a Use Syd to compute the sum-of-the-years' -digits depreciation. This method of
depreciation accelerates the rate of depreciation so that more depreciation
expense occurs in earlier periods than in later ones. The depreciable cost is the
actual cost minus salvage value. The useful life is the number of periods,
typically years, over which an asset is depreciated. Store the following
information in the memory registers:
•

Register 0: Cost of the asset

•

Register 1: Salvage value of the asset

•

Register 2: Useful life of the asset

•

Register 3: Period for which depreciation is computed

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 10 - Calculator 187

o

10.8 Logical Functions
Figure 10-12

Use Term to compute the number of payment periods in the term of an ordinaty
annuity necessary to accumulate a future value earning a specified periodic
interest rate. Store the following information in the memory registers:
•

Register 0: Amount of each periodic payment

•

Register 1: Future value

•

Register 2: Periodic interest rate

The Calculator has the logical functions shown in Figure 10-12. This pop-up
window is displayed when you choose Logical from the Mode key pop-up menu.
Logica~functions

a____ .

.~

logical Mode.

__ mm

10.9 Scientific Functions

. " ..... -.. .

o

Use < to shift the displayed value, treated as a 32 bit integer, to the left. This
key has a pop-up menu. The number of places to shift can be selected from this
menu, and ranges from 1 through 15.

o

Use> to shift the displayed value, treated as a 32 bit integer, to the right. This
key has a pop-up menu. The number of places to shift can be selected from this
menu, and r,mges from 1 through 15.

o

Use &16 to truncate the current display to a 16-bit integer.

o

Use &32 to truncate the current display to a 32-bit integer.

o

Use Or to perform a logical OR operation on the last number and the next
number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.

o

Use And to perform a logical AND operation on the last number and the next
number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.

o

Use Not to perform a logical NOT operation on the currently displayed value.

o

Use Xor to perform a logical XOR operation on the last number and the next
number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.

o

Use Xnor to perform a logical XNOR operation on the last number and the next
number entered, treating both numbers as 32-bit integers.

The Calculator has the scientific functions shown in Figure 10-13. This pop-up
window is displayed when you choose Scientific from the Mode key pop-up menu.

Revision A of 11 J\U1e 1990

188

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 10-13 Scientificfunctions

a Use the Trig key pop-up menu to set the trigonometric base to Degrees,
Radians, or Gradients. The current trigonometric base is indicated by the
second item on the mode line.

a Use Hyp as a toggle for setting or unsetting the hyperbolic function flag. This
flag affects SIN, COS, and TAN trigonometric functions. When this flag is set,
the word "HYP" appears on the mode line beneath the numeric display.

a Use Inv as a toggle for setting or unsetting the inverse function flag. This flag
affects SIN, COS, and TAN trigonometric functions. When this flag is set, the
word uINV" appears on the mode line beneath the numeric display.

a Use eAx to return e raised to the power of the currently displayed value.

a Use l()1\x to return 10 raised to the power of the currently displayed value.
IJ

Use yAx to raise the last number entered to the power of the next number
entered.

[] Use x! to return the factorial of the currently displayed value.
IJ

Use Cos to return the trigonometric cosine, arc cosine, hyperbolic cosine, or
inverse hyperbolic cosine of the current value, depending on the settings of the
hyperbolic and inverse function toggles. (See Hyp and Inv above). The result
is displayed in the current trigonometric base (degrees, radians, or gradients).

IJ

Use Sin to return the trigonometric sine, arc sine, hyperbolic sine, or inverse
hyperbolic sine of the current value, depending on the settings of the . .
hyperbolic and inverse function toggles. (See Hyp and Inv above). The result
is displayed in the current trigonometric base (degrees, radians, or gradients).

IJ

Use Tan to return the trigonometric tangent, arc tangent, hyperbolic tangent, or
inverse hyperbolic tangent of the current value, depending on the settings of
the hyperbolic and inverse function toggles. (See Hyp and Inv). The result is
displayed in the current trigonometric base (degrees, radians, or gradients).

[] Use Ln to return the natural logarithm of the currently displayed value.

a Use Log to return the base 10 logarithm of the currently displayed value.
IJ

10.10 Troubleshooting

Use Rand to return a random number between 0.0 and 1.0.

If the Calculator detects an error, such as division by zero, the word "Error" is
displayed. The Calculator must then be cleared with the Clr key before any further

calculations can take place.
Context-sensitive help is available for every Calculator function. Position the
pointer over the item you want help with, and press the Fl or Help key. A pop-up
window will be displayed giving detailed infonnation.

Revision A of 11 Iune 1990

11
Icon Editor
The Icon Editor allows you to create your own icon images. You can display your
own icon images in the File Manager by binding them to applications and data files
using the Binder. See Chapter 12 for infonnation about how to use the Binder.
This chapter describes how to use the Icon Editor application.

11.1 The Icon Editor Icon
and Base Window

The Icon Editor icon displays an artist's easel, as shown in Figure 11-1.

"Figure 11-1 The Icon Editor icon

~
I

r

\

Icon Editor
When you start the Icon Editor, the base window and a Draw pop-up window are
displayed, as shown in Figure 11-2.
Figure 11-2 The Icon Editor base window and the Draw pop-up window
an E4ltor: OrllW
Modo:

Move:

189

I!)

•

CB ffi (!) (!)
@J@)@@

Revision A of 11 June 1990

190

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

The Icon Editor base window has a control area with File, View, and Edit menu
buttons; a preview area in the upper right comer that shows you the final image size

of the icon you are creating in the pane; and a canvas that you use to create your
image. When the canvas is blank, the preview area is also blank and is therefore
not visible.
The Draw pop-up window contains the controls you use to draw an image in the
canvas. To draw an image, choose a mode (point, line, square, circle, ellipse, or
text). Information messages are displayed in the footer of the Icon Editor window.
Click SELECT to draw a point Press-drag-release SELEcr to draw a line, square,
circle, or ellipse. You can adjust your drawing by using ADJUST with any of the
modes to draw in white, turning off pixels in the design. (Clicking ADJUST on an
off pixel does not tum it on). Using the Move buttons, you can move the image or
a region to the left, right, up, or down, or you can reverse or rotate it The controls
in the Draw pop-up window are explained in detail later in this chapter.

11.2 Filing Options

The File menu opens a File pop-up window, shown in Figure 11-3, that you use to
load, save, and browse icon files.
Figure 11-3 The File pop-up window
.-{f:Q

Icon Editor: File

o lrectorv: thome/) ungle/bre nd,
File: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Load Operation:

( Load)

Loading a File

( Save)

@)

Source (Ol,lerwrlte Canvas)

( Browse ... )

To load a file, type the directory in the Directory field and the fue name in the Flle
field.
You can choose how to load the file from the Load Operations menu shown in
Figure 11-4.
Figure 11-4 The Load Operations pop-up menu
kon Editor: File

.-(l;O

Dlrectorv: /home/deskset
File:

LD

---

Or (Union)

-

-

rite Canvas)

Source (OverwrlN Canvas)
Xor (Exclusive Or)

S

And (Intersection)

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 11 - Icon Editor 191

CJ

Use Source (Overwrite Canvas) to load a file, overwriting any existing
infonnation on the canvas.

CJ

Use Or (Union) to load a file transparently over another image, allowing any
existing infonnation on the canvas to show through the new file.

CJ

Use Xor (Exclusive Or) to load a file transparently over another image, turning
bits that are on in both images off and leaving the other bits unchanged.

CJ

Use And (Intersection) to load a file transparently over another image,
retaining only the bits that are on in both images and turning all other bits off.

When you have chosen the load operation you want to use, click SELBeI' on the
Load button to load the file into the canvas.
You can also load an icon ftle by dragging it from the File Manager and dropping
it onto the Icon Editor.
Saving a File

To save a file, type the directory in the Directory field, the file name in the File
field, and click SELECf on the Save button.
If a file of the same name already exists, a Notice is displayed, as shown in

Figure 11-5, asking you whether you want to overwrite the existing ftle or cancel
the operation.
Figure 11-5 The Save confirmation Notice

...

r-=!!!------~--~

~·~~:.::ll Confirm Overwriting over existing file

(Confirm ) (Cancel)

t'

Browsing for Icon Files

You can browse a specific directory for icon files using the Browse button. To
browse a directory, type the name of the directory in the Directory field and click
SELEeI' on the Browse button.
The Icon Editor browses the specified directory and displays a message in the
footer showing how many icon .files are found. In addition, a pop-up window is
displayed showing the icon ftles available in that directory. Figure 11-6 shows an
example of the images and their rtle names found after browsing the entire
directory specified.

Revision A of 11 JlUle 1990

192

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 11-6 Results of a Browse
k8ft ( .. it: Irvwse k811S

Q

I>

catkon

(!)

leoti Editor

'.
..

eu

.::
....
......
...
....
.
.
..........
...................
-:::::::::::::::::
_.................
....
._..........
....................
.. _....
..::.-.-.......
........
...
-: .....
--:::::::
.._.:- -...:
:::::::-

flower.kon

flower2.kon

t

~~t.kon

I

:-

I

I

"=i:::!::··

I

I

I ..
1-

smallcat.i

cat.kon

eu

flower.kon

I~

II

I
I

:=
:.

!

!!
I

'lower2.ken

%-

!

::

!

~DI

I
i
~

~

I

smalkat.kon

!

I
I

'r:::J

2. Press SELECT on Load at the top of the Browse menu.
When you release SELECf, the image is loaded. If there is an existing image
on the canvas, a Notice is displayed asking you to confirm the overwrite.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 11 - Icon Editor 193

H you have directories with a large number of files, you can reduce browsing time
by using wildcard charclCters in the File field to narrow the search. For example,
typing * . icon searches only for all files with a • icon suffix.

11.3 The View Menu

The View menu, shown in Figure 11-8, provides the following display options:
Cl

Grid (on or off)

Cl

Size of the canvas area (64,48,32, 16 square)

Cl

Preview background window

Figure 11-8 The View menu

Grid Display

Use the Grid item to choose whether or not to display a 4-pixel grid for the canvas.
Figure 11-9 shows an example of the canvas with the grid turned on.
Figure 11-9 The grid
~----------~----------~

"
Cat

Icon Size

The Size item provides four standard icon image sizes:
Cl

64 by 64 pixels (the default icon size)

Cl

48 by 48 pixels

Revision A of 11 June 1990

194

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Cl

32 by 32 pixels (the default size for icons that can be used as Flle Manager data
file icons)

Cl

16 by 16 pixels (typical cursor size)

The canvas is always centered in the Icon Editor window. If you change the size
of the canvas when an icon file is loaded, or load an icon into a different canvas
size, the file is read from the upper left comer. In the example shown in Figure
11-10, the canvas with the cat. icon file has been loaded into a canvas sized to
32 by 32 pixels.

Figure 11-10 Changing the size of an existing icon

.."."Ioeded.

Larger images are cropped to fit the existing size of the canvas, but the full image
is still available.
. .
Preview Window

The Preview Window item displays a pop-up window, as shown in the example in
Figure 11-11, that lets you preview how your icon file will look on different
background patterns. To choose a different pattern, move the pointer onto the
pattern and click SELECf.
Figure 11-11 Background Preview Window pop-up with Source (Overwrite)
Icon edit: Preview Window

I

1~(m.I~I*~i1.I.I.I.I.1
SOurce (OYerwrlte)

The Fill menu has the same four fill options that are also provided from the Load
and Draw pop-up windows:

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 11 - Icon Editor 195

o

Use Source (Overwrite Canvas) to display the icon file on top of the specified
background, as shown in Figure 11-11, above.

o

Use Or (Union) to display a backgroWld transparently over the preview image,
allowing the background to show through the preview image, as shown in
Figure 11-12.

Figure 11-12 Background Preview Window pop-up with Or (Union)

cP

I·
Fill

Icon Edit Preview Window

1~1~1.I~i~I.I.I.I.I.1
f2)

Or (Union)

a Use Xor (Exclusive Or) to view the background transparently over the preview
image, turning off bits that are on in both images and leaving the· other bits
unchanged, as shown in Figure 11-13.
Figure 11-13 Background Preview Window pop-up with Xor (Exclusive Or)
~

I

Icon Edit: Preview Window

It~Wt~H~ll~ml.I.I.I.I.1

Fill (2) Xor (Exclusive Or)

a Use And (Intersection) to view the background transparently over the preview
image, retaining only the bits that are on in both images and turning off all
other bits, as shown in Figure 11-14.
Figure 11-14 Background Preview Window pop-up with And (Intersection)
&

I
Fill

11.4 The Edit Menu

Icon Edit: Preview Window

1~~H~)~Ii~iH.'.I.'.I.1
(2)

And (Intersection)

The Edit menu, shown in Figure II-IS, provides the following editing options:

a Undo
a

Draw

Revision A of 11 June 1990

196

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

a Invert
a

Oear

Figure 11-15 The Edit menu

~
Draw...

"
C&t

The items on the Edit menu are also available on the pop-up menu in the Icon
Editor pane, as shown in Figure 11-16. To use the pop-up menu without moving
the pointer out of the pane, press MENU, choose an item from the menu, and
release MENU.
Figure 11-16 The pop-up menu
~ (View

Undo

v) (Edit V)

You can undo your last action by choosing Undo from the Edit menu. Choosing
Undo a second time undoes the undo, restoring the canvas to its condition before
you chose Undo the first time.
You· can also use the Undo key from the keyboard.

Draw Pop-up Window

The Draw pop-up window, shown in Figure 11-17, is automatically displayed
when you start the Icon Editor. IT you dismiss the Draw pop-up window, you can
display it again by choosing Draw from the Edit menu.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 11 - Icon Editor 197

Figure 11-17 The Draw pop-up window
c9

Icon Editor: Draw
Node:

Move:

(!)

•

(!J C±) (!J (!)
@JC!D~~

The Mode Menu. To draw an icon, choose the mode you want from the Mode
menu, shown in Figure 11-18.
Figure 11-18 The Mode menu
-~

Icon Editor: Draw

Mode: •

Point.
Move: (

Line
Square

.

•

~

,0

CJrcle

0

Blllpse

0

U(!J (!)
D~~

9
Ten

abc

The Mode menu items function as follows:
D

Choosing Point allows you to click SELECI'to insert one black pixel at the hot
spot of the pointer on the canvas. You can point to a black pixel and click
ADJUST to tum the pixel from black to white.

D

Choosing Line allows you to draw a black line I-pixel wide. To draw a line,
position the pointer at one end of the line, press SELEeI', drag the pointer to
the other end of the line, and release SELECI'.· You can draw a white line in
the same way using the ADJUST mouse button.

D

Choosing Square allows you to draw open or filled squares or rectangles using
any of the fill patterns from the Fill menu, which is discussed later in this
chapter. (The Fill menu is displayed only when the Draw option is a fillable
shape, such as square, circle, or ellipse). Position the pointer at one comer of
the square, press SELECI', drag the pointer to the opposite comer of the square
or rectangle, and release SELECf. You can draw a white rectangle in the same
way using the ADJUST mouse button.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

198

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

o

Choosing arele allows you to draw open or filled circles using any of the fill
patterns from the Fill menu. Position the pointer at the center of the circle and
press SELECT, drag the pointer to the enclosing rectangle, and release
SELECf. You can draw a white circle in the same way using the ADJUST
mouse button.

o

Choosing Ellipse allows you to draw open or filled ellipses using any of the fill
pattems from the Fill menu. Position the pointer at the center of the ellipse and
press SELECT, drag the pointer to the outside radius of the ellipse, and release
SELECf. If you define a horizontal or vertical line, the ellipse is interpreted
as a straight line. You can draw a white ellipse in the same way using the
ADJUST mouse button.

o

Choosing Region (the rectangle within a rectangle) allows you to define a
rectangular region on the canvas and move, flip, or rotate it by clicking
SELECf on any of the Move buttons.

o

Choosing Text (abc) displays a pop-up window, shown in Figure 11-19, that
allows you to type text in a text field.

Figure 11-19 The Text pop-up window

cP

Icon Editor: Text

Text: ..._ _ __
Font:

(2) Lucida

Size: (2) 10

To add text to the canvas, follow these steps:
1. Choose Text from the Mode menu.

The Text pop-up window is displayed.
2. Choose the font you want to use from the Font menu.

Note that you can change the set of available fonts. See the section
"Customizing Your Icon Editor" later in this chapter for infonnation about
how to change the set of available fonts.
3. Choose the size you want to use from the Size menu.
4. Type the text you want in the Text field.

S. When you have typed the text in the text field, insert it in the icon by
moving the pointer onto the canvas and pressing SELECT.

A rectangle is displayed that shows you the size of the text to be inserted, as
shown in the example in Figure 11-20. You can move the rectangle anywhere
within the canvas to position it as long as you press SELECT.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter II-Icon Editor 199

Figure 11-20 Adding text to your icon

6. Drag the pointer to position the rectangle, and when it is positioned
correctly, release SELECT.

The text is added to the canvas, as shown in the example in Figure 11-21. You
can add white text to a dark background in the same way using the ADJUST
mouse button.
Figure 11-21 Text added to an icon
~

konEditor

.-t1 Ie.. [direr: Text
Text:

~

reat: ml lucid a

1r----------tJ

Sbe: ml10

.- _:1.- t_

1.-

Once you have added text to the canvas, you can edit it as you would any other
part of the image.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

200

DeskSet Environment Ref~ence Guide

Fill Menu

The Fill menu, shown in Figure 11-22. allows you to choose an outline or one of
ten fill patterns for drawing squares, circles. or ellipses. TIlis menu is only visible
when the current mode is a fillable shape (square, circle, or ellipse).

Figure 11-22 The Fill menu
~

Icon Editor: Draw

D

Fi •
Mode: (!)
peratlo n : @) Source

0

Move: ~

(~)
Icon Editor

(File

V) (View V)

The first item on the menu, an open square, draws an outline of the chosen shape,
using a I-pixel wide black pattern when you use SELECf, and a I-pixel white
pattern when you use ADJUST.
The other items represent patterns, from white to black, that you can use to fill the
square, circle, or ellipse modes.
Operation Menu

The Operation menu, shown in Figure 11-23, allows you to choose how you
perfonn each filled draw operation. This menu is only visible when the current
mode is a fillable shape.

Figure 11-23 The Operation menu
CP

Icon Editor: Oraw
Node:

@)

D FlII: @) D

~

Source (Over~e Canvas)

ite Canvas)

Or (Union)
)(or (Exclusive Or)
And (Intersection)

o

Use Source (Overwrite Canvas) to draw, overwriting any existing infonnation
on the canvas.

o

Use Or (Union) to draw transparently over another image, allowing any
existing information on the canvas to show through.

o

Use Xor (Exclusive Or) to draw transparently over another image, turning off
pixels that are on in both images and leaving the other pixels unchanged.

o

Use And (Intersection) to draw transparently over another image, retaining
only the pixels that are on in both images and turning off all other pixels.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 11 - Icon Editor· 201

Move Buttons

Use the move buttons (left, right, up, and down arrows) to adjust the position of the
drawing in the canvas, or to move a region within the canvas. To move a selected
region, click SELECf on one of the arrow buttons to move the region one pixel in
the desigrlated direction. If no region is selected, the entire drawing is moved.
NOTE

Jfyou move part ofthe image off the canvas, the pixels are croppedjrom the image
and are not restored if you move the image in the opposite direction.
To move a region, follow these steps:
1. Choose Regions (the next to the last item) from the Mode menu.
2. Move the pointer to the corner of the region you want to move and press
SELECT.
3. Drag the pointer to define the region and release SELECT.
4. Click SELECT on one of the arrow buttons to move the region one pixel
in the designated direction. You can repeat this ope~ation as often as you
like.

The left two buttons in the bottom row flip the selected region from left to right or
top to bottom. If no region is selected, the entire image on the canvas is flipped.
The right two buttons rotate the region or the image 90 degrees in the direction of
the arrow.
Invert

You can reverse video on the icon image by choosing Invert from the Edit menu.
All pixels that are on are turned off, and all pixels ·that are off are turned on.
Figure 11-24 shows the cat icon after choosing Invert.
Figure 11-24 An inverted image

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

202

i-

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

~:.

$

Clear

You can clear the canvas by choosing Oear from the Edit menu. No warning
notice is displayed. If you change your mind, choose Undo from the Edit menu.

11.5 Customizing Your
Icon Editor

If you would like to change the set of fonts available in the Icon Editor application,
you can do so by editing the fue • iconedit in your home directory. Follow

these steps:

1. Start up a Command Tool or Shell Tool.
2. At the -system prompt, type cd and press Return to move to your home
directory.

3. To make sure you do not already have the. iconedit file, type
1s • iconedit and press Return. If the system responds by listing the
file. iconedit, skip step 4.
4. Type cp $OPENWINHOME/bin/xview/ .iconedit

. icon-edit

and press Return.

This copies the default system .iconedit file to your home directory so that you
can customize your own version of this file.
5. Using any text editor, edit the • iconedi t tile to add or delete the fonts
available in the Icon Editor application.

The format required by this file is described at the top of the fIle.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

12
Binder
The DeskSet Environment provides an application called Binder that allows you to
bind applications, icons, colol'S. and scripts to files. 1be Binder is a tool designed
for use by a system administrator or a user with a working knowledge of SunOS
operating system commands. Because the Ftle Manager and Print Tool
applications come with a default set of bindings, most DeskSet Environment users
will not need to use the Binder application to set up theDeskSet Environment.
A binding is a logical connection between elements such as a type of file, an
application, a print script, or other characteristics such as color and filters that the
File Manager and Print Tool applications use to display and operate on files. This
chapter explains how to use the Binder application.

12.1 The Binder Icon and
Window

The Binder icon and base window are shown in Figure 12-1.

Figure 12-1 The Binder icon and base window
~(!)

Bind

Iinde,

,

IPattern I Magic N~mber: I •

(32x32 size) Icon Imale File:
Icon Color:

binder

Application:

Print Script
Doc.. ",ent ID:

Fllter(s):

@!)

(Delete) (Change) (Saye 9)

binder

=Q,+

caktool

=111+
=(9+

clock

~

...,
The Binder window has a control area and a scrolling list. The control area
contains controls that you use to add a new binding or to modify or delete an
existing binding. The scrolling list displays a list of existing bindings.

DeskSet Environment installation creates an / etc/ filetype file that contains
the default bindings for the DeskSet Environment You can customize bindings

203

Revision A of 11 June 1990

204

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

and store them in a • filet ype rue in your home directory using the Binder. The
scrolling pane displays your current bindings from / et c / filet ype if you have
not created a • filetype file. If you have. filetype in your home directory,
the bindings from that file are displayed in the Binder pane.
You cannot overwrite your /etc/filetype unless you are root, and start
Binder by typing binder &in a Shell Tool or Command TooL If you start Binder
from the Workspace menu, you can only save changes to the • filetype file in
your home directory.
Types of Bindings

You can specify fIles and/or applications in the Binder by using either a specific
file name, a generic pattern, or a magic number. Magic numbers are identifying
numbers that files and applications use to identify specific types of files. Magic
numbers are stored in the / etc/magic rue on your system. When you click
SELECf on the Magic Number setting, an abbreviated menu button is displayed at
the beginning of the text field. The menu shows the names for the items listed in
the / etc/magic fIle on your system. Figure 12-2 shows an example of the
Magic Number menu. Your system may display a slightly different list of entries.
Figure 12-2 An example of a Magic Number menu

r~
I Rind

Iinder
I D~ttc>rrl I M~nl,.

I Eit
archive ~
MMOF mailbox
Interleaf ASCII document
SunGtr

(cpi¢ archive
)
byte-swapped cpio archive
ASCII cpio archive
yery old archiye
old archive
APl workspace (Ken's original?)
PDP-l1 single precision APl workspace
PDP-l1 double precision APL workspace
VAX single precision APL workspace
VAX double precision APL workspace
old packed data
packed data
compacted data
compressed data
Compiled Term info Entry
Curses screen Image
Curses screen Image
System V Release 1 archiYe
archive random library

I

The items on the menu are displayed in the same order they appear in the
/ etc/magic file.
When should you use a magic number instead of a pattern? The decision depends
on the type of file and whether a standard convention for file name patterns is used.
When a magic number exists for a common type of file, it is probably advantageous
to use it. For example, many applications that create raster files use the raster file
magic number to create the files. If you bind raster files using a suffix such as • r s,
the binding may not apply to all of the raster files you create if you forget to use the
suffix as part of the rue name. However, when standard suffix conventions exist,
using a pattern is faster.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 12 -Binder 205

Binder Options

The Binder base window fields currently in use function as follows:
Cl

Use the Bind setting to enter the name of the application, the pattern for
filenames, or the magic number.

Cl

Use the Icon Image File field to type the path and ftIe name of the icon image
file to be used by the Flle Manager when displaying files.

Cl

Use the Icon Color field to specify the color that the File Manager uses to
distinguish different file types on color monitors. When an icon color is
specified, and a black and white monitor is used, the Icon Color is ignored.

Cl

Use the Application field to enter the name of an application or to type a script
which can be used to start or execute a file.

Cl

Use the Print Script field to enter a customized print script The default islpr.

You can bind the following combinations:

o Application to icon fue
Cl

Data file to application

o Data file to application with an icon file

o Application to print script
o Data file to application with a print script
o Icon color to any combination
You can create a binding by typing infonnation in the text field, clicking SELECT
on the Add button, and choosing either /etc/filetype or /home/user/.filetype from
the Save menu.
To delete a binding, click SELECT on an entry in the scrolling list, click SELECT
on the Delete button, and choose either letclfiletype or /home~ser/.filetype from
the Save menu.
To change a binding, click SELECT on a binding to display the infonnation in the
text fields. Make your editing changes in the text fields, then click SELECT on the
Change button, and choose either /etclfiletype or /home/User/.filetype from the
Save menu.
The following sections show some examples of binding combinations.

12.2 Creating a New
Binding

You create a new binding by typing infonnation in the text fields, clicking
SELECT on the Add button, and saving the changes to • filet ype (or to
/etc/filetype if you start Binder as root). 1beexample below shows how to
bind an icon image to an application.
To bind the cat icon created in Chapter 11 to the cat file in your Ibin directory,
follow these steps:

1. If the icon does not exist, use Icon Editor to create a 32 by 32 pixel icon.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

206

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

2. Click SELECT on Pattern (if necessary) and type the application name,
cat in this example, in the Bind text field.
3. Press Return or click SELECT in the Icon Image File text field to change
the insert point.
4. Type the path and rile name of the icon image,
thome/winsor /Desk.et/ amallcat .l.con in this example.
S. Click SELECT on the Add button.
6. Click SELECT on the Save button to save the current bindings in your
. fi.letype file.

The binding is saved and is displayed in the scrolling list, as shown in the
example in Figure 12-3.
Figure i2-3 Binding a new image to an application
(v)
Bind

Binder

IPattern I Magic Number: I

cat

(32x32 size) Icon Image File: (!)/Deskset/smallcat.kon.
Icon Color:
Application:
Print Script:
Document 10:
Filter(s):

@
binder
calctool
cat

(Delete) (Change ) ~

=~+

=iI+

--':'
'"

-~+

Restart the File Manager to get new definitions

Both the Binder and the File Manager read the filetype file when you start them.
An infonnation message in the footer of the Binder reminds you that you must quit
File Manager and start it again before the changes you made are displayed.
Figure 12-4 shows the bound image after quitting File Manager and starting it
again.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 12 -

Figure 12-4 The new image in the File Manager

.,

file Manater: lusr/bln

(2)
(File V)(Vlew V)~

(PrOPS V)(Home V)(Cioto: V).

~

El
El

bouncedemo

capitali2e

Binder 207

-

El
l

El
El

cal

calendar

cat

cb

-

El
El

canvas_demo

---

cc

,
I

12.3 Specifying Color

You can specify colors for icons displayed by File Manager using the Icon Color
text field. This field accepts red/green/blue (ROB) saturation values from 0
through 255. If you want to display a red icon, for example, type 255 00 in the
Icon Color text field. Color values are ignored on a monochrome display.

12.4 Binding an
Application to Data
Files

You bind file types to applications using the Bind and Application text fields. You
can bind data file types by their magic number or pattern matching without using
an icon. If you want to include an icon, type the path and file name of the icon in
the Icon Image File text field.
Figure 12-5 shows an example of a binding for data files with the following
characteristics:

* . icon suffix

o

A

o

An icon image

o

An icon color

o

An application name with an argument specifying the color of the application
window when it is open. The same color is specified for the application window and for the icon. You can specify different colors for the icon and the
open window if you like.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

208

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Figure 12-5 An application bound to a data file pattern
(2)

-..,

linder

Bind

I Pattern I Magic Number: I

-Jcon.

U2x32 size) Icon Image File: £!)/fUemgr/lcondodcon

Icon Color: 255 225 255
Application: Iconedlt -Wb 255 225 225
Print Script:
Document 10:
Fllter(s):

@

(Delete) (Change) (saye

- ~~+
- ~+
- ~+

* .icon
*owk?
core*

v)

iconed1t

-~b

255

dos -c 123

~

6

h..

12.5 Binding a Print
Script

..I

You bind print scripts to a data rtIe or an application, using the Print Script text
field. In the example shown in Figure 12-6, raster files are bound by magic number
to the SunPaint icon and the SunPaint application, and they use the print script
Ipr -P$PRINTER -v $FILE. Whennoscriptisspecified,thedefaultbinding
is to lpr.

Figure 12-6 A print binding
(2)

Binder

Bind

I Pattern I MagiC Number: 1@l.:..::ra::::.,st:::,e:...rf:.:,:I1:,:&.:..-_ __

(32x32 size) Icon Image File: GJt/filemgr /paintdoc.icon.

Icon Color: 255
255 160
;;;;.;;;..;;...;;;,;;;..;;;...;.;::..:----Application: sunpalnt -Wb 255 255 160
Print Script: Ipr -PSPRINTER -y SFILE
Document 10: _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Filter(s): _ _ _ _ _ _ __

@
o )(
mail folder
raster file

(Delete) (Change) (Save

-

v)

-

+

sunpaint

~b

255

~

c::3

Revision A of 11 June 1990

Chapter 12 - Binder 209

12.6 Document ID and
FUter(s)

These fields are included for future use, but are not currently used. TIle intended
function of these fields is to specify file format conversion filters. When a file is
dropped onto an application, the Flle Manager will use these filters to conven the
file to the fonnat expected by the application.

12.7 Troubleshooting

If you change bindings and store the changes in the • f il et ype file in your home
directory, and then find that the bindings do not work correctly, check to be sure
that you have quit the application that does not register the change and statted it
again. The Binder, Print Tool, and Flle Manager applications only read the
• filetype when they are started.

If you have quit and restarted the applications and the bindings still do not work,
you can return to the system default bindings by removing your. filetype :file.
If you enter Binder as root, make changes in the /etc/filetype file, and find
that the bindings do not work correctly, you can reinstall the / etcl filetype
file by running install_filemgr following these steps:

1. Quit the current File Manager application if you have one running.
2. From a Shell Tool or Command Tool, become root.
3. Type cd $OPENWINHOME/bin/ xview and press Return.
4. Type install_filerngr and press Return.
The /etc/filetype file is reinstalled using the default bindings, and any new
items are appended to your /etc/magic file. See the OpenWindows
Installation and Stan-up Guide for more information about install_filemgr.
Table 12-1 shows a list of the default DeskSet Environment bindings from
/etc/filetype. The path name for all icons in Table 12-1 is:

$OPENWINHOME/include/images/

Revision A of 11 June 1990

210

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Table 12-1

Pattern

l0/

The default DeskSet Environment bindings from letcljiletype

Application

Icon File

binder

bind. icon

calctool

caIctool.icon

clock

fm_clock.icon

cmdtool

fm_cmdtool.icon

dbxtool

fm_dbxtool.icon

filemgr

filemgr.icon

fontedit

fm_fontedit.icon

iconedit

fm_iconedit.icon

mailtool

fm_mailtool.icon

maze

maze.icon

perfmeter

perfmeter.icon

printtool

printer.icon

rolo

rolo.icon

sched

sched.icon

shelltool

fm_cmdtool.icon

snapshot

snapshot.icon

sundraw

sundraw.icon

sunpaint

sunpaint.icon

sunwrite

sunwrite.icon

tapetool

tapetool.icon

textedit

fm_textedit.icon

traffic

fm_traffic.icon

vitool

vitool.icon

xcalc

calctool.icon

xpuzzle

puzzle.icon

xsol

xsol.icon

Color

Print Binding

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

Chapter 12 -Binder 211

Pattern

Application

Icon File

Color

*.wk?

dos -c 123

spreadsheeticon

255225255

*.icon

iconedit
-Wb 255 225 225

icondoc.icon

255225255

dos -c 123

spreadsheeticon

255225255

coredoc.icon

25500

*.wk?
core*
*.exe

dos-c

dos.icon

206192255

*.z

uncompress

compress.icon

25500

Frame Maker document

framedoc.icon

255255194

mail folder

maildoc.icon

0255204

sunpaint
-Wb 255255 160

paintdoc.icon

sunwrite
-Wb 255 198 192

writedoc.icon

vfont definition

/usr/bin/fontedit

fontdoc.icon

SunDraw document

sundraw
-Wb 192255255

drawdoc.icon

raster file
SunWrite document

Print Binding

206192255

Revision A of 11 JWle 1990

212

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 June 1990

A
Differences Between SunView and
the OpenWindows DeskSet
Environment
This appendix lists some of the differences between the SunView user interface
and the DeskSet Environment See the OpenWindows User's Guide for a
description of the DeskSet Environment.

A.I Select then Operate

The DeskSet Environment is based on the select-then-operate paradigm. First you
select an object by pointing at it with the pointers, then pressing and releasing a
button on the mouse. Then, using either the pointer or the keyboard, you choose
the operation to be applied to the selected object. One advantage to this paradigm
is that you can operate on windows and icons directly, opening, closing, resizing,
and moving them without having to first choose an operation from a menu.

A.2 Drag and Drop

One of the primary differences between the SunView user interface and the
DeskSet Environment is the integrated workspace provided with the drag and drop
paradigm. The DeskSet applications allow you to freely move data fues between
windows by selecting them and then dragging and dropping them onto a
destination application.

A.3 Mouse Buttons

The DeskSet Environment assigns three specific functions to the mouse buttons.
and the location of these functions is different from the SunView environment
(] SELECf (usually the left mouse button) is used for highlighting objects such
as windows, icons, text, and graphics that are to be used for a subsequent action
and for activating buttons and choosing settings.
(]

ADJUST (usually the middle mouse button) is used to increase or reduce the
group of items in the selection.

(]

MENU (usually the right mouse button) is used to display and choose from
menus.

213

Revision A of 11 June 1990

214

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

A.4 Pushpin

Another innovation in the DeskSet Environment is that some menus and all popup windows except Notices have a pushpin, shown in Figure A-t.
Figure A-J

An unpinned and pinned pushpin

When the pushpin is unpinned (on its side), the menu or pop-up window is
displayed and dismissed in a way similar to SunView menus and subwindows.
You can click SELECf on the pushpin to pop it into its hole, pinning the menu or
window to the workspace. As long as the pushpin is pinned, the menu or window
remains displayed and available to you for repeated actions. Oicking SELECf on
a pinned pushpin pops the pin out of the hole and dismisses the menu or window.

A.5 Double-Click to
Open Icon

To open an icon in the DeskSet Environment, you double-click SELECf, or
choose Open from the Window menu.

A.6 Mail Tool Changes

Users familiar with the SunView Mail Tool will find a number of enhancements
and changes in the DeskSet Mail Tool application. See Chapter 3 for an in-depth
discussion of Mail Tool features. Here is a summary of some of the changes:
o

View multiple messages at one time using multiple message windows.

o

Drag-and-drop messages from the In Tray into mail files that are represented
graphically in the File Manager application.

o

Open and view the contents of mail files by dragging and dropping the fIles
from File Manager onto the Mail Tool View pane.

o

Open one or several composition windows that operate independently of the
Mail Tool base window, so that you can compose and send messages whenever
you want without needing to open the Mail TQOI icon.

o

Maintain a history of mail files you have opened in your current session so that
you can locate messages with ease.

o

Recover deleted messages in any order.

o

Perfonn operations on multiple messages: print, delete, move, and select
several messages to reply to at one time. When you choose multiple messages
for reply, a Compose window is opened for each reply.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

B
Keyboard Accelerators
The following key combinations are keyboard equivalents formouseless operation.
You do not need to use capital letters with the Shift and Control keys. For example,
Control-b works the same as Control-B.

B.l Erase Functions

Backspace: erases character to the left of the insert point.
Shift-Backspace: erases character to the right of the insert point
Control-W: erases word to the left of the insert point.
Shift-Control-W: erases word to the right of the insert point.
Control-U: erases to the beginning of the line.
Shift-Control-U: erases to the end of the line.

B.2 Move Caret
Functions

Control-B: moves the caret one character to the left.
Shift-Control-F: moves the caret one character to the left.
Control-F: moves the caret one character to the right.
Shift-Control-B: moves the caret one character to the right
Control-,: moves the caret one ,word to the left.
Control-.: moves the caret to the end of the word.
Control-A: moves the caret to the start of line.
Control-E: moves the caret to the end of the line.
Control-P: moves the caret up one line, maintaining column position.
Control-N: moves the caret down one line, maintaining column position.
Control-Return: moves the caret to the end of text
Shift-Control-Return: moves the caret to beginning of text.

B.3 Function Keys

Stop (L1): stops the current operation.
Again (L2): repeats the previous operation.
215

Revision A of 11 June 1990

216

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Props (L3): displays the property window for the application at the pointer
location.
Undo (lA): undoes previous operation.
Front (LS): brings the window at the pointer location to the front of the screen.
When the window is already at the front, moves it to the back of the screen.
Copy (L6) copies selection to the clipboard.
Open (L7): opens the icon at the pointer location or closes the window at the
pointer location.
Paste (L8): copies clipboard selection to the insert point
Fmd (L9): finds selection to the right of the caret
Shift-Find: finds selection to the left of the caret

Cut (LIO) cuts selection and puts it on the clipboard.
Help (Fl): displays a help window with context-sensitive help for the object at the
pointer location.

B.4 Calculator Function
Keys

Every function in the Calculator application has a keyboard accelerator associated
with it. See the Calculator man page, included in Appendix C, for a listing of each
Calculator function and its keyboard equivalent.

Revision A of 11 June 1990

c
DeskSet Environment Application
Man Pages
This appendix provides the system man page summaries for DeskSet applications.
These are quick reference documents that you can view in a Command Tool or
Shell Tool by typing man . The man page entries included in
this appendix are listed below, with each entry name in bold type:

o binder, an application used to modify the DeskSet bindings database
o calctooI, a desktop calculator
o

clock, an application that displays the time in an icon or window

o

em, the Calendar Manager, an appointment. and resource scheduling tool

o

cmdtooI, an application to run a shell or other program in a text-based
command window

o

filemgr, a mouse-based graphical file management program

o iconedit, a tool to create and edit small images for use in icons, cursors and
panel items
o

maiitool, an application used for reading, storing, composing and sending
electronic mail messages

o

perfmeter, a tool to display system perfonnance values in a meter or strip chan

o

printtool, an application used to print files

(] rpc.cmsd, the Calendar Manager selVice daemon
Cl

sheUtool, an application to run a shell or other program in an interactive
tenninal emulator window

(] snapshot, a tool to captUre and save some or all of a screen
(]

tapetool, a tool for reading files from tape and archiving files to tape

(] textedit, an Xview window- and mouse-based text editor
(] xview, a user-interface toolkit that supports interactive, graphics-based
applications running under the X window system. This man page includes
infonnation about the • Xdefaults file used to store and retrieve
OpenWindows resource settings.

217

Revision A of 11 J\Dle 1990

218

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide

Revision A of 11 June 1990

BINDER(I)

USER COMMANDS

BINDER(l)

NAME

binder - modify deskset bindings data base
SYNOPSIS
binder

AVAILABILITY
This command is available with the OpenWindows environment For information about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide .
DESCRIPTION
binder is an OpenWindows XView tool that allows the user to modify a data base. This data base
desaibes bindings between types of files, and how they will be displayed and manipulated by the icon that
the file will be displayed with, the color of the icon, the method to use for printing that file, and the program to be used for viewing that kind of file.

. Files may be described in one of 2 ways; by a name pattern or by their magic number (as defined in the
letclfiletype file).
The user has 2 data bases available to them. When install_filemgr is run on their system, a data base is
installed in letclfiletype. With the binder, the user may also set up another data base in $HOMEI.filetype
that will override the entries in the letclfiJetype data base. By doing this, the user may customize their
working environment without affecting others.
.
Applications that use the bindings data base in OpenWindows Version 2 are:
fiJemgr(1)
binder(1)
printtool(l)
maUtool(l)
FILES

letclmagic
letclfiletype
$HOMEl.filetype

BUGS
Changing your bindings wiII not automatically update all those tools that read the bindings data base. Each
tool will have to be quit and restarted to make the new bindings effective.
instaU_ filemgr must be run as root, and requires that SOPENWINHOME be set for the root user. Most root
users do not have that variable set.

Sun Release 4.1

~tchang~

11 June 1990

219

CALCTOOL ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

CALCfOOL ( 1 )

NAME
calctool - a desktop calculator.
SYNOPSIS

calctool [ -8 accuracy] [ -m ] [ -r ] [ -v]
AVAlLABITLIY

This command is available with the OpenWindows environmenL For infonnation about installing
OpenWindows, refez to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide .
DESCRIPTION

Calctool is a desktop calculator. It has been designed to be used with either the mouse or the keyboard. It is
visually simi1ar to a lot of hand-held calculators. There are financial, logical and scientific modes. Similar
operations are color coded on color wcrkstations. Each key is discussed in more detail below.
Caution: One of the most important things to remember about calctool is that calcu1ations are performed
from left to right, with no arithmetic precedence. If you need arithmetic precedence, then you should use
parentheses.
Internal arithmetic is done with double precision floating point numbers. Accuracy can be adjusted from
zero to nine numeric places in fixed notation. but numbers can be displayed in enginecnng and scientific
notation as well. The calculator reverts to scientific notation when the number is largez than the display
would allow in fixed notation. The base of operation can be changed between binary, octal, decimal and
hexadecimal. Numbers are initially displayed in fixed notation to two numezic places, in the decimal base.
You can use the CopyQ..fJ) and the Paste (L8) function keys in conjooction with the numeric display to
store or rettieve characters from the text shelf. You can also remove the last digit entered. and the whole
display can be cleared.
There are ten memory registers. Numbers can be stored or retrieved in these locations, and arithmetic can
be perfonned upon register contents.
The display window contains the current numerical value plus the current base and ttigonometric type.
There are also indicators that show if the hyperbolic and inverse function switches are set and which
numerical mode is currently in operation. If an operation needing more than one numezical input is partia11y complete. the operation is also displayed in this window as a rernindez.
Context sensitive help is also available. Position the cursor over the item you need help with, and press the
Fl or Help key. A pop-up will be displayed giving deWled information on this facility ..
On startup, calctool will look for a .calctoolrc file in the usez's home directory. This file allows the user to
define their own constant and function definitions, plus set up the initial values for the ten memory registers. It then looks for a .calctoolrc file in the current directory, and if present, uses the contents of this file
in place of any previously defined values.

With the .calctoolrc file, there are currently four valid record types. These are comments. constant and
function definitions, and initial memory register values.
Lines starting with a 'II' are treated as comments and ignored.
lines starting with 'c' or 'C' in the first column are definitions for constants. The character is followed by a
digit from 0 through 9 then a space. This is followed by a numbez in fixed or scientific notation. Following
this is an optional comment, which, if found, will be used in the pop-up menu for the constants. If the comment is present, then there must be at least one space between this and the preceding number.
lines starting with 'r (X' 'F in the first column are definitions for functions. The charactel' is followed by a
digit from 0 through 9 and then a space. This is followed by a function definition. Following this is an
optional comment, which, if found, will be used in the pop-up menu for the functions. If the comment is
present, then there must be at least one space between this and the preceding function definition.
Lines starting with 'r' or 'R' in the first column are definitions for the initial contents of the memory registers. The character is followed by a digit from 0 through 9 and then a space. This is followed by a number
in fixed or scientific notation. The rest of the line is ignored.

220

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

CALCTOOL ( 1 )

CALcrOOL ( 1 )

All other lines are ignored. There should be no embedded spaces in the fwlction definitions. Whenever a
backslash is found, this and the following character signify a control character, for example" would be
ASCn7.
OPTIONS

-a accuracy
Initial number of digits displayed after the numeric poinL This value must be from 0 through 9.
The default is two numeric places.

-m
-r
-v

Always display in monochrome, even 00 a color screen.
Start up a "right-handed" version of the caIdooI program.
Print the version number of this release of the calctool program.

CALCULATOR BU1TONS
This section describes the calculator keys present in the main calctool window. Apart from this basic
mode, calctool has three otbel' modes, and the keys associated with each of these modes are descnOOd in

separate sections below.
Keyboard equivalents appear in the square brackets. Note that ,A, followed by a letter indicates that the
Conttol key and this key should be pressed together.
Numerical Keys [ 0-9 a-f. =  J.

Enter a digit (decimal digits 0-9 or hexadecimal digits A-F) into the display. The '.' character acts as the
numeric po~ and '=' (or Return) is used to complete numerical entry.
Up to forty digits may be en~ but internal accuracy will be lost for large numbers.
Arithmetical Operations [ + - x • I].

Perfonn an arithmetical operation using the previous entry and the next entry as operands.. Addition, subuaction, multiplication and division are denoted by the characters '+', '-', 'x' and 'f respectively ('.' is
also synonymous with multiplication).
Number Manipulation Operators.

Int

( Ai ]

Return the integer portion of the current entry.

Frae

[ AI]

Return the fractional portion of the current entry.

Abs

("u]

Return the absolute value of the current entry.

Cbs

[C)

Change the arithmetic sign of the current entry.

llx
xAl

[r]

Return the value of 1 divided by the current entry.

[@]

Return the square of the current entry.

~

(~

Perfonn a percentage calculation using the last entry and the next entry.

Sqrt

[5]

Perfonn a square root operation on the current entry.

Asc

(Aa]

A separate window is displayed that allows you to enter any character. The ASCll
value of this character is then displayed in the current base.

]

Menu Operatioal.

Each of these operations has a pop-up menu associated with iL This menu can be displayed using MENU
and then you can make a selection. You can select the default item from the menu using SELECT.
It is also possible to use just the keyboard to achieve the same results. The first keyboard value selects the
menu operation; the second keyboard character selects the new value for this operation. Unlike the menu
facility available with the mouse, there is no visual feedback on what choices are available to you, so the
user has to know what item they wish to selecL

Base

Sun Release 4.1

[B]

Change the base that calculations are displayed in. The available choices are binary
[ b ], octal [ 0 ], decimal [ d ] and hexadecimal [ h ]. Digits that are inappropriate for
a particular base selection are greyed out in the main caldool window.

Last change: 11 June 1990

221

USER COMMANDS

CALCrOOL ( 1 )

CALcrOOL (1 )

¥
Disp

[D]

Change the numerical display mode. The choices are engineering [ e ], fixed point
[fl, and scientific [s] notation.

Mode

[M]

Change the calculator mode. By default. eaktool is in basic mode, and just the keys
on the main eaktool window are visible. There are also three other modes; financial
[ f l, logical [ 1] and scientific [ s ]. Selection of one of these modes will display an
extra window with more keys. These special opezations are descnOed in more detail
in the sections below.

Acc

[A]

Set the display accuracy. Between 0 and 9 [ 0-9 ] significant digits can be displayed.

Con

[# 1

Retrieve and display a constant value. 'I'bere are ten conslant values [ 0-9 1, and each
one has a default value which can be ovenidden by enuies in the users .eaktoolrc
file. The ten default values are:

o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

0.621
1.41421
2.71828
3.14159
2.54
57.29578
1048576.0
0.0353
0.948
0.0610

Ians per hour I miles per hour.
square root of 2.

e.
pi.
cms I inch.
degrees in a radian.
2 to the power of 20.

gms I oz.
kilojoules I British thennals.
cubic cms I cubic inches.

Fun

[F]

Retrieve and execute a function expression. There are ten function definitions [ 0-9 ].
These are set up with enuies in the user's .caktoolrc file.

Rei

[R]

Retrieve memory register value. There are ten memory registers [ 0-9 ].

Sto

[S]

Store value in memory register. There are ten memory registers [ 0-9 l. The register
number may be preceded by an arithmetic operation (addition, subtraction, multiplication or division), in which case the specified operation is carried out between- the
displayed entry and the value currently in the selected memory registert and the
result is placed in the memory register.

Exch

[X]

Exchange the current display with the contents of a memory register. There are ten
memory registers [ 0-9 ].

Other Operations.

222

Cir

[ Delete]

Clear the calculator display.

Dsp

[ Back Space]
Remove the rightmost character of the current entry, and recalculate the displayed
value. Note that internal accuracy is lost with this operation.

( and) ( and ) ]

Parentheses. Allow precedenCe with arithmetic calculations. Note that pareritheses
can be nested 10 any level. and calctool provides a visual feedback of what is being
typed in, in the calculator display. The calculation doesn't take place until the last
parenthesis is matched, then the display is updated with the new resulL _

Exp

[E)

This is used 10 allow numbers to be entered in scientific notation. The mantissa
should be initially entered, then the Exp key selected. The exponent is then entered.
If no nwnerical input had occurred when the Exp key was selected, then a mantissa
of 1.0 is assumed.

Keys

[k]

Toggle the labels on the calctool buttons between the mouse and keyboard
equivalents.

Lastchange: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

CALCTOOL ( 1 )

CALCfOOL (1 )

Mem

[m ]

Display the window with the ten memory register values. These values are displayed
in the current base to the current degree of accuracy using the current numerical
display notation.

Quit

[ q or Q ]

Exit without user verification.

FINANCIAL MODE

An example of how to use each of these financial calculations is available via the context sensitive help
facility.
Ctrm

[ At ]

Compounding term. Computes the Dumber of compounding periods it will take an
investment of present value pv to grow to a future value of lv, earning a fixed
interest rate int per compounding period.
Memory register usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2

Ddb

[Ad]

int
fv
pv

(periodic interest rate).
(future value).
(present value).

Double-declining depreciation. Computes the depreciation allowance on an asset for
a specified penod of time, using the double-declining balance method.
Memory register usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2
Register 3

Fv

[v]

cost
salvage
life
period

(amount paid for asset).
(value of asset at end of life).
(useful life of the asset).
(time period for depreciation. allowance).

Future value. This calculation determines the future value of an investment It computes the future value based on a senes of equal payments, each of amount pmt,
earning penodic interest rate int, over the number of payment periods in term.
Memory register usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2

Pmt

[P]

pmt
int
n

(periodic payment).
(periodic interest rate).
(number of periods).

Periodic payment Computes the amount of the periodic payment of a loan. Most
installment loans are computed like ordinary annuities, in that payments are made at
the end of each payment period.
Memory register usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2

Pv

[p]

prin

(principal).

int
n

(periodic interest rate).
(tenn).

Present value. Detennines the present value of an investment It computes the
present value based on a series of equal payments, each of amount pmt, discounted
at periodic interest rate int, over the number of periods in term •
Memory register usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2

Sun Release 4.1

pmt
int
n

(periodic payment).
(periodic interest rate).
(tenn).

Last change: 11 June 1990

223

CALCfOOL ( 1 )

Rate

USER COMMANDS

["r]

CALCI'OOL (1 )

Periodic interest rate. Returns the periodic interest necessary for a present value of
pv to grow to a future value of tv ov« the number of compounding periods in term •
Memory registez usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2

Sin

[AS]

fv

(future value).

pv
n

(preamt value).
(tenn).

Sttaight-Iine depreciation. Computes the straight-line depreciation of an asset foc one
period. The straight-line method of deprecialion divides the depreciable cost (costsalvage) evenly over the useful life of an asset The useful life is the number of
periods typically years) over which an asset is depreciated.
Memory registez usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2

Syd

["y]

cost
(cost of the asset).
salvage (salvage value of the asset).
life
(useful life of the asset).

Sum-of-the YeMS-digits depreciation. The sum-of-the-years' -digits method of depreciation accelerates the rate of depreciation, so that more depreciation expense occurs
in earlier periods than in later ones. The depreciable cost is the actual cost minus salvage value. The useful life is the number of periods (typically years) over which an
asset is depreciated.
Memory register usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2
Register 3

Term

[T]

cost
salvage
life
period

(cost of the asset).
(salvage value of the asset).
(useful life of the asset).
(period for which depreciation is computed).

Payment period. Returns the number of payment periods in the tenn of an ordinary
annuity necessary to accumulate a future value of lv, emning a periodic interest rate
of int. Each payment is equal to amount pmt.
Memory register usage:
Register 0
Register 1
Register 2

LOGICAL MODE
[<]
<

224

pmt
fv

int

(periodic payment).
(future value).
(periodic interest rate).

Shift the current entty to the left. The shift can be between 1 and 15 places
[ 1-9, a-f]. This calculator key has a pop-up menu associated with iL
Shift the current entry to the right. The shift can be between 1 and 15 places
[ 1-9, a-fl. This calculator key has a pop-up menu associated with it

>

[>] .

&16

[]]

&32

[[]

Truncate the current entry to a 32 bit unsigned integer.

Or

[I]

Perform a logical OR operation on the current entty and the next entry, treating both
numbers as unsigned long integers.

And

[& ]

Perfonn a logical AND operation on the current entry and the next entry, treating
both numbers as unsigned long integers.

Not

[-]

Perform a logical NOT opezation on the current entty.

Xor

[" ]

Perfonn a logical XOR operation on the current entry and the next entry, treating
both numbers as unsigned long integers.

Tnmcate the current entry to a 16 bit unsigned integer.

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

CALCfOOL ( 1 )

Xnor

[n]

CALCTOOL (1 )

Perfonn a logical XNOR operation on the current entry and the next entry, treating
both numbers as unsigned long integers.

SCIENTIFIC MODE

Trig

[T]

Set the current trigonometrical base. This can be in degrees [ d ], gradients [ g ] or
radians [ r J. This key also has a pop-up menu associated with it

Hyp

[h)

Toggle the hypezbolic function indicator. 1bis switch affects the type of sine, cosine
and tangent trigonomettic functions performed.

Inv

[i)

Toggle the inverse function indicator. This switch affects the type of sine, cosine and
tangent trigonometric functions perfooned.

eAx
lOAx
yAx

[ {]

Returns e raised to the power of the current entry.

[}]
[y]

Returns 10 raised to the power of the current entry.

x!

[!]

Return the factorial of the current entty.

Cos

[AC]

Return the trigonometric cosine, arc cosine, hypezbolic cosine or inverse hypezbolic
cosine of the current display, depending upon the current settings of the hyperbolic
and inverse function switches. The result is displayed in the current trigonometric
units (degrees, radians or gradients).

Sin

[AS]

Return the trigonometric sine, arc sine, hypezbolic sine or inverse hyperbolic sine of
the current display, depending upon the current settings of the hypezbolic and
inverse function switches. The result is displayed in the current trigonometric units
(degrees, radians or gradients).

Tan

[At]

Return the trigonometric tangent, arc tangent, hyperbolic tangent or inverse hyperbolic tangent of the current display, depending upon the current settings of the
hyperbolic and inverse function switches. The result is displayed in.the current trigonometric units (degrees, radians or gradients).

Ln

[N]

Return the natura1logaritbm of the current entry.

Log

[G]

Return the base 10 logarithm of the current entry.

Rand

[?]

Return a random number between 0.0 and 1.0.

Take the last entry and raise it to the power of the next entry.

FILES

-I.calctoolrc
User's personal calctool startup file.
SEE ALSO

DeskSet Environment Reference Guide.

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

225

USER COMMANDS

CLOCK(l)

CLOCK(l)

NAME
clock - display the time in an icon or window
SYNOPSIS
clock
AVAILABILITY

This command is available with the OpenWindows environment For infonnation about installing
OpenWindows, refez to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPTION
clock is an OpenWindows XView utility that displays the current time in a window or icon. When the window is open, clock can display the time in either analog or digital format The clock window is scalable in
ci~rfoom~

.

USAGE

When the dock window is open, it has a floating menu from which you can bring up a property window.
From this property sheet, you can modify the display of the tool by selecting either the Analog or Digital
choice box.
Seconds:
On the analog version, this selection starts a second hand on the face of the clock. On the
digital version, it adds two digits to ~ digital readout
Date:
Turns on a date display for both analog and digital versions of dock.

BUGS

If you reset the system time, clock will not reflect the new time until you change its window state from
open to icon, or vice versa. To reset the system time, see date (1 V).

The date display does not go well with the round clock face.
Occasionally, when dock is uncovered, the face will be visually corrupted. Use the Refresh button from
~ frame menu to repair.

226

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

CM(I)

CM(I)

NAME

em - calendar manager, appointment and resource scheduling tool
SYNOPSIS

em [ generic-tool-arguments 1
AVAILABILITY

The man page you are currently viewing refers to the em that is available with OpenWindows. All
OpenWindows standard tools use the OPEN LOOK Graphical User Interlace (GUI). For more infonnation
about the OPEN LOOK UI. refer to the OpenWindows User's Guide. For information about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPI10N

em is an appointment and resource scheduling tool that allows you to do the following:
- Display day, week, month, year views
- Schedule single or repeating events
- Browse and edit calendars of other users
- Set beeping, flashing, or pop-up reminders
- Integrate with mail
- Restrict access to your own calendar
- Print high-quality hardcopy
A full appointment editor is available for inserting and editing appointments. Most settings on the appointment editor can be preloaded through a Properties window available from the main panel.
OPTIONS

generic-tool-arguments
em accepts the generic tool arguments described in xview(I).
USAGE

em operates via a set of pulldown menus from button stacks in a control panel. The menu commands are
described below.
The Control Area
View Menu

Day

Displays the appointments for a day. The default is today.

Week

Displays the appointments for a week. A graphed display is also displayed with the
times for the appointments shaded. The default is the current week.

Month

Displays the appointments for an entire month. The default is the current month.

Year

Displays a full year.

Edit
Appointment

Schedule appointments by either selecting the day and choosing Appointment from
the Edit menu or by double-clicking on day (m the month or week view) or on anhour (in the day view). Inserts and deletes appointments.
Date:

Automatically set by this tool, but may be changed.

What: FIlled in with information about the appointment This information will be
displayed on the various views.
Scrolling List

Automatically set with the current appointments for that day. It will be
updated as appointments are added and deleted.

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

227

USER COMMANDS

CM(l)

fM(l)

Start: and End:
Sets the time of the appoinbnent A choice of times is fOWld on the pulldown menus. The choices are determined by the Day Bounds settings from
the Properties window.

Repeat:

Indicates whetbel' the appointment is a repeating event of a daily, weekly,
biweekly, monthly or yearly interval. The number of times the appoinbnent
re~ is controlled by the Repeat Abbreviated Choice below the toggles.
Reminder:
Detennines what action will be taken in advance of the appoinbnent
Beep

Produces an audible sound.

Flash

Inverts the frame of the tool or the icon if the tool is closed.

Open

Pops up a reminder window with the text of the appoinunent showing.

Mail

Composes a message with the text of the appointment and sends it
to recipien~ in the Mail To field.

Advance
Specifies the amount of time preceding the event the Reminder will be
activated.
Add

Adds the appoinunent to the calendar.

Delete Deletes the appointment selected in the scrolling list from the calendar.
Change Changes the appoinunent selected in the scrolling list to the edited values
from the appointment editor.
Defaults:
Clears the appointment edita' of context and sets default values from. the
Properties window.

Properties Sets default values for this tool. These values are used for setting default values in
the Appointment Editor, setting display characteristics of the views, and granting
access to the calendar.

Editor Defaults
Sets default reminder values and advance times for appointments.
Day Boundaries
Sets default begin and end times for the day that are used in drawing the
chart on the
view and the grid on the day view.

week

Browser Calendars
Sets a default list of remote calendars to be automatically loaded at
startup time. The entries have the format name@host. These entries will
be available using the Browse menu.

Access List and Permissions
Sets default access to the calendar. Access can be Browse (Read), Insert
(Add), Delete (Remove). The keyword world, opens up the calendar to
everyone. The entries have the format name@hosl At this time, traditional UNIX groups are not supported.

228

Apply

Adds any changes made.

Reset

Reestablishes the values before you started editing.

Defaults

Reestablished the tool default values.

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

CM(I)

USER COMMANDS

CM(I)

Browse

Sets the toors context to a named calendar. You can display and edit appointments
for othez users. Entries have the format aame@bost and are entered by typing into
the Name text field and pressing Add. The entry will be added to the scrolling list
and can then be selected for browsing.

Print

Displays the choices for printing hardcopy output.
Day, Week, Month, or Year
CM Printer Options

Postscript output can be sent to a file or to a printer named in the 'Printer
text field. The default pinter is tw. Output width, height, positions from
the left and bottom, and Dwubez o( copies can be set in their respective
text fields.
Previous
Changes the display to the previous logical unit or calendar data.

Today Changes the display to today's logical unit o( calendar data.
Next

Changes the display to the (ollowing logical unit o( calendar data.

FILES

lusrlspoollcalendar/callog.username
$HOME/.cm.rc
lusr/etclrpc.cmsd or $OPENWINHOMElrpc.cmsd
SEE ALSO

rpc.cmsd(l)

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

229

CMDTOOL(I)

USER COMMANDS

CMDTOOL(l)

NAME

cmdtool- run a shell (or other program) in an OpenWindows enhanced terminal window
SYNOPSIS

cmdtool [ -C ] [ -M bytes 1[ -p count 1[ -B boldstyle 1[ -I command 1[ generic-rool-argumt!nts 1[program [program-arguments 11
AVAILABILITY

This command is available with the OpenWindows user environment For information about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPTION

cmdtool is the standard OpenWindows support facility for shells and other programs. When invoked,
cmdtool runs a program (usualIy a shell) in a text-based command window. Characters typed on the keyboard are insened at the caret. If the program is a shell, that shell accepts and runs commands in the usual
manner. cmdtool also supports programs that perform CUfSfitld<1 >
Allows you to replace selected text forward and backward throughout the file.
A user-definable pull-right menu controlled by the lusrllibl.text_extras_menu file. This can
be overridden in two ways:
1) Change the value of the .XdefauIts parameter text.extrasMenuFilename to the correct file
path.
2) Set the environment variable EXTRASMENU to the file desired.
Note that option I overrides option 2 if both are used. For more infonnation see the DeskSet

Environment Reference Guide .
FOe Editor
Enable
Disable

Sun Release 4.1

Allows you to edit files from within cmdtooL
Turns off the ability to edit files from within andtooL

Last change: II June 1990

231

CMDTOOL(I)

USER COMMANDS

CMDTOOL(I)

Scrolling
Enables Scrolling
Enables scrolling within cmdtool.
Disable ScroDing
Turns off the ability to scron within cmdtooL Once scrolling in cmdtool is disabled, it's functionality is identical to sheDtooi and a more restricted menu
appears. Selecting the Enable Scrolling option from the restricted menu restores
the full menu and functionality of cmdtool.
User Defined Keyboard Remapping

The file -I.textswrc specifies filter programs that are assigned to (available) function keys. These filters are
applied to the contents of the primary selection. Their output is entezed at the caret.
Accelerators
Text facility accelerators that are especially useful in command windows are described here. See

textedit(l) for more infonnation.
Cl'RL-RETURN
Position the caret at the bottom, and scroll it into view as detennined by
Text.LowerContext.
CAPS-lock
Toggle between all-uppez-case keyboard input, and mixed-case.
FILES

Itmp/tty.txt.pid

log file

-I.textswrc
-I.ttyswrc
usrllib/.text_extras_menu
$HOME/.TextExtraMenu
letc/termcap
lusrlbinlsh
SEE ALSO

rlogin(lC), script{l), shelltool(l), textedit(I), vi(l), xview{l), curses(3V), curses(3X)

OpenWindows User's Guide

BUGS
Typing ahead while cmdtool changes between its scrollable and cursor motion modes
freeze cmdtool.
.

~

sometimes

Full tenninal emulation is not complete. Some manifestations of this deficiency are:

232

•

File completion in the C shell does not wod.

•

Enhanced display of text is not supponed.

Last change: II June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

FILEMGR(I}

FILEMGR(I}

NAME

filemgr - OpenWindows mouse-based file manager
SYNOPSIS
filemgr [-d directory] [-i secs] [-8] [-?]

AVAILABILITY
Available with the OpenWindows environment For information about installing OpenWindows, refer to
the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPTION
filemgr is a graphical file management program. It allows you to navigate through and manipulate files.
You can find. copy, move, link, open, and print existing or new files. You can find files, change file properties and view multiple directories at the same time.
INSTALLATION
filemgr should not be used until the program instaU_filemgr has been run (as root).
OPTIONS
filemgr
options:

accepts all the generic tool arguments described in xview(I}. In addition, it can accept these

-d directory
This will start the filemgr in the given directory .

-i secs This will set the timer to check on folder and/or file modification times every secs seconds.
-8

This will force the filemgr to check both folder and file modification times. By default, filemgr
only checks the folder modification times. Be careful, as this option will severely affect perfor-

mance.
-1

This will display a partial list of command line options that can be passed to filemgr. For additional generic options that can be passed to filemgr, type man shell tool ·1.

USAGE

filemgr operates via a set of pulldown menus from button stacks in a control panel. Most menu commands
operate on the currently selected files. To select a file, click SELECf on its icon. To select additional files,
click ADJUST on additional files. The menu commands are described below.
File>
Open>
File

Opening a document puts the document into the document window.
Opening a folder puts that folder into the folder window. Opening an
application starts the application.

With 'Goto' Arguments
Treats the text typed in the Ooto line as a command line argument
(for applications only).
In Document Editor
Opens documents and applications in the default document editor.
See Tool Properties (below).
Print File Prints files using the default print script See Tool Properties below.
Create Folder

Creates an empty subfolder in the current folder.
Create Document

Creates an empty document in the current folder.

Sun Release 4.1

~tchang~

11 June 1990

233

USER COMMANDS

FILEMGR(l)

Remote Transfer_
Displays a command window which allows you to copy files to and from remote
machines. You can make a reference to files on a remote machine by using the
foonat machine_natne:file_name. See rcp(l).
(your Commands)
You can add your own entries to this menu by adding items to the file .fvcmd in
your home directory. Each line in this file corresponds to a menu item you can
execute. Use the "abbreviation % OLE to stand for the name of the selected file.
View>
Tree (or Path)
Toggles between a hierarchical display of folders and a more compact view showing only the path of the cwrent folder being viewed.
ShowlHide Sublolders
Shows or hides the subfolders of the selected folder (tree view only).
Show AU Subfolders
Shows the entire subfolder tree that branches from the selected folder. Note that
this can be quite time consuming (tree view only).
Begin Tree Here
Makes the selected folder the root of the tree view (tree view only).
Add Tree's Parent
Adds the root's parent to the display. This moves the view up one level (tree view
only).

Folder Display>

Sort By

Icon

Displays files with 32x32 icons.

List

Displays files with 16x16 generic icons. Also display any list options
chosen (see Tool Properties, below).

Determines the category by which the files are to be sorted in the display: name,
modification date (youngest first), size (largest first), and type (folders, documents,
applications).

Edit>
Select AU Selects all files in the current folder.
Link

Places selected files on the clipboard for a pending link operation.

Copy

Places selected files on the clipboard for a pending copy operation.

Paste

Pastes files from clipboard into the current folder. Pasted files are linked, ~ied,
or moved, depending on how they were first stored in the clipboard.

Cut>
Cut to Wastebasket
Places selected files in the wastebasket for a pending deiete operation.
Move to Clipboard
Places selected files in the clipboard for a pending move operation.
Really Delete
Removes files from folder (see Tool Properties, below).
Show Clipboard
Displays contents of system clipboard.
Props>

234

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

FILEMGR(l)

FlLEMGR(I)

File Properties...
This property sheet allows you to see and change file attributes. When several
files are chosen at once, you must replace the indetenninate setting from owner,
group, and permissions to apply them to the selected files.

Tool Properties_
This property sheet allows you to customize filemgr.

Home>

A menu that always contains your home folder in the first position, Thereafter, it su.-es the last
nine folders you have visited. Selecting a folder causes that folder to be opened.

Goto>
Entry

This is grayed out unless there is an entry on the Goto line (located at the right of
the Goto button). To change directories, type the directory name on the Goto line
and then press Goto.

Find

Selecting this option brings up a command window that allows you to search for
files within the specified directories.

SEE ALSO

egrep(I), find(1)
FILES

letC/filetype
This file contains a database of file types and actions to be perfonned when files of each type
are opened.

$HOMEI.fvcmd
This file contains your own commands, which can be referenced by the "Your Commands"
menu.
$HOME/.filetype
User's personal copy of the file types database. It follow the same fonnat as /etc/filetype.

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

235

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

NAME

iconedit - create and edit images for OpenWindows icons, cursors and panel items
SYNOPSIS

iconedit [filename] [XView command-line arguments]
AVAlLABll..1TY

This command is available with the OpenWindows user environment Foi- information about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide • For infonnation about the
XView command-line arguments see the XView Programming Manual.
OPTIONS

filename

Contains the image.

XView command-line argwnents
iconedit axepts the XView command-line arguments listed in xview(l).
DESCRIPTION

iconedit is pm:t of the OpenWindows DeskSet prolt requires the pixreet library for its operation. With
iconedit you can create and edit small images for use in icons, cursors, panel items, etc. iconedit has
sevtnl submenus. Two of the submenus are visible at startup, the Main window and the Draw pop-up
menu.
Main Window
Contains the drawing area (or canvas) together with the command panel and the message area underneath
the canvas. From the control panel, you have the following pull-down menus.
File
Directory Specify the directory where the image is located.
File

Specify the name of the file with the image. IT you are not sure of the file name,
use a regular expression for the File field or leave it blank, and it switches to
Browse when you press Load. IT you already have an image in the canvas, it asks
for confinnation before loading. You can also load a file by dragging the file icon
from File Manager and dropping it into iconedit.

Load Operation:
Choose one of the operations using the abbreviated menu button.
Source (Overwrite Canvas)
Loads a file overwriting any existing infonnation on the canvas.

Or (Union)
Loads a file transparendy over another image, allowing any existing
infonnation on the canvas to show through the new file.
Xor (Exclusive Or)
Loads a file ttansparendy over another image, turning bits that are on
in both images off and leaving the other bits unchanged.
And (Intersection)
Loads a file transparendy over another image, retaining only the bits
that are on in both images and turning all other bits off.

236

Load

This button loads in the file named in the Directory and File fields. Choose the
raster operation to load it with.

Save

Saves your current image in the file specified in the Directory and File fields. IT
the file exists, iconedit asks for confinnation before overwriting the file.

Browse

SeMches the directory specified in the Directory: field for image files with names
matching the regular expression in the File field. If the File field is empty, it

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

assumes the reguIar expression. (search all files). IT images are found, they are
displayed in a pop-up, scrollable window for browsing. IT no images are found,
iconedit will report this in the menu area. From the browse window you can load
an image by selecting it with the left mouse button. The Load operation will take
into account the current load opt'2'8tion specified in the pop-up.
View
Grid

Turns a grid on or off in the display area. One grid square is a 4x4 area of pixels.

Size

Olanges the size of the canvas. There are four sizes: 64x64 (icon size); 48x48;
32x32; and 16x16 (cursor size). When you switch to a smaller size, the rest of the
canvas is hidden but not lost. Editing operations, however, will only affect the
visible portion of the canvas. Saving will save only the visible portion of the
image.

Preview

Opens the preview window for previewing a life-size version of the image being

edited.
Gray Shades
Ten varying gray shades are available for filling the background.
Click the left mouse button on the desired shade to load it

Fill

Select one of the four raster operations available from the abbreviated
menu button. The source for the raster operation is the preview image
and the destination is the preview background.
Source (Overwrite Canvas)
Overwrites any existing information on the canvas.
Or (Union)
Any existing information on the canvas shows through.
Xor (Exclusive Or)
Bits in both images are turned off and any other bits are
unchanged.
And (Intersection)
Only the bits that are on in both images are left
other bits are twned off.

Edit

OD.

All

This menu is attached to the canvas.
Undo

Undoes the last operation. Restores the canvas to the state it was in before the last
Edit operation. A second Undo undoes the previous Undo.

Draw Window
Displays the options available for drawing. To draw in black, use the left mouse
button; to draw in white (erase), use the middle mouse button. As you draw, an
enlarged version of the image appears in the canvas while a life size version of the
image appears in the control panel as well as in the preview window.
Mode

Choose one of the following modes. The gray shade selected in the
Fill pop-up and the operation selected from the Operation pop-up
will be used.
Dot

Sun Release 4.1

~tchange:

Paints a single dot at a time.

11 June 1990

237

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

Line

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

Draws a line. Point to the first endpoint and press and
hold the left (oc middle) button. Drag to another endpoint and release the button to draw the line.

Oeft or middle) at one comer of the desired rectangle. Drag to the
opposite comer and release. For different rectangle
shades. select the desired shade from the Fm menu.

Rectangle Draws a rectangle. Press the mouse button

Circle

Draws a circle. Press the mouse button at the center and
drag to the edge and release the button. For different
shades. select the desired shade from the Fill menu.

Oval

Draws an oval. Press the mouse button at the center of
the oval and drag to the edge of the enclosing rectangle.
For diffezent shades, select the desired shade from the
Fill menu.

Region

Select the desiredrectangu1ar region by pressing the left
(or middle) mouse button at one comer, drag it to the
opposite comer, and release. A boundary box shows you
the selection. After specifying the region, choose the
move operation desired from the Draw window.

Text

Writes text on the image. Pops up the Text window that
has a field for typing the string to be added to the icon.

Once you press either the left or middle mouse button, a
box appears. Position the box where the text is desired
and release the mouse button. It also has a menu of available fonts and their sizes. To switch fonts, select from
the menus provided. To change the set of available fonts,
edit the file Jconedit A default Jconedit file can be
found in $OPENWINHOMFlbinlxview. Yau may copy
this default file into your home directory and edit it The
format is explained in the default file.
Operation:

Source (Overwrite Canvas)
Overwrites any existing information on the
canvas.
Or (Union)
Any existing information on the canvas
shows through.
Xor (Exclusive Or)
Bits in both images are turned off and any
other bits are unchanged.
And (Intersection)
Only the bits that are on in both images are
left on. All other bits are turned off.
Move

238

Shows eight arrows that indicate the ways of moving
your image. If you have selected region from the draw
menu, only the specified region is affected by the move
operation. If region is not selected, the entire image is
moved.

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

ICONEDIT ( 1 )

Invert

Invert all pixels on the canvas. Toggles from orr to On or vice versa.

Clear

Clears the canvas.

SEE ALSO

Open Windows User's Guide.
The XView Reference Manual.

Sun Release 4.1

~tchange:

11 June 1990

239

USER COMMANDS

MAILTOOL ( 1 )

MAlLTOOL ( 1 )
¥

NAME

mailtool - OpenWindows interface for the mail program
SYNOPSIS

mailtool [ -Mx ] [ -Mi interval] [genenc-tool-arguments ]
AVAlLABn.1TY

This command is available with the OpenWindows environment. For infonnation about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPTION

mailtool is the standard OpenWindows interface to maD(I). It provides a menu-driven facility for reading,
storing, composing, and sending mail messages. Scrol1able windows allow easy access to mailbox and
mail folders.
The full editing capabilities of textedit(1) are available for modifying and composing mail messages as
well as text fields within command panels.
OPTIONS

-Mx

Expen mode. Do not ask for confirmation after potentially damaging mail commands. This
has the same effect as setting the expert variable.

-Mi interval
Check for new mail every interval seconds. This has the same effect as specifying a value for
the interval variable.

generic tool arguments
mailtool accepts the generic tool arguments described in xview(1).
USAGE

mailtool operates through the use of a set of command panel buttons, message windows, menus, and other
components that conform to the OPEN LOOK Graphical User Interface Functional Specification. Mail
messages are edited using the menus and commands of the textedit program. For more information about
the general usage of OPEN LOOK software applications, see the OpenWindows User's Guide. For more
infonnation about textedit conventions, see the textedit(1) man page.
Command Panel Buttons
The mailtool command panel is located near the top of the main window, under the window header. Select
a command panel button to reveal the menu for that button.
File
Open

InTray

Used to mld mail from the user's system mail file into mailtooI.

Mail File

Opens the mail file specified in the Mail File text field in the commandpaneL .

Move into Mail File
Moves all selected messages from the current mail file to the file named in the
Mail FUe text field in the command panel. If the file exists, the messages are
appended.

240

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

MAILTOOL ( 1)

MAlLTOOL (1 )

Copy into Mail File
Copies all selected messages from the current mail file to the file named in the
Mail File text field in the command panel If the file exists, the messages are
appended. Unlike Move into Mail Filet the messages are not deleted from the
InTray.
Print
Sends copies of all the selected mail items to your default printer. If there are no
selected items, mailtool sends copies of those items you are currently viewing.
Save Changes
Causes all the deletions and changes you have made to the mail file to
become pennanent and opens your InTray for any new mail.
View
Messages Displays messages you have selec(ed.
Abbreciated Header
Strips unnecessary header fields from the messages you view.
Specify these fields by setting the ignore variable in your .mailrc file.
Full Header
Displays the currently selected messages with alI of the message
header fields.
Previous

Displays previous messages in your mailbox.

Next

Detennines the message following the last one displayed and displays it The
message is chosen from all the messages in the current ~ail file.

Sort By
Time and Date
Sorts the messages in the mail folder by chronological order.
Sender
Subject

Sorts the messages in the mail folder alphabetically by sender.
Sorts the messages in the mail folder alphabetically by subject

Edit

Cut

Deletes the selected mail messages, placing copies in the Clipboard.

Copy

Copies the selected mail messages, placing copies in the Clipboard.

Delete

Deletes the selected mail messages~ without placing copies in the CUpboard. If no
mail messages are selected, the messages currently being viewed are deleted.

Undelete
Last

Restores the last message deleted to your mail header display. This
may be done until all messages deleted since the last commit are
restored. This option also restores messages deleted through cut and
move commands.

From ..t Causes a command frame

to appear that contains a list box with all
the mail items that have been deleted since the last commit operation.
You can select any numbez oftheset and press the button on the command frame. All the selected items will be returned to the mail header
window.

Find
Sender:

Sun Release 4.1

Enter text that is in the Subject field of the message you want Capitalization is ignored.

~tchange:

11 June 1990

241

MAILTOOL ( 1)

USER COMMANDS

Subject:

MAILTOOL (I )

Enter text that is in the From field (mail address) of the message you
want. Capitalization is igno-ed.

Find Forward
After entering text for Seader: or Subject: or both, click SELECT on
Find Forward to locate the next message that matches the text.
Find Backward
Afta' entering text for Sender: or Subject: or both, click SELECT on
Find Backward to locate the previous message that matches the text.
Select AD After entering text for Seader: or Subject: or both, click SELECT on
Select All to select all messages that match the text.
Properties Displays the MaD Tool: Properties window. The various categories of properties
you can modify are displayed in a pop-up menu from the Display abbreviated
menu button.

MaD Arrival Properties
Check ror Mail Every:
Specifies in seconds how often MaD Tool checks for new
mail.

Signal New MaD With:
Specifies how many beeps or flashes or both that are used
to notify you of the arrival of new mail.
Automatically Display Headers:
Specifies whether headers are displayed automatically or
not.
Apply

When this button is selected, any changes you have
specified are made.

Reset

When this button is selected. any changes you have made
in the window are deleted.

Composition Header Properties
Compose with Subject Line:
Specifies whethez a Subject: line appears in the Composition window.
Cc Line:

Specifies whethez a Cc: line appears in the Composition
window.

Bcc Line: Specifies whethez a Bec: line appears in the Composition window.
Custom Fields
Allows you to specify a list of header fields in addition to
To:, Subject:, Cc:, and Bee.
Add Arter
Field is insetted into list afta' the selection point.
Add Berore
Field is insetted into list before the selection
point.
Delete Deletes the selected field from the list.

Field

242

~tch8nge:

Specifies the name of a custom field. The scrolling box
displays all custom field names.

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

MAILTOOL ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

MAILTOOL ( 1 )

Apply

When this button is selected, any changes you have
specified are made.

Reset

When this button is selected, any chang~ you have made
in the window are deleted.

Template Properties

Allows you to specify template files that you have created. These
files can be included in mail messages.
Templates Use the fonowing to specify when the template is to be
used. One must be selected.
Add After

FIle is inserted into list after the selection point
Add Before

File is inserted into list before the selection
point
Delete Deletes the file from the list

Name:

Specifies the template name.

File:

Specifies the location of the template.

Apply

When this button is selected, any changes you have
specified are made.

Reset

When this button is selected, any changes you have made
in the window are deleted.

General Properties
Default Header Pane Height:
Specifies the number of lines for the header pane.
Default Header Pane Width:
Specified the width of the header pane in columns.
Default Message Pane Height:
Specifies the number of lines for the message pane.
Print Script:

Script executed when File -> Print is selected.
Mail File Directory:

Specifies the name of the mail directory.
Ask For Confirmations:

Specifies whether Man Tool asks for confirmations.

Apply

When this button is selected, any changes you have
specified are made.

Reset

When this button is selected, any changes you have made
in the window are deleted.

Compose>

This panel button allows users to create new mail to be sent, reply to existing messages with or without including the current message, and to forward messages as
needed.
New

Sun Release 4.1

Opens a composition window without the message headers being
filled in. If an unused mail message window cUJTelltly exists on the
screen, it will be brought forward -to be used and no new window is

Last change: 11 June 1990

243

USER COMMANDS

MAILTOOL ( 1 )

MAll..TOOL ( 1 )

created. H an unused mail message window current exists and is fully
displayed on the screen, there will be DO change in the display.

Reply>

Opens a composition window with the message headers filled in
appropriately and allows you to write and deliver your response. Han
unused mail message window current exists on the screen, it will be
brought forward to be used and DO new window is created. If an
unused mail message window cmrent exists and is fully displayed on
the screen, there will be no change in the display. Options to this submenu are desaibed below:

To Sender:
Opens a composition window. In the window, the address
field contains the originator's address for the selected

message.
To All:

Opens a composition window. In the window, the address
field contains addresses for the person who sent the
selected message as well as all the people that the
selected message was sent to.

To sender, include:

Opens a composition window. In the window, the address
field contains the originator's address for the selected
message. The window also contains the selected message in the body of the new message.
To All, Include:

Opens a composition window. In the window, the address
field contains addresses for the person who sent the
selected message as well as all the people that the
selected message was sent to. The window also contains
the selected message in the body of the new message.
Forward> Forwards the currently selected message. Opens a composition window with the cmrently selected message included in the new message
body.
.
.
Vacation

Lets you compose a message that is automatically delivered in
response to incoming messages. Use this when you can't read your
mail for a period of time and want Mail Tool to respond to messages
for you.

The Composition Window
This window has its own conttol panel with the following buttons.
Include
Bracketed Pastes the currently selected messages into the body of the message
you are composing. The included messages are bracketed with special
lines.
Indented

Pastes the currently selected messages into the body of the message
you are composing. Each line of the included message is indented,
using the standard indentation string.

Templates Displays file names of templates.

244

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

MAILTOOL ( 1 )

MAILTOOL (1)

Deliver
Quit Window
Mails the message you have composed and then dismisses the COIDpose window.

Close Window
Mails the message you have composed and then closes the compose
window to an icon.
Clear Window
Mails the message and then cIW'S the compose window to prepare it

forre-use.
Leave~~geIn~t

Mails the message and leaves the message in the compose window.

Headers> Selecting an option affects the header of the mail message.
AddIDelete Ce:
Adds or deletes the Cc: line from the message you are composing.
AddlDelete Bee:
Adds or deletes the Bee: line from the message you are composmg.
Delete Subject
Adds or deletes the Subject: line from the message you are composing.
Add Custom >
Add a custom header field already created in the Properties window.
Delete Custom>
Delete a custom h~r field already created..
Name Finder
Displays a pop-up window that lets you ask for the mailing addresses of individuals in the NIS database.
Name:

Type the requested name.

Sounds Like
Looks for names that sound like the one you entered. The first letter
must match exactly.

Find
Clear

Click SELECT to start the search.

Oears the contents of the compose window.

Mailtool Variables
In addition to the variables recognized by maD(l), maUtooi recognizes those listed below. They can be set .
by editing your .mailre file. Unless otherwise noted, the default for the following variables is off. Some of
these variables can be set using the Properties menu.

aDowreversescan
When set, allows you to step through messages in latest-first. oldest-first order if you choose.
The next message depends on the order of travel.
askbee

Prompt for the Bee: field when composing or replying.

beD

The number of times to ring the bell when new mail anives. The default is O.

editmessagewindow
Request confirmation before the first editing operation to a message in the message window (as
opposed to composing a reply). The default is not to request confirmation of the first edit

USER COMMANDS

MAll..TOOL ( 1 )

MAIL-rqoL ( 1)

expert

Set expert mode iIi which no contirmation are requested.

filemenu

A list of files from which to initialize the Mail File: menu. These can be absolute path names,
path names relative to the working directory for mailtool (typically your home directory), or
filenames prefixed with a + which are taken as relative to the directory specified in the folder
variable (see mail (1».
t

filemenusize
Specifies the maximum size of the .Yale: menu.
8ash

The number of times to flash the window or icon when new mail arrives. The default is O.

headerlines
The number of lines in header window. The default is 10.
retrieveinterval
The interval in seconds to check for new mail. The default is 300.
moveinputtocus
Move the input focus into the composition window for Compose and Reply. This only wo!ks
for click-to-type.
popuplines The number of lines in pop-up message composition window. The default is 30.
printmail The command to use to print a message. The default is Ipr -p.
trash

The name of trash bin, which may be accessed just Ike any other folder. If set, all deleted messages are moved to the trash bin. The trash bin is emptied when you commit changes.

suppressautoretrieve
Does not automatically retrieve new mail messages. Default is to automatically retrieve new
mail.
additional fields:
A list of header fields to access via the Add Custom field in the Header menu.
templates A list of name :path pairs to access via the Include> Templates menu. name appears in the
menu; path is the file included when name is selected.
toolcols

Default width of windows in columns. Default is 80.

FILES

lvarlspoollmaill. System mailboxes
-'.mailre

Start-up file for maD and maUtooi.

-I.mailtool-init

Contains manu default and layout information. Generated by selecting Save
Workspace in the root menu.

SEE ALSO

binmail(l), mail(l), textedit(l), aliases(S), newaUases(8), seadmail(8)

OpenWindows Use'-s Guide

246

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

PERFMETER ( 1)

PERFMElER (1 )

NAME

perfmeter - display system performance values in a meter or strip chart
SYNOPSIS

perfmeter [ -s sample-time] [ -b h-hand-int] [ -m m-hand-int] [ -M smax minmax maxmax ]
[ -v value ] [ hostname ]
AVAILABILITY

This command is available with the OpenWindows environment. For infonnation about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPTION

perrmeter is an OpenWindows XView utility that displays performance values (statistics) for a given host-

name. IT no host is specified, statistics on the current host are metered. The rstatd(SC) daemon must be
running on the machine being metered.
When open, perfineter displays a perfonnance value in the form of a strip chart. When closed, it displays
a meter dial. By default, the display is updated with a sample-time of 2 seconds. The hour hand of the
meter represents the average over a 2O-second interval; the minute hand, the average over 2 seconds. The
default value displayed is the percent of CPU being utilized.
The maximum scale value for the strip chart will automatically double or halve to accommodate increasing
or decreasing values for the host machine. This scale can be restricted to a certain range with the -M
option.
OPTIONS

-s sample-time

Set the sample time to sample-time seconds.
-b h-hand-int

Set the hour-hand interval to h-hand-int seconds.
-m m-hand-int

Set the minute hand interval to m-hand-int seconds.
-M smax minmax ma.xmax

Set a range of maximum values for the strip chart. Values for each of the arguments should be
powers of 2. smax sets the starting maximum-value. minmax sets the lowest allowed maximumvalue for the scale. maxmax sets the highest allowed maximum-value.
-v value

Set the performance value to be monitored by pressing MENU and sliding the pointer to one of the
following options:

Sun Release 4.1

cpu

Percent of CPU being utilized.

pkts

Ethernet packets per second

page

Paging activity in pages per second.

swap

Jobs swapped per second.

intr

Number of device interrupts per second.

disk

Disk traffic in transfers per second.

cntxt

Number of context switches per second.

load

Average number of nmnable processes over the last minute.

colis

Collisions per second detected on the ethemet.

errs

Errors per second on receiving packets.

Last change: 11 June 1990

247

PERFMETER ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

PERFME1ER ( 1 )

USAGE
Commands

You can change the statistic being displayed by clicking MENU ,and bringing up the property sheet for the
tool. The property sheet will allow you to modify what the perfmeter is monitoring and how often it
checks. Other meter parameters can be modified through the use of keyboard accelerators. Move the
pointer into the window and type one of the following keyboard keys:
m

Deaease minutehandintv by one

M

Increase minutehandintv by one

h

Deaease howhandintv by one

H

Increase howhandintv by one
Set sampietime to a range from 1 to 9 seconds.

1-9
Fn..ES

letclinetd.conf

starts statistics server

SEE ALSO

xview(l), netstat(SC), rstatd(8C), VDlstat(8)

248

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

PRINTTOOL ( 1 )

PRINITOOL ( 1 )

NAME

printtool - OpenWindows tool for printing files
SYNOPSIS

printtool [generic-tool-arguments ]
AVAlLABILITY
This command is available with the OpenWindows environmenL For infonnation about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide .
DESCRIPTION

printtool is a user interface to the Ipr(I), Iprm(I), and Ipq(l) operating system printing functions.
printtool is an OpenWindows based XView application that uses the Ipr(l) command to print files. By
specifying a filename, printer name, number of copies to be printed and any optional filters, the user can
print files, get status on files printed, and remove files from a printer queue.
You can drag and drop a file from filemgr(l) onto an open printtool or icon, instead of typing a name in
the File: text field.
The printer names are derived from the letdprintcap file. By convention, the fonnat of the first line for
each printer entry in the letdprintcap file is:

printer number Ilogical name ldescription:
For example:

31Iaserbeamlprinter near Fred's office:
The printer name used by printtooI is the longest of the first two fields. This field should not contain

blanks.
OPTIONS

generic-tool-arguments
printtool accepts the generic tool arguments described in xview(1).
USAGE

printtool is pan of the OpenWindows user environmenL For a description of the basic concepts of
OpenWindows, see the OpenWindows User's Guide.
File:

Must specify a filename in the text field

Printer:
Must select a printer. It can be from the Printer: options or the default can be left

Copies: Must specify the number of copies to print or leave the default of one.
Filter: Optional.

Sun Release 4.1

None

Default and provides no filter.

Raster

File contains a raster image, see r.terfiIe(5). The printer must support an appropriate imaging model such as PostScript in order to print the image.

TeX

The files contain data from tex (DVI fonnat from Stanford).

Plot

The files contain standard plot data as produced by the plot(3X) routines (see also
plot{IG) for the filters used by the printer spooler).

CifPlot

The files contain data produced by cifplot.

trofl'

The files contain trofl'{l) data.

pr

Prints pages headed with the date, filename and page number.

control

Interprets the first character of each line
character.

Last change: II June 1990

as a standard FORTRAN carriage control

249

USER COMMANDS

PRIN1TOOL ( 1 )

other

Print

PRINTIOOL ( 1 )

Used for printing a file with another command line print method, including pipes.
Will accept the following variables:
SFILE

filename from drag and drop operation or name specified in File:
text field.

SPRINTER

printer specified in Printer: text field.

$COPIES

nwnber of copies specified in Copies: text field

The named file is printed.

Status Displays the status of the printer specified in the Prin·ter: text field.
Stop Printing

Removes a printing job.
Selected Print Job
Stops the printing of the job or jobs you have selected in the scroll window.
All Print Jobs

Stops all of your print jobs that are currently queued. See printcap(5) for more information.
These filter options offer a standard user interface, and all options may not be available for, nor applicable
to, all printers. The trofT filter is provided as part of the standard SunOS installation.
FILES
Jetc/printcap

Printer capabilities data base

SEE ALSO
filemgr (I), .pg (I), Ipr (I), Iprm (I), trofl'(I), pr (IV), plot (3X), printcap (5), rasterfile (5)
DIAGNOSTICS
See Ipr(1) diagnostics.

prioter: unknown printer:
Probably an incorrect entry in the Jetc/priotap file.

The Jetclprintcap file must exist with valid printer enules for priottool to work.
BUGS

See Ipr(1) bugs.

250

Lastchange: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

RPC.CMSD ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

RPC.CMSD(I)

NAME

rpc.cmsd - calendar manager service daemon
SYNOPSIS

lusr/eklrpc.cmsd
or
SOPENWINHOMFJbinlrpc.cmscl
DESCRIPTION

rpc.cmsd is a small data base manager for appoinunent and resource-scheduling data. It's primary client is
Calendar Manager, a window-based tool.
FILES

lusrlspoollcalendar/callog.username
letdinetd.conf
$OPENWINHOMFJbinlinstall_cmgr .

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

251

SHELLTOOL ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

SHELLTqc>L ( 1 )

*
NAME

shelltool- nul a shell (or other program) in an OpenWindows terminal window
SYNOPSIS

shelltool [ -C 1[ -B boldstyle 1[ -I command 1[ genenc-tool-arguments 1 [program [arguments 11
AVAILABILITY

This command is available with the OpenWindows user environment. For information about installing
OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPTION

shelltool is a standard OpenWindows facility for shells or other programs that use a standard tty-based
interface.
.
When invoked, shelltool runs a program, (usually a shell) in an interactive terminal emulator based on a tty
subwindow. Keyboard input is passed to that program. In the OpenWindows vezsion of shelltool, a restticted pop-up menu is available from the main display ami that allows you to enable scrolling. Selecting
the Enable Scrolling option from the restricted menu gives shelltool the full functionality of the cmdtool
window, included a larger pop-up menu from which to select options. Selecting Disable Scrolling from
the pop-up submenu will return Shelltool to its original state.
OPTIONS

-c

Redirect system console output to this shelltool.

-B boldstyle

Set the style for displaying bold text to boldstyle. boldstyle can be a string specifying
one of the choices for the term.boldstyle default. see Deraults Options, below, or it
may be a numerical value for one of those choices, from 0 to 8, corresponding to the
placement of the choice in the list.

-I command

Pass command to the shell. SPACE characters within the command must be escaped

generic-tool-arguments
shell tool accepts the generic tool arguments listed in xview(1).

USAGE
.xdefaults File Options
You can specify a number of defaults using the options in the .Xderaults file that effect the behavior of
shell tool. The ones of interest are those that begin with text,term, or keyboard. See .xview(l) for more
detailed information.
The Terminal Emulator
The tty subwindow is a tenninal emulator. Whenever a tty subwindow is created, the startup file -I.ttyswrc
is read for initialization parameters that are specific to the tty subwindow.
The .ttyswrc FUe
The command format for this file is:

#
set variable
mapi key text
mapo key texl

Comment
Tum on the specified variable.
When key is typed pretend text was input.
When key is typed pretend text was output.

The only currently defined variable is pagemode. Icey is one of LI-LI5, FI-F15, TI-T15, R"t-RI5, LEFf ,
or RIGIIT (see note below). text may contain escapes such as 'E, \n, AX, etc. (ESC, RETURN , and CTRL-X ,
respectively). See termcap(5) for the format of the string escapes that are recognized. Note: mapi and
mapo may be replaced by another keymapping mechanism in the future.
When using the default kernel keyboard tables. the keys LI, LEFT • RIGIIT , BREAK , R8, RIO, R12, and
R14 cannot be mapped in this way; they send special values to the tty subwindow. Also, when using the
default kernel keyboard tables, LI-LIO are now used by XView. See input_rrom_deraults(l) and
kbd(4S) for more information on how to change the behavior of the keyboard

252

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

SHELLTOOL ( 1 )

SHELLTOOL (1 )

It is possible to have tenninal-based programs drive the tool in which its tty subwindow resides by sending
special escape sequences. These escape sequences may also be sent by typing a key appropriately mapped
using the mapo function described above. The following functions pertain to the tool in which the tty
subwindow resides, not the tty subwindow itself.
\E[lt
\E[lt
\E[3t
\E[3;TOP;LEFrt
\E[4t
\E[4;HT;WlDTHt
\E[St
\E[6t
\E[7t
\E[8;ROWS;COLSt
\E[1lt
\E[13t
\E[14t
\E[18t
\E[20t
\E[2lt
\E]ltext\E\
\EJlfile\E\
\E]Llabel\E\
\E[>OPT; •••h
\E[>OPT; •••k
\E[>OPT; •••1

-open
- close (become iconic)
- move, with interactive feedback
- move, to TOP LEFI' (pixel coordinates)
- stretch, with interactive feedback
- stretch, to HT WIDTH size (in pixels)
- front
- back
- refresh
- stretch, to ROWS COLS size (in characters)
- report if open or iconic by sending \E[lt or \E[2t
- report position by sending \E[3;TOP;LEFI't
- report size in pixels by sending \E[4;HT;WIDTHt
- report size in characters by sending \E[8;ROWS;COLSt
- report icon label by sending \E)Llabel\E\
- report tool header by sending \E]llabel\E\
- set tool header to text
- set icon to the icon contained in file; file must be in iconedit output format
- set icon label to label
- ttun SB OPT on (OPT =1 => pagemode), for. example, \E[>1;3;4h
- report OPT; sends \E[>OPTI or \E[>OPTh for each OPT
- twn OPT off (OPT =1 => pagemode), for example, \E[>1;3;41

See EXAMPL;ES for an example of using this facility.
sbeUtoolVViDdo~

The window created by sheUtooi is based on the text facility that is described in the textedit man page.
The user is given a prompt at which to type commands and pop-up menus from which to select command
options.
sheUtool windows support cursor motions, using an letcltermcap entry called sun-cmd. Command windows automatically set the TERM environment variable to sun-cmd. So, if you rlogio(l C) to a machine
that does not have an entry for sun-cmd in its letcltermcap file, the error mesSage 'Type sun-cmd
unknown' results. To rectify this, type the command 'set TERM=sun'. Programs' written using the
curses(3X) (X' curses(3V) library packages will wen in a command window, but programs hard-coded for
sun-type tennina1s may not. When supporting a program that ptrl'onns cursor motions, the command window automatically takes on the characteristics of a tty window (as with sbeUtool(l». When that program
tenniDates or sleeps, the full command window functionality is restored.
cmdtool supports programs that use CBREAK and NO ECHO terminal modes. This support is nonnally
invisible to the user. However, programs that use RAW mode, such as rlogin(lC) and script(l), inhibit
command-line editing with the mouse. In this case, however, tty-style ERASE, word-kill and line-ldll characlm can still be used to edit the current command line.
The shelltool Menu
The sbelltool window menu is called the Term Pane menu and contains the following options and their

submenus:
Enable Page Mode
Enables page mode within shelltool •
Copy

Sun Release 4.1

Places the highlighted text on the clipboard.

La~tchan~~

11 June 1990

USER COMMANDS

SHELLTOOL ( 1 )

Paste

Puts the contents of the clipboard at the location pointed to by the cusor.

ScrolHng

Enables scrolling within sheUtool.

SHELLTOOL ( 1 )

EXAMPLES
The following aliases can be put into your -/.ahrc file:
1# dynamicaDy set the Dame stripe of the tool:
alias header 'echo -D "\E]I\!*\E\"'
1# dynamicaDy set the label on the icon:
alias iheader 'echo -D "\E]L\!*\E\"'
1# dynamicaDy set the image OIl the icon:
aHas icoD 'echo -0 "\E]I\!*\E\"'
FILES

-I.ttyswrc
lusrllib/ttyswrc
lusrlbinlxview/sheUtool
lusr/demol* SEE ALSO

cmdtool(l), more(l), xview(l), rlogin(1C), kbd(4S), termcap(5)

OpenWindows User's Guide
BUGS
If more than 256 characters are input to a terminal emulator subwindow without an intervening NEWLINE
the tenninal emuIator may bang. If this occurs, an alert will come up with a message saying &Too many
keystrokes in input buffer'. Choosing the Flush Input Buffer menu item may correct the problem. This
is a bug for a tenninal emulator subwindow running on top of or rlogin(1C) to a m~hine with pre-4.0
release kernel.
t

254

~tcbange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

TAPETOOL ( I )

USER COMMANDS

TAPETOOL ( I )

NAME
tapetOol - OpenWindows tool for reading files from tape or archiving files to tape
SYNOPSIS

tapetool [ generic-tool-arguments ]
AVAILABILITY

Although this command is available with the OpenWindows Application Environment software installation
options. For infonnation about installing OpenWindows, refer to the OpenWindows Installation and
Start-Up Guide .
DESCRIPTION

tapetool is an OpenWindows based XView application that uses the tar(I) command to write files to tape,
extract files from tape, or list the contents of a tape.
OPTIONS

generic-tool-arguments
tapetool accepts the generic tool arguments described in xview(1).
USAGE

tapetool is part of the OpenWindows user environment For a description of the basic concepts of
OpenWindows, see theOpenWindows User's Guide.
There are two windows associated with tapetool, the main window and the read window. The main window that appears when the tool is initially brought up is for writing files to tape. The read window appears
when you List the contents of a tape or choose either Read Selected or Read Entire List.
Brings up a Tape Contents window that lists the files on tape. It may take some time listing the
entire contents of a tape if it contains many files. If you want to extract just a few files and you
know the exact names of the files, you may use Read Selected that will bring up an empty Tape
Contents window. Use File To Read to put in the file names and then do a Read Entire List.
File names can be added using File To Read • File names can be deleted using the scrolling list
pop-up menu Read Functions.
Select AU Selects all the files listed in the window.
Deselect AU
Removes the highlight (deselects) all the files you have selected.
Delete Selected
Removes all the files you have selected.
Read The Tape Contents window does not have to be showing to do this. The files are put into the
directory specified by the Destination field if they do not contain fully qualified path names.
Selected Reads the files selected in the Tape Contents window.
Entire List Reads all the files listed in the Tape Contents window.
Entire Tape
Reads the entire tape.
Write Writes the file names listed in the main window to tape.
FUeToWrite
Adds file names to the main window scrolling list. This list has a pop-up menu for deleting files.
Write Functions
Deselect Selected
Deletes the files you have selected.
Deselect AU
Deletes all the files displayed in the window.
Destination:
Specifies the directory for the location of files read from tape. This field is only used when the
files on the tape do not have absolute path names.
List._

SunRel~4.1

Last change: II June 1990

255

USER COMMANDS

TAPETOOL ( 1 )

TAPETOOL ( 1 )

Props Property sheet for specifying tar{l) options.
Device:
Idev/rmtn Half inch magnetic tapes drives
ldev/rarn Quarter inch tape drives
Idev/rstn SCSI tape drives

Tar Options
Write:
No secs
No secs+

F option to tar(1). Excludes all directaies named sees
from tarfile.
FF option to tar(l). Excludes all directories named sees, all
files with .0 as their suffix, and all files named errs, core,

anda.out.
BlockIIO

b option to tar(l). This is the blocking factor for tape
records. The default blocking factor is 20 blocks. The block

size is determined automatically when reading tapes. The
detennination of the blocking facttt may be fooled when
reading from a pipe or a socket. The maximum blocking
factor is determined only by the amount of memory available
to tar when it is run. Larger blocking factors result in better
throughput, longer blocks on nine-track tapes, and better
media utilization.
Sym Links h option to tar{l). Follows symbolic links as if they were
normal files or directories. Normally, tar does not follow
symbolic links.
Show Errs I option to tar(l). Displays error messages if all links to
archived files cannot be resolved. If not used, no error messages are printed.
Suppress 0 option to tar(1). Suppresses information specifying owner
and modes and modes of directories that tar(l) nonnally
places in the archive.

Read:
No Check i option to tar(1). Ignores directory checksum errors.
Mod Time m option to tar(l). Do not extract modification times of
extracted files. The modification time will be the time of
extraction.

OrigMode
p option to tar(1). Restores the named files to their original
modes, ignoring the present umask(2). SetUID and sticky
information are also extracted if you are the super-user.

Delete Dir:
For writing files to tape
None
Retains filename path exactly as specified.
AD
Extracts the entire path from filename and writes just the
filename.
Pattern
Extracts the pattern specified and writes the filentJme left

over.
Other:
Err Exit

e option to tar(l). If any unexpected errors occur, tar aborts

immediately with a positive exit status.
X option to tar(l). Specifies a file containing a list of named
files or directories to be excluded when reading from tape.
Only one file can be specified.
Applies the options that have been set.

Exclude

Apply

256

Lastchange: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

TAPETOOL ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

TAPETOOL (1 )

Reset
Resets the options to the defaults.
You may drag and drop files from filemgr(l) onto the tapetool write window for writing files to rape. You
can also drop files onto the tapetool icon for writing.
FILES

Idev/nnt Half-inch magnetic tape interface
Idev/rarn Quarter-inch magnetic tape interface
Idev/rstn SCSI tape interface
BUGS

See bugs for tar(l).
SEE ALSO

filemgr (1), tar (1), tar (5)

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

251

TEX1EDIT ( 1 )

USER COMMANDS

iEX1EpIT ( 1 )

'*
NAME

textedit - XView window- and mouse-based text editor
SYNOPSIS

textedit [generic-tool-arguments] [ -Ea on I oft'] [ -adjustJsJ)endinl_delete] [ -Ei on I oft']
[-auto_indent] [-Eoon I off] [-okay_to_overwrite] [-Er on I off] [-read_only]
[ -Ec N] [ -checkpoint count ] [ -EL lines] [ -lower_context lines] [ -Em pixels]
[ -margin pixels] [ -En N] [ -number_of_lines lines] [ -ES N ]
[ -multtclick_space radius] [ -Et N] [ -tab_width tabstop] [ -ET N]
(-multi_click_timeout intrvl] [-EuN] [-history_limit max] [-EUN]
[ -upper_context lines] filename
AV AILABll..rrv

This command is available with the OpenWindows environment For information about installing
OpenWindows. refer to the OpenWindows Installation and Start-Up Guide.
DESCRIPTION

textedit is a window-based XView application that provides both mouse and pointer operations and keyboard accelerators for the editing of text In general. text editing throughout the OpenWindows user
environment uses textedit conventions, both in text display areas such as mail message windows and command panel text fields.
textedit operates via a set of command panel buttons and text fields and a set of menus and submenus
accessible from the main editing window.
OPTIONS

generic-tool-arguments
textedit accepts the XView generic tool arguments described in the XView Reference Manual.
-Eaonlorr
-adjustJsJending_delete
.
Choose whether or not an adjustment to a selection makes the selection "pending-delete." .The
default is off. This option corresponds to, and overrides, the adjust_isJendinLdelete Text
defaults entry.
-Eionlorr
-autoJndent
Choose whether or not to automatically indent newly-opened lines. The default is off.
Corresponds to the autoJndent Text default

-Eo on I orr
-okay_to_overwrite
Set behavior to the Store as New File menu item. If on a Store as New FOe to the current file is
treated as a Save Current File. If orr (the standard default), Store as New File operations using
the current filename results in an error m~ge. Corresponds to Store_self_is_save.
-Eronloff
-read_only
Tum read-only mode OIl or off. When OIl, text cannot be modified.
-EcN
-checkpoint count
Checkpoint after every count editing operation. If count is 0 (the standard default), no checkpointing takes place. Each character typed, each Paste, and each Cut counts as an editing operation. Corresponds to checkpoint_frequency.

-ELlines
-lower contextlines
- Specify the minimum number of lines to keep between the caret and the bottom of the text
subwindow. The default is 2. Corresponds to lower_context.

258

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

TEX'IEDIT( 1)

TEX'IEDIT ( 1 )

-Em pixels
-margin pixels
Set the scrollbar margin width in pixels. The default is 4. Cooesponds to left_margin.

-EnN
-number_o'_bes lines
Set the number of lines in the bottom subwindow. The default is 45.
-ESN
-multi_dick_space radius
Set the radius in pixels, within which clicks must occur to be treated as a multi-click selection.
The default is 3 pixels. Corresponds to multi_click_space.
-EtN
-tab_width tabstop
Set the number of SPACE characters displayed per TAB stop. The default is 8. This option has no
effect on the characters in the file. Conesponds to tab_width.
-ETN
-multCdick_timeout intrvl
Set the interval, in milliseconds, within which any two clicks must occur to be treated as a multiclick selection. The default is 390 milliseconds. Corresponds to multi_dick_timeout.
-EuN
-history_limit max
Set the maximum number of editing operations that can be undone or replayed. The default is 50.
Corresponds to history_limit.

-EU N
-upper_context lines
Set the minimum number of lines to keep between the caret and the top of the text subwindow.
The default is 2. Corresponds to upper_context.
USAGE

textedit is part of the OpenWindows user environment For a descriptions of the basic concepts of
OpenWindows, see the OpenWindows User's Guide.
Signal Processing
.
Iftextedit hangs, for whatever reason, you can send a SIGHUP sO signal to its process ID. which forces it to
write any changes (if possible):

kiU-HUPpid
The edits are written to the file textedit.pid in its working directory. If that fails, textedit successively tries
to write to a file by that name in /var/tmp, and then /tmp. In addition, whenever textedit catches a fatal
signal, such as SIGILL, it tries to write out the edits befending_delete
defaults entry, or the -Ea option. In this case, crRL-Middle makes the selection not pendingdelete.
Commands that operate on the primary selection do so even if the primary selection is not in the
window that issued the command.
Inserting Text and Command Characters

For the most part, typing any of the standard keys either inserts the corresponding character at the insertion
point, or erases characters. However, certain key combinations are treated as commands. Some of the

most useful are:

260

Command

Character

Description

Cut-Primary
Find-Primary

META-X
META-F

Copy-to-Clipboard
Paste-CUpboard
Copy-then-Paste

META-C
META-V
META-P

Go-to-EOF

crRL-RETURN

Erases, and moves to the Clipboard, the primary selection.
Searches the text for the pattern specified by the primary
selection or by the Clipboard, if there is no primary selection.
Copies the primary selection to the Clipboard.
Inserts the Oipboard contents at the insertion point
Copies the primary selection to the insertion point (through
the Clipboard).
Moves the insertion point to Ihe end of the text, positioning
the text so that the insertion point is visible.

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

TEXTEDIT ( I)

TEX1EDIT (I )

Function Keys

The commands indicated by use of the function keys are:
Command

Sun-213 Key

Description

Stop
Again

LI
L2

Repeats the pevious editing sequence since a

Undo

IA

Front

L5

Copy

L6

Open

L7

Paste

L8

Find

L9

Cut

LIO

Help

FI

Aborts the current command.

primary selection was made.
Undoes a prior editing sequence.
Makes the window completely visible (or
hides. it, if it is already exposed).
Copies the primary selection, either to the
Clipboard or at the closest end of the secondary
selection.
Makes the window iconic (or normal, if it is already
iconic).
Copies either the secondary selection or the Clipboard at
the insertion point
Searches for the pattern specified by, in ~, the
secondary selection, the primary selection, or the Clipboard.
Erases, and moves to the Clipboard, either the primary or
the secondary selection.
Produces help text.

Find usually searches the text forwards, towards the end. Holding down the SHIFT key while invoking
Find searches backward through the text. towards the beginning. If the pattern is not found before the
search encounters either extreme, it ·'wraps around" and continues from the other extreme. Find starts the
search at the appropriate end of the primary selection, if the primary selection is in the subwindow that the
search is made in; otherwise it starts at the insertion point. unless the subwindow cannot be edited. in which
case it starts at the beginning of the text

CTRL-Find invokes the Find and Replace pop-up frame.
Menu Items
File

A pull-right menu item for file operations.

Edit

A pull-right menu item equivalent of the editing function keys. The Edit submenu provides
Again, Undo, Copy, Paste, and Cut (same as function keys L2, lA. L6. LB, and LIO).

Display

A pull-right menu item for controlling the way text is displayed and line display fonnaL

Find

A pull-right menu item for find and delimiter matching operations.

Extras

A user definable pull-right menu item. The Extras standard submenu is controlled by

/usr/libl.ttxt_extras_menu, which has the same fonnat as .rootmenu file. This can be overridden in two ways:
1) Change the value of the .Xdefaults parameter text.extrasMenuFUename to the
correct file path.
2) Set the environment variable EXTRASMENU to the file desired.
Note that option 1 ovmides option 2 if both are used.
For more information see the DeslcSet Environment Reference Guide . See also
xview(l).
Only those items that are active appear as normal text in the menu; inactive items (which are inappropriate
at the time) are ·'grayed out".

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

261

USER COMMANDS

TEXTEDIT ( 1 )

TEXTEDIT ( 1 )

User Defined Commands
The file lusrllib/text_extras_menu specifies filter programs that are included in the text subwindow
Extras pull-right menu item. The file -I.textswrc specifies filter programs that are assigned to (available)
function keys. These filters are applied to the contents of the primary selection. Their output is entered at

the caret
The file lusrllib/textswrc is a sample containing a set of useful filters. It is not read automatically.
FILES

-I.textswrc
lusrllib/text extras menu
lusr/bin
filename %

textedit.pid
Itmpffext*

Specifies bindings of filters to function keys
Specifies bindings of filters for the extras menu pull-right items
Contains useful filters, including shift_lines and capitalize.
Prior version of filename is available here after a Save Current File menu
operation '
Edited version of filename; generated in response to fatal internal errors
Editing sess~on logs

SEE ALSO

kill(l)

Introduction to the Open Windows User Environment
DIAGNOSTICS
Cannot open file 'filename', aborting!

filename does not exist or cannot be read.

textedit produces the following exit status codes:

o
1
2
3
4

nonnal tennination
standard OpenWindows help message was printed
help message was requested and printed
abnonnal termination in response to a signal, usually due to an internal error
abnonnal termination during initialization, usually due to a missing file or running out of
swap space

BUGS

Multi-click to change the current selection does not work for Adjust Selection.
Handling of long lines is incorrect in certain scrolling situations.
There is no way to replay any editing sequence except the most recent.

262

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(I)

XVIEW(I)

NAME

XView - XView toolkit information
SYNOPSIS

There is no XView command per se, but this manual page will describe XView features and functions.
AVAILABILITY

This command is available with the XView software distribution.
DESCRIPTION

XView (X Window-System-based VisuaJ/lntegrated Environment for Workstations) is an Open Look
user-interface toolkit which supports interactive, graphics-based applications running under the X Window
System. For detailed infonnation see the XView Programming Manual.
USAGE
CompUIng XVJew Programs

XView programs are compiled with the following command line:
cc sourcefile.c -0 outputfile -Ixview -lolgx -IXII
Generk XVJew Functions

xvJnitO

Establishes the connection to the server, initializes the Notifier and the
DefaultslResource-Manager database, loads the Server Resource-Manager database,
reads the -/.xdefaults database and any passed attributes, and installs a default XIO
Errorllandler..
void
xv_init(attra)
 attrs;
Creates an object

Xv_object
xv_create(owner, package, attrs)
Xv_object
owner;
Xv-pkg
package;
 attra;

Destroys an object
int
xv_destroy (object)
Xv_opaque object;

Finds an object that meets certain criteria; or if the object doesn't exist, creates it _
(defauh bdlavior wbich can be defeated using XV_AUTO_CREATE, FALSE).
Xv_opaque
xv_find(owner, package, attra)
Xv_object
owner;
Xv-pkg
package;
 attra;

Sun Release 4.1

~tchange:

ll1unel990

263

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(I)

xv.JetO

XVlEW(I)
~

Gets the value of a single attribute.

Xv_opaque
xV_get(object, attra)
Xv object
object;
 attra;
Sets the value of one or mme attributes.

Xv_opaque
xv_set(object, attra)
Xv_object
object;
 attra;
Command Line Resource Arguments
In XView, display characteristics can be specified by adding command line arguments to the starting
application's start-up command The usage is as follows:

% program -argument} value} -argument2 value2 ...
In the tables below, Argument(s) shows the short argument followed by the long argument--either can be
used. Type describes the type of value the arguments can receive. Resource Name describes the X
resource name modified by the arguments. Derault is the default value. Description describes what the
arguments do. Example shows an example of a command using the argument
Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

Example:
Argument(s):
Type: .
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-Wx, or -scale
string ("small", "medium", "large", "extra_large")
Window.ScaIe

medium
Sets the initial scale of the application (larger or smaller). small is 10 pixels, medium is
12 pixels, large is 14 pixels and extra_Large is 19 pixels. The fontname resource 'will
override the scale.
cmdtool -scale eXU'a_large
-Wt, -fn, or -font
string
FontName
lucida-sans
Sets the name of the font used for the application (not control areas). To find out what
fonts are available, use the xlsfonts command (see reference manual page for more
infonnation). It is also possible to see the available fonts for the Open Windows server
with one of the NeWS demo prOgrams in the demo Navigator. Start this by choosing
"demos.•." from the default root menu. If the font you specify cannot be found, you see
will an error message such as:

XView warning: Cannot load/om 'galant-24' (Font paclcage)
XView warning: Attempting to load/om

264

Example:

cmdtool -fn fixed

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:

-Ws, or -size
integer integer
Window.Width and Window.Height
depends

~tchange:

11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(l)

XVIEW(l)

Description:
Example:

Sets the width and height of the application's base frame. The values are in pixels.
cmdtool-Ws 400 500

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-Wp, or -position
integez integer
Window.x and Window.Y
depends on window managez
Sets the initial position of the application's base frame in pixels. The upper left comer
of the screen is at position (0,0), with the x-axis increasing to the left, and the y-axis
increasing downward. To detennine framebuffer size, one can use the  command on the local machine. To determine screen size for a remote display, one can use
Xlib functions (see the Xlib Programmers Manual). These values will also be generated
by the "Save Workspace" option on the root menu into the SHOME/.openwin-init file
when using the Open Look Window Manager..
cmdtool-Wp 100 200

Example:
Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-wa, or -geometry
suing of the format (WxH) ([+I-JX[+I-JY)
Window.Geometry
depends
This sets both the size and the placement of the application's base frame. This option has
priority ovez the -size and -position arguments. The size and placement parts of the
value are optional. You can set just the size, just the position, or both. The size values
are measured in pixels, and the position values use the same semantics as -position.
Howevez, if you use the '-' in front of an X value, it will be taken as relative to the right
hand side of the screen, instead of the left Likewise, if you uSe the '-' with the Y value,
it will be taken relative to the bottom of the screen instead of the top.

Examples:

cmdtool -geometry SOOx600
(will make the base frame SOOx600 pixels, with the position set by the window manager)

cmdtool -WG +10+20
(will make the base frame of default size with the left hand side of the ~e 10 pixels
from the left hand side of the screen, and the top of the frame 20 pixels from the top of
the screen)

cmdtool-WG -10+20
(will make the base frame of default size with the right hand side of the frame 10 pixels

from the right hand side of the screen, and the top of the frame 20 pixels from the top of
the screen)

cmdtool -geometry 4OOx300'()'()
(will make the base frame 400x300 pixels with the right hand side of the frame flush
against the right hand side of the screen, and the bottom of the frame flush with the bottom of the screen)

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:
Example:

Sun Release 4.1

-WP, -icon..,position
integez integer
Icon.x Icon.Y
depends on window managez
Sets the position of the application's icon in pixels. Uses the same semantics as
-position for base frames.
cmdtool-WP 400 20

~tchange: 11 June 1990

265

XVIEW(I)

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:
Example:

XVIEW(I)

-WI. -label. ex' ,.title
SIring
Window.Header
depends on the application
Sets a default label for the base frame's header. However, the application can overwrite
this setting and display its own header.
andtool-WI "Header Text"

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:
Examples:

-Wi. and +Wi
boolean
Window lconic
+Wi
These options conttol how an application will come up, open or closed (iconified).
andtool +Wi (will make the COldfOOt come up open)
cmdtooI -Wi (will make the cmdtoot come up closed)

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description

-Wf, or -foreground_color
integer integer integer
Window.Color.Foreground
0 00
See Description in -Wb below.

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-Wb, or -background
integer integer integer
Window.Colex'.Background
255 255 255
These options allow the user to specify the foreground color (e.g., the color of the text in
a textsw), or the background color (e.g.• the color that the text is painted on) of an application. The three values should be integers between 0 and 255. They specify the
amount of red, green and blue that is in the color. See .fg and -bg below for infonnation on similar functions.
cmdtool-WfO 0255 -Wb 100 100 100
(would come up with a blue foreground, with a gray background)

Example:

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-fg, or -foreground
string (color name, or hexidecimal color specification)
Window.Color.Foregrowld
black
See Description in -bg below.

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-bg, or -background

Examples:

266

USER COMMANDS

string (color name, ex' hexidecimal color specification)
Window.Col(X.Background
white
These options are similar to the -Wf and -Wb options,-except that they take a color argument in the fonn of a predefined color name (lavender, grey, goldenrod. ,etc.) from
$OPENWINHOMFJIib/rbg.txt, ex' a hexidecimal representation. The hexidecimal
representation is of the form pound sign (#) followed by the hexidecimal representation
of tile red, green and blue aspects of the color.
andtool-fg blue -bg gray
(comes up with a blue fcreground, with a gray background)
andtool -fg #d8OOff -bg white
(comes up with a purple foreground, with a white background)

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(l)

. Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

Example:
Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:
Example:
Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:
Example:

XVIEW(I)

-WI, or -icon_image
string
Icon.Pixmap
depends on application
Sets the default tilename for the icon's image. However, the application can overwrite
Ibis setting and display its own icon image. The tile must be in XView icon format The
P-OgraJD  will allow one to cmlte an image in the icon fonnat Several icons
have been provided in the directory SOPENWINHOMF/include/images. By convention, icon format tiles end with the suffix • Jeon".
cmdtool -WI lusr(mclude/lDlages/stopJeon
-WL, or -icon_label
string
Icon.Footer
depends on application
Sets a default label for the base frame's icon. However, the application can overwrite
this setting and display its own icon label.
cmdtool-WL "Icon Label"
-WT, or -icon_font
string
Icon.FontName
depends
Sets the name of the font used for the application's icon. To find out what fonts are
available, use xlsfonts (see reference manual page for more information).
cmdtool-WT '.century schoolbook.'

Argument(s):

-Wd, or -default
string string
Resource Name: given by the first string
Default:
none
Description:
This option allows the user to set resources that don't have command line equivalents.
The format is -c:Iefault resource-name value • The XView resources without specific
command line argwnents are discussed in the following section.
Example:
cmdtool -default OpenWindows.ScrollbarPlacement left

Type:

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

Example:

-xrm

string
given in the string
none
lbisoption allows the user to set resources that don't have command line equivalents.
This is similar to the -default option, but it takes only one argument, a string in the form
of resource-name:value.
cmdtool-xrm OpenWindows.ScrollbarPJacement"right

-WH, or -help

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

Prints a description of the valid command line arguments for the application.

Argument(s):
Type:

-sync or -synchronous, and +sync or +synchronous
boolean

Sun Release 4.1

none
none

none

Last change: 11 June 1990

'1fl7

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(I)

XVIEW(I)

Resource Name: Window.Synchronous
Default:
+synchronous
Description:
These options allow you to make the connection that the application has with the XII
serv(2' either synchronous (-sync) or asynchronous (+sync).
Argument(s):
Type:

-Wr, or -display
string (host:display (.screen))

Resou~eName: S~(2'Nmne

Default:
Description:

Examples:

laken from the DISPLAY environment variable
Sets the name of the XII server on which to connect. bost is the name or address of the
~hine on whose saver you have pennission to display. display is a number
corresponding to the server on which to display for that machine, and screen
corresponds to which screen for the saver. See reference manual page on  for
more details on adding to pennissions list
cmdtool -display foobar:O
(will bring up a cmdtool on the default screen of the display #0 of host foobar)
cmdtool -display foobar:O.I
(will bring up a cmdtool on screen #1 of display #0 of host foobar)

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-Wdr, or -disable_retained
boolean
Window.MonoDisableRetained
Not Retained on' color systems, and Retained on monochrome systems
This option is useful for applications running on a monochrome display, where server
memory is at a minimum. For performance reasons, monochrome windows are by
default retained by the server. Using retained windows will use more memory in the
XII server; however, it also speeds up repainting when the window is covered and
Wlcovered by other windows. When true, monochrome windows are not retained, thus
saving server memory.

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-Wdxio, or -disable_xio_error_handler
boolean
none
enable xio handler-this option disables it
This option is useful for debugging an application. Whenever there is a fatal XIO error,
the server will print an error message before exiting. XView installs a error handler to
keep those messages from appearing. IT you would like to see these messages, use this
option.

Argument(s):
Type:
Resource Name:
Default:
Description:

-Wfsdb, or -fullscreendebug
boolean
Fullscreen.Debug
FALSE
Enables/disables fullscreen debugging I1l()de during which XGrabs (XGrabServerQ,
XGrabKeyboardQ, XGrabPointerQ) are not done. When using FULLSCREEN, the XII
server will be grabbed which prevents other windoWs on the S(2'Ver from responding
ootil the grab has been released by the one window which initiated the grab. Refer to
the Appendix F in the XView Reference Manual: Converting SunView Applications for
further details.

Argument(s):
-Wfsdbs, or -fullscreendebugserver
Type:
booleal
Resource Name: FuUscreen.Debugserver

268

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

XVIEW(I)

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(I)

Default:
Description:

FALSE
Enables/disables server grabbing (XGrabServerO) that is done via the fullscreen pkg.
Refer to the Appendix F in the XView Reference Manual: Converting SunView Applications for fwther details.

Argument(s):
Type:

-Wfsdbk, or -fu11screendebugkbd
boolean

Resource Name: Fullsaeen.Debugkbd

Default:
Description:

FALSE
Enables/disables keyboard grabbing (XGrabKeyboardO) that is done via the fullscreen
pkg. Refer to the Appendix F in the XView Reference Manual: Converting SunView
Applications for further details.

-Wfsdbp, or -fullscreendebugpar
boolean
Resource Name: Fu1lscreen.Debugptr
FALSE
Default:
Description:
Enables/disables pointer grabbing (XGrabPointerQ) that is done via the fullscreen pkg.
Refer to the Appendix F in the XView Reference Manual: Converting SunView Applications for fwther details.

Argument(s):
Type:

.xderaults FOe

The .XdefallIts file is used to store and relrieve resource settings. We recommend, however, that you use
the command line arguments descnbed above in order to change display characteristics. Changing the
resources in the .xdefaults file will modify the behaviour of the user's session. Novice users should not
casually hand modify these settings. Before attempting edits to this file please read the appropriate sections
of the Xlib Programming Manual on the file fonnat and the specific properties you intend to change.
Note that resoW'Ces docmnented below do not have command line arguments. It is still possible, however,
to change them without altering the .xdefaults file. Refer to the command line arguments -xrm and defaults for instructions on how to to this. Additional resources that have command line arguments are
documented the previous section.
The resources are documented in the following formac
Resource:

Values:
Description
Resource:

Values:
Description

Resource:

Values:
Description

Sun Release 4.1

Resource Name ( Props if resource can be modified by the OpenWindows Property
Sheet)
Possible Values. and/or Format of Values 10 be Assigned to Resource (Default Value)"
Description ofResource.
window.synchronous, +sync -sync
True, False (False)
Useful when debugging or tracking down a problem since the e2TOI' codes emitted from .
Xlib will correspond to the immediate request made. Running in a synchronous mode
will cause the application to run significantly slower.
mouse.modifier.button2
Shift, Carl, any valid modifier keysym (Shift)
When using a mouse with less than three buttons, this resource gets an equivalent mapping for the second button which is the ADJUST button on a three button mouse. For
more infonnation on keysyms, see the  reference manual page, Xlib documentation. and the include file SOPENWINHOME/include/XII/Xkeymap.h.

Last change: II Iune 1990

269

XVIEW(I)

270

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(I)

Resource:
Values:
Description

mouse.modifier.button3
Shift, Ctrl, any valid modifier keysym (Ctrl)
When using a mouse with less than three buttons, this resource gets an equivalent mapping for the third button which is the MENU button on a three ' button mouse. For more
information on keysyms, see the  reference manual page, Xlib documentation, and the include file SOPENWINHOME/include/XII/Xkeymap.h.

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows.beep (Props)
never, notices, always (always)
When the value is notices, the audible bell will ring only when a notice pops up. When
the value is never, the audible bell will never ring. When the value is always, the audible bell will always ring when the bell function is called by a program.

Resource:
Values:
Description

alann. visible
True, False (True)
"
When ringing the bell in an XView program, flash the window as well to warn the user.

Default
Values:
Description

OpenWindows. windowColor (Props)
any valid XII color specification (#cccccc--80% grey)
Specify the base color for control areas for 3-D look. Takes hexadecimal representation.
Three other colors used for shading and highlighting are calculated based upon the value
of the specified control color. The actual calculated values are done by the OLGX
library to provide a consistent color calculation between XView and OLWM. The desktop properties program allows a full range of customization and previews what the
chosen 3-D look will look like. Does not apply to monochrome displays.

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows. workspaceColor (Props)
any valid XII color specification (#cccccc--80% grey)
Specifies the color for the root window and the background color for icons that blend
into the desktop.

Resource:
Values:
Description

xview.icccmcompliant
True, False (True)
When False, tell XView to set window manager hints in a way that was used before the
ICCCM was adopted. Useful for window managers that are released before XIIR4.
Not needed with the Open Look Window Manager provided with Open Windows.

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows.3DLook.Color
True, False (True on all but monochrome screens)
When False, do not use the 3-D look on a color or greyscale screen.

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows.dragRightDistance (Props)
N (100)
Used by menus to determine when a pullright submenu would display when dragging
over the menu item near a submenu. N is an integer greater than O. A re3$Onable value
might start at 20 and go to 200 or so. May need to try different values to see what feels
right to each person.

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows.selectDisplaysMenu (Props)
True, False (False)
When True. the SELECT button (usually left mouse) will display the menu as well as
the MENU button (usually right mouse).

Last change: 11 June 1990

Sun Release 4.1

XVIEW(I)

USER COMMANDS

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows.popupJumpCursor (Props)
True, False (False)
When False, do not warp the mouse to the notice when it appears.

Resource:
Values:
Description

N(l)

XVIEW(l)

notice.beepCount
Where N is an integer to specify how many times to ring the bell when a notice appears.
Ringing the bell can consist of either an audible beep and/or a visual flash.

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows.scroIlbarPlacement (Props)
Left, Right (Right)
When set to Left, put all scroll bars on the lefthand side of the window or object

Resource:
Values:
Description

OpenWindows.multiClickTimeout (Props)
N (4)
•
Where N is an integer greater than 2. Set the number of tenths of a second between
clicks for a multi-click. A click is button-down, button-up pair.

Resource:
Values:
Description

text.delimiterChars
string (' 'JJl1!\"#$%&\'O*+,-J:;<=>?@[\\]"_'{lr')
This resource allows the user to select the delimiter characters that are used when doing
word level selections in the XView package. It was added because of the needs of the
international marketplace, and it allows the user to define the local delimiters for the
character set that is being used with the current keyboard and Sun workstation.
The selection of delimiters will be automatically available to the user once the SunOS
4. I becomes the default operating system environment, however this resource is used as
a bridge during that period.
Note that the octal characters can be scrambled by Xnn during a rewrite of the value of
text.delimiter.Chars. Xnn interprets the text.delimiterChar string when it is loaded.
Specifically it will decode the backslashed portions of the string and convert them to
octal representations. When this is passed to the client application, the logic will function correctly. However, this misbehavior of Xrm causes the string to· be stored
incorrectly if the user saves the .Xdefaults file using the Xnn content of the string. The
specific problem(s) that occur are the stripping of the backslash characters and the
expansion of the tab character ( 11).
To correct this problem, one can put the textdelimiterChar entry into an.xdefaults file
that will not be overwritten when saving the workspace properties (for example, a system wide defaults file). Or a copy of the textdelimiterChar entry can be inserted after
.Xdefaults file saves.

Resource:
Values:
Description

scrollbar.jumpCursor (Props)
True, FaIse (frue)
When False, the scrollbar will not move the mouse pointer when scrolling.

Resource:
Values:
Description

scrollbar.repeatDelay
N (100)
.
Where N is some integer greater than 2. Specifies the time in milliseconds when a click
becomes a repeated action.

Sun Release 4.1

Last change: 11 June 1990

271

USER COMMANDS

XVIEW(I)

Values:
Description

N (100)
Where N is

Resource:
Values:
Description

scrollbar.lineInterval
N(1)
Where N is some integer greatez than O. Specifies the time in milliseconds between
repeats of a single line scroll. How long to pause scrolling when bolding down the
SELECr button on the scrollbar elevator. Saollbar sets up a timez routine for repeats.

Resource:
Values:
Description

keyboarddeleteChar
C (177 = octal for Delete)
Where C is some character eithez typed into an editor or specified with an octal
equivalent. Specifies the delete character. This resource applies to text windows only
and not to panel text items. This would work in eithez cmdtool or textedit or the compose window of mailtool.

Resource:
Values:
Description

keyboarddeleteW ord
C ( 27 =octal for loW)
Where C is some character either typed into an editor or specified with an octal
equivalent Specifies the delete word character. This resource applies to text windows
only and not to panel text items. This would work in either cmdtool or textedit or the
compose window of mailtool.

Resource:
Values:
Description

keyboard.deleteLine
C
Where C is some character either typed into an editor or specified with an octal
equivalent Specifies the delete line character. This resource applies to text windows
only and not to panel text items. This would work in either cmdtool or textedit or the
compose window of mailtool.

Resource:
Values:
Description

t.extmaxDocumentSize
N(2000)
Where N specifies the bytes used in mem